You are on page 1of 336

Theoretical Manual of

Strip Theory Program


SEAWAY for Windows
J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
Report 1370

TU DELFT

September 2003

Ship Hydromechanics Laboratory


Delft University of Technology

AMARCON

Advanced Maritime Consulting


www.amarcon.com

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Summary
This report aims to be a guide and help for those people who want to study the theoretical
backgrounds and the algorithms of a ship motions computer code based on the strip theory.
The underlying report describes in detail the theoretical backgrounds and algorithms used by
the first author during the development of his six-degrees-of-freedom ship motions computer
code, called SEAWAY.
The six ship motions of and about the centre of gravity G of the vessel have been defined in
the next figure.

Definition of ship motions


According to Newtons second law, the equations of motion for six degrees of freedom of an
oscillating ship in waves in a earth-bounded axes system have to be written as follows:

{M
6

j =1

ij

&x&i } = sum of all forces or moments in direction i

for: i = 1,...6

Because a linear system has been considered here, the forces and moments in the right hand
side of these equations consist of a superposition of:
so-called hydromechanic forces and moments, caused by a harmonic oscillation of the
rigid body in the undisturbed surface of a fluid being previously at rest, and
so-called exciting wave forces and moments on the restrained body, caused by the
incoming harmonic waves.
With this, the system of a with six degrees of freedom moving ship in waves can considered to
be a linear mass-damper-spring system with frequency-dependent coefficients and linear
exciting forces and moments:

{(M
6

j =1

ij

+ aij ) &x&i + bij x& i + cij xi } = Fi

for: i = 1,...6

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

In here, x i with indices i = 1,2,3 are the displacements of G (surge, sway and heave) and x i
with indices i = 4,5,6 are the rotations about the axes through G (roll, pitch and yaw). The
indices ij present at motion i the coupling with motion j .
The masses in the equations of motion above consist of solid masses or solid mass moments
of inertia of the ship ( M ij ) and added masses or added mass moments of inertia caused
by the disturbed water, the hydrodynamic masses or mass moments of inertia (a ij ). An
oscillating ship generates waves it self too; energy will be radiated from the ship. The
hydrodynamic damping-terms ( bij x& i ) account for this. For the heave, roll and pitch motions,
hydrostatic spring-terms ( c ij x i ) have to be added. The right hand sides of the equations of
motion consist of exciting wave forces and moments ( Fi ).
In the so-called strip theory, the ship will be divided in 20 tot 30 cross sections, of which the
two-dimensional hydromechanic coefficients and exciting wave loads will be calculated. To
obtain the three-dimensional values, these values will be integrated over the ship length
numerically. Finally, the differential equations will be solved to obtain the motions. These
calculations will be performed in the frequency domain.
It was in 1949 that Ursell published his potential theory for determining the hydrodynamic
coefficients of semicircular cross sections, oscillating in deep water in the frequency domain.
Using this, for the first time a rough estimation could be made of the motions of a ship in
regular waves at zero forward speed.
Shortly after that Tasai, Grim, Gerritsma and many other scientists used various already
existing conformal mapping techniques (to transform ship-like cross sections to a semicircle)
together with Ursells theory, in such a way that the motions in regular waves of more realistic
hull forms could be calculated too. Most popular was the 2-parameter Lewis conformal
mapping technique. The exciting wave loads were found from the loads in undisturbed waves
the so-called Froude-Krilov forces or moments completed with diffraction terms
accounting for the presence of the ship in these waves.
Borrowed from the broadcasting technology, Denis en Pierson published in 1953 a
superposition method to describe the irregular waves too. The sea was considered to be the
sum of many simple harmonic waves; each wave with its own frequency, amplitude, direction
and random phase lag. By calculating the responses of the ship on each of these individual
harmonic waves and adding up the responses of the ship, the energy distribution of the ships
behaviour in irregular waves could be found. These irregular motions are characterised by
significant amplitude and average period.
However, these theories provided the motions at zero forward speed only. In 1957, KorvinKroukovski en Jacobs published a method - which was further improved in the sixties - to
account for the effect of forward ship speed.
So at the end of the fifties, all components for an elementary ship motions computer program
for deep water were already available.
Fukuda published in 1962 a calculation technique for the internal sheer forces and bending
moments in a cross section of a ship.
Frank published in 1967 his pulsating source theory to calculate the hydrodynamic
coefficients of a cross section of a ship in deep water directly, without using conformal
mapping. The potential coefficients of a fully submerged cross section (bulbous bow) and

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

sections with a very low area coefficient (often present in the aft body) could be calculated
now too.
Using Lewis conformal mapping, Keil published in 1974 his theory for obtaining the potential
coefficients in very shallow water.
Useful theories to calculate the added resistance of a ship due to waves were given by Boese
(integrated pressure method) in 1970 and Gerritsma and Beukelman (radiated energy method)
in 1972.
So far, all hydrodynamic coefficients had been determined with the potential theory. However,
roll requires a viscous correction on that. Ikeda, Himeno and Tanaka published in 1978 a very
useful semi-empirical method for determining the viscous roll damping components.
The introduction of personal computers in the early eighties increased the accessibility for
carrying out ship motion calculations considerably; even non-specialists could become users
too. From then on the computer capacity and the computing speed increased very fast, so that
three-dimensional theories could be developed much easier and cheaper now.
Because of the complex problem of forward speed in 3-D theories however, the 2-D approach
(strip theory) is still very favourable for calculating the behaviour of a ship at forward speed.
The many advantages and just a few disadvantages, when comparing 2-D with 3-D, had been
discussed very clearly by Faltinsen and Svensen in 1990.
Among others as a consequence of the work of the researchers mentioned above, a DOS
personal computer strip theory program - called SEAWAY - had been completed by the Delft
University of Technology at the end of the eighties. Recently, a Windows version has been
completed too, see web site www.shipmotions.nl or www.amarcon.com.
Based on the linear strip theory, this program calculates for 6 degrees of freedom in the
frequency domain the hydromechanic loads, wave loads, absolute and relative motions, added
resistance and internal loads of displacement ships, barges and yachts in regular and irregular
waves. When ignoring interaction effects between the two individual hulls, the behaviour of
catamarans and semi-submersibles can be calculated too. The program is suitable for deep
water as well as for very shallow water. Viscous roll damping, bilge keels, free-surface antiroll tanks, external moments and (linear) mooring springs can be added.
The computer code has been verified and validated extensively by the authors, many students
and a large number of industrial users.
Error messages, advises and all type of comments on this technical report are very welcome
by e-mail to J.M.J.Journee@wbmt.tudelft.nl or Leon.Adegeest@amarcon.com.

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Table of Contents:
1

Introduction........................................................................................................................11
1.1 About the Authors..........................................................................................................11
1.2 About this Manual........................................................................................................ 12
2
Strip Theory Methods ....................................................................................................... 15
2.1 Definitions .................................................................................................................... 17
2.2 Incident Wave Potential................................................................................................ 20
2.2.1 Continuity Condition............................................................................................ 21
2.2.2 Laplace Equation.................................................................................................. 21
2.2.3 Seabed Boundary Condition................................................................................. 22
2.2.4 Free Surface Dynamic Boundary Condition......................................................... 22
2.2.5 Free Surface Kinematic Boundary Condition....................................................... 24
2.2.6 Dispersion Relationship ........................................................................................ 25
2.2.7 Relationships in Regular Waves........................................................................... 26
2.3 Floating Rigid Body in Waves...................................................................................... 28
2.3.1 Fluid Requirements............................................................................................... 28
2.3.2 Forces and Moments............................................................................................. 30
2.3.3 Hydrodynamic Loads............................................................................................ 31
2.3.4 Wave and Diffraction Loads ................................................................................. 36
2.3.5 Hydrostatic Loads................................................................................................. 38
2.4 Equations of Motion..................................................................................................... 39
2.5 Strip Theory Approaches.............................................................................................. 43
2.5.1 Zero Forward Ship Speed ..................................................................................... 43
2.5.2 Forward Ship Speed.............................................................................................. 44
2.5.3 End-Terms............................................................................................................. 46
2.6 Hydrodynamic Coefficients.......................................................................................... 48
3
2-D Potential Coefficients ................................................................................................ 51
3.1 Conformal Mapping Methods....................................................................................... 53
3.1.1 Lewis Conformal Mapping................................................................................... 54
3.1.2 Extended Lewis Conformal Mapping................................................................... 58
3.1.3 Close-Fit Conformal Mapping.............................................................................. 59
3.1.4 Mapping Comparisons .......................................................................................... 63
3.2 Potential Theory of Tasai.............................................................................................. 65
3.2.1 Heave Motions ...................................................................................................... 66
3.2.2 Sway Motions ....................................................................................................... 76
3.2.3 Roll Motions ......................................................................................................... 88
3.2.4 Low and High Frequencies................................................................................. 100
3.3 Potentia l Theory of Keil.............................................................................................. 103
3.3.1 Notations of Keil................................................................................................. 103
3.3.2 Basic Assumptions.............................................................................................. 104
3.3.3 Vertical Motions.................................................................................................. 106
3.3.4 Horizontal Motions ............................................................................................. 133
3.3.5 Appendices ......................................................................................................... 144
3.4 Potential Theory of Frank ........................................................................................... 153
3.4.1 Notations of Frank .............................................................................................. 153
3.4.2 Formulation of the Problem................................................................................ 155
3.4.3 Solution of the Problem...................................................................................... 157
3.4.4 Low and High Frequencies................................................................................. 161
3.4.5 Irregular Frequencies .......................................................................................... 162
7

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

3.4.6 Appendices ......................................................................................................... 165


3.5 Comparisons between Calculated Potential Data ....................................................... 173
3.6 Estimated Potential Surge Coefficients ...................................................................... 175
Viscous Damping............................................................................................................ 177
4.1 Surge Damping ........................................................................................................... 178
4.1.1 Total Surge Damping.......................................................................................... 178
4.1.2 Viscous Surge Damping...................................................................................... 179
4.2 Roll Damping.............................................................................................................. 180
4.2.1 Experimental Determination............................................................................... 181
4.2.2 Empirical Formula for Barges ............................................................................ 183
4.2.3 Empirical Method of Miller................................................................................ 183
4.2.4 Semi-Empirical Method of Ikeda ....................................................................... 184
Hydromechanical Loads ................................................................................................. 197
5.1 Hydromechanical Forces for Surge ............................................................................ 198
5.2 Hydromechanical Forces for Sway............................................................................. 201
5.3 Hydromechanical Forces for Heave ........................................................................... 204
5.4 Hydromechanical Moments for Roll .......................................................................... 207
5.5 Hydromechanical Moments for Pitch......................................................................... 210
5.6 Hydromechanical Moments for Yaw.......................................................................... 213
Exciting Wave Loads ...................................................................................................... 217
6.1 Wave Potential............................................................................................................ 217
6.2 Classical Approach..................................................................................................... 219
6.2.1 Exciting Wave Forces for Surge ......................................................................... 219
6.2.2 Exciting Wave Forces for Sway.......................................................................... 221
6.2.3 Exciting Wave Forces for Heave ........................................................................ 223
6.2.4 Exciting Wave Moments for Roll ....................................................................... 225
6.2.5 Exciting Wave Moments for Pitch...................................................................... 227
6.2.6 Exciting Wave Moments for Yaw....................................................................... 228
6.3 Approximating 2-D Diffraction Approach................................................................. 229
6.3.1 Hydromechanical Loads ..................................................................................... 229
6.3.2 Energy Considerations ........................................................................................ 231
6.3.3 Wave Loads......................................................................................................... 232
6.4 Numerical Comparisons ............................................................................................. 238
Transfer Functions of Motions ....................................................................................... 239
7.1 Centre of Gravity Motions .......................................................................................... 240
7.2 Local Absolute Displacements ................................................................................... 243
7.3 Local Absolute Velocities ........................................................................................... 244
7.4 Local Absolute Accelerations ..................................................................................... 245
7.4.1 Accelerations in the Earth-Bound Axes System................................................. 245
7.4.2 Accelerations in the Ship-Bound Axes System.................................................. 245
7.5 Local Vertical Relative Displacements....................................................................... 247
7.6 Local Vertical Relative Velocities............................................................................... 248
Anti-Rolling Devices ...................................................................................................... 249
8.1 Bilge Keels.................................................................................................................. 250
8.2 Passive Free-Surface Tanks........................................................................................ 251
8.2.1 Theoretical Approach......................................................................................... 251
8.2.2 Experimental Approach...................................................................................... 255
8.2.3 Effect of Free-Surface Tanks .............................................................................. 257
8.3 Active Fin Stabilisers.................................................................................................. 258
8.4 Active Rudder Stabilisers ........................................................................................... 261
8

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
9

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

External Linear Springs .................................................................................................. 263


9.1 External Loads ............................................................................................................ 263
9.2 Additional Coefficients............................................................................................... 264
9.3 Linearised Mooring Coefficients................................................................................ 266
10 Added Resistance due to Waves ..................................................................................... 267
10.1 Radiated Energy Method ........................................................................................ 269
10.2 Integrated Pressure Method .................................................................................... 271
10.3 Comparison of Results............................................................................................ 273
11 Bending and Torsion Moments....................................................................................... 275
11.1 Still Water Loads .................................................................................................... 281
11.2 Dynamical Lateral Loads........................................................................................ 282
11.3 Dynamical Vertical Loads....................................................................................... 284
11.4 Dynamical Torsion Loads....................................................................................... 287
12 Statistics in Irregular Waves........................................................................................... 289
12.1 Normalised Wave Energy Spectra .......................................................................... 290
12.1.1 Neumann Wave Spectrum................................................................................... 290
12.1.2 Bretschneider Wave Spectrum............................................................................ 290
12.1.3 Mean JONSWAP Wave Spectrum...................................................................... 291
12.1.4 Definition of Parameters..................................................................................... 291
12.2 Response Spectra and Statistics.............................................................................. 295
12.3 Shipping Green Water............................................................................................. 300
12.4 Bow Slamming........................................................................................................ 302
12.4.1 Criterium of Ochi................................................................................................ 302
12.4.2 Criterium of Conolly........................................................................................... 303
13 Twin-Hull Ships.............................................................................................................. 307
13.1 Hydromechanical Coefficients ............................................................................... 307
13.2 Equations of Motion............................................................................................... 308
13.3 Hydromechanical Forces and Moments ................................................................. 309
13.4 Exciting Wave Forces and Moments...................................................................... 310
13.5 Added Resistance due to Waves ............................................................................. 314
13.5.1 Radiated Energy Method .................................................................................... 314
13.5.2 Integrated Pressure Method ................................................................................ 314
13.6 Bending and Torsion Moments............................................................................... 315
14 Numerical Recipes.......................................................................................................... 317
14.1 Polynomials ............................................................................................................ 317
14.1.1 First Degree Polynomial..................................................................................... 317
14.1.2 Second Degree Polynomial................................................................................. 318
14.2 Integrations ............................................................................................................. 319
14.2.1 First Degree Integration...................................................................................... 319
14.2.2 Second Degree Integration................................................................................. 319
14.2.3 Integration of Wave Loads.................................................................................. 320
14.3 Derivatives.............................................................................................................. 323
14.3.1 First Degree Derivative....................................................................................... 323
14.3.2 Second Degree Derivative .................................................................................. 323
14.4 Curve Lengths......................................................................................................... 326
14.4.1 First Degree Curve.............................................................................................. 326
14.4.2 Second Degree Curve ......................................................................................... 326
15 References....................................................................................................................... 329

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

10

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Introduction

SEAWAY is a frequency-domain ship motions PC program, based on the linear strip theory
for calculating the hydromechanic loads, wave-induced loads, motions, added resistance and
internal loads for six degrees of freedom of displacement ships and yachts, barges, semisubmersibles or catamarans, sailing in regular and irregular waves. The program is suitable for
deep water as well as for shallow water. Viscous roll damping, bilge keels, anti-roll tanks, free
surface effects and (linear springs) can be added.
This computer code has been developed in the late eighties and early nineties under DOS by
the first author. His last SEAWAY for DOS version was released in 2002.
In 2003, the second author took over the software implementation and distribution part of the
job and developed the new SEAWAY for Windows release.
Information can be found at web site www.shipmotions.nl or www.amarcon.com.

1.1 About the Authors


Johan Journe had obtained his Polytechnical Degree in 1964 at the Avond-HTS Rotterdam
and in 1975 his MSc degree at the Delft University of Technology. Both degrees in Naval
Architecture were obtained, alongside a full-time job, by stud ying in the evening hours.
He started his working career in 1958 at the Rotterdam Dockyard Company, first with
construction work in the shipbuilding factory and two years later with technical ship design
work in the drawing office of this yard. In 1963, he became Technical Officer at the Ship
Hydromechanics Laboratory of the Delft University of Technology. After obtaining his MSc
degree in 1975, he became Scientific Officer there, some years later Assistant Professor and in
1992 Associate Professor.
During the years 1985 through 1990, Johan had developed - as a more or less derailed hobby this 2-D ship motions computer code SEAWAY. This development was a very useful exercise
for him to understand in a very detailed way the theory and the practice of the behaviour of a
ship in waves, see Journe [1992]. Parts of this study were basis for comprehensive lecture
notes on Offshore Hydromechanics, see Journe and Massie [2001].
Since 1984, Johan Journe is teaching Ship and Offshore Hydromechanics to students of the
Mechanical and Civil Engineering Departments and since 1990 also to students of the
Maritime Technology Department.
Leon Adegeest was one of the founders of AMARCON in January 2001. AMARCONs major
activities are developing software for decision support onboard using seakeeping theory and
related consultancy and engineering work.
Before AMARCON, Leon has worked at Det Norske Veritas (DNV) in Norway and at
MARIN in the Netherlands. At DNV (1997 2001) he developed methods for the prediction
of extreme non-linear ship responses in irregular seas. As Group Leader Hydrodynamics, he
was heavily involved in the development and implementation of DNV's non-linear 3-D
seakeeping software package WASIM. Practical experience in the use of seakeeping codes
was gained during commercial projects, which include non-linear wave load analyses for large
container carriers, fatigue analyses for a RoRo-carrier and water on deck evaluations for
production vessels. From 1994 to 1997, he worked at the Maritime Research Institute
Netherlands (MARIN) as project manager in the Trials and Monitoring group.
Leon Adegeest holds a MSc degree in Naval Architecture from the Delft University of
Technology. In 1994, he finished his PhD study at this university. The title of the thesis was
Non-linear Hull Girder Loads in Ships, see Adegeest [1994].
11

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

1.2 About this Manual


This manual aim at being a guide and aid for those who want to study the theoretical
backgrounds and the algorithms of a ship motions computer code, like SEAWAY, based on the
strip theory. The theoretical backgrounds and the algorithms of this program have been
described here in detail.
Chapter 1, this introduction, gives a short survey of the contents of all chapters in this report.
Chapter 2 gives a general description of the various strip theory approaches. A general
description of the potential flow theory is given. The derivations of the hydromechanic forces
and moments, the wave potential and the wave and diffraction forces and moments have been
described.
The equations of motion are given with solid mass and inertia terms and hydromechanic
forces and moments in the left hand side and the wave exciting forces and moments in the
right hand side. The principal assumptions are a linear relation between forces and motions
and the validity of obtaining the total forces by a simple integration over the ship length of the
two-dimensional cross sectional forces.
This includes for all motions a forward speed effect caused by the potential mass, as has been
defined by Korvin-Kroukovsky and Jacobs [1957] for the heave and pitch motions. This
approach is called the ''Ordinary Strip Theory Method''. Also an inclusion of the forward
speed effect caused by the potential damping, as for instance given by Tasai [1969]. This
approach is called the ''Modified Strip Theory Method''.
The inclusion of so-called ''End-Terms'' has been described too.
Chapter 3 describes the determination of the two-dimensional potential mass and damping
coefficients for the six modes of motions at infinite and finite water depths.
Firstly, it describes several conformal mapping methods. For the determination of the twodimensional hydrodynamic potential coefficients for sway, heave and roll motions of ship-like
cross sections, these sections are conformal mapped to the unit circle. The advantage of
conformal mapping is that the velocity potential of the fluid around an arbitrary shape of a
cross section in a complex plane can be derived from the more convenient circular section in
another complex plane. In this manner hydrodynamic problems can be solved directly with
the coefficients of the mapping function.
The close-fit multi-parameter conformal mapping method is given. A very simple and straight
on iterative least squares method, used to determine the conformal mapping coefficients, has
been described. Two special cases of multi-parameter conformal mapping have been
described too: the well known classic transformation of Lewis [1929] with two parameters
and an Extended-Lewis transformation with three parameters, as given by Athanassoulis and
Loukakis [1985].
Then, it describes 3 methods for the determination of the two-dimensional potential mass and
damping coefficients for the six modes of motions at infinite and finite water depths. At
infinite water depths, the principle of the calculation of these potential coefficients is based on
work of Ursell [1949] for circular cylinders and Frank [1967] for any arbitrary symmetric
cross section.
Starting from the velocity potentials and the conjugate stream functions of the fluid with an
infinite depth as have been given by Tasai [1959], Tasai [1960], Tasai [1961] and de Jong
[1973] and using the multi-parameter conformal mapping technique, the calculation routines
12

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

of the two-dimensional hydrodynamic potential coefficients of ship-like cross sections are


given for the sway, heave and roll motions.
For any arbitrary water depth (deep to very shallow water), the method of Keil [1974] - based
on a variation of the theory of Ursell [1949] with Lewis conformal mapping - has been given.
Finally, the pulsating source method of Frank [1967] for deep water has been described.
Because of using the strip theory approach here, the pitch and yaw coefficients follow from
the moments about the ship's centre of gravity of the heave and sway coefficients,
respectively.
Approximations are given for the surge coefficients.
Chapter 4 gives some corrections on the hydrodynamic damping due to viscous effects. The
surge-damping coefficient is corrected for viscous effects by an empirical method, based on a
simple still water resistance curve as published by Troost [1955].
The analysis of free-rolling model experiments and two (semi) empirical methods published
by Miller [1974] and Ikeda [1978], to determine a viscous correction of the roll-damping
coefficients, are described in detail.
Chapter 5 describes the determination of the hydromechanic forces and moments in the lefthand side of the six equations of motion of a sailing ship, obtained with the hydromechanic
coefficients as determined in Chapter 3 and 4, for both the ordinary and the modified strip
theory method.
Chapter 6 describes the wave exciting forces and moments in the right hand side of the six
equations of motion of a sailing ship in water with an arbitrarily depth, using the relative
motion concept for both the ordinary and the modified strip theory method.
First, the classical approach has been described, using equivalent accelerations and velocities
of the water particles. Then, an alternative approach, based on diffraction of waves, has been
described.
Chapter 7 describes the solution of the equations of motion and the determination of the
frequency characteristics of the absolute displacements, rotations, velocities and accelerations
and the vertical relative displacements. The use of a wave potential valid for any arbitrary
water depth makes a calculation method with deep water coefficients, suitable for ships
sailing with keel clearances down to about 50 percent of the ship's draft. At lower water
depths, Keils method should be used.
Chapter 8 describes some anti-rolling devices. A description is given of an inclusion of
passive free-surface tanks as defined by the experiments of van den Bosch and Vugts [1966]
and by the theory of Verhagen and van Wijngaarden [1965]. Active fin and rudder stabilisers
have been described too.
Chapter 9 describes the inclusion of linear spring terms, to simulate the behavior of anchored
or moored ships.
Chapter 10 describes two methods to determine the transfer functions of the added resistance
due to waves. The first method is a radiated wave energy method, as published by Gerritsma
and Beukelman [1972]. The second method is an integrated pressure method, as published by
Boese [1970].

13

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Chapter 11 describes the determination of the frequency characteristics of the lateral and
vertical shear forces and bending moments and the torsion moments in a way as had been
presented by Fukuda [1962] for the vertical mode. Still water phenomena are described too.
Chapter 12 describes the statistics in irregular waves, by using the superposition principle.
Three examples of normalized wave spectra are given: the somewhat wide wave spectrum of
Neumann, an average wave spectrum of Bretschneider and the more narrow Mean JONSWAP
wave spectrum.
A description is given of the calculation procedure of the energy spectra and the statistics of
the ship motions for six degrees of freedom, the added resistance, the vertical relative motions
and the mechanic loads on the ship in waves coming from any direction.
For the calculation of the probability of exceeding a threshold value by the motions, the
Rayleigh probability density function has been used.
The static and dynamic swell- up of the waves, of importance when calculating the probability
of shipping green water, are defined according to Tasaki [1963]. A theoretically determined
dynamic swell- up had been given too.
Bow slamming phenomena are defined by both the relative bow velocity criterion of Ochi
[1964] and by the peak bottom-impact-pressure criteria of Conolly [1974].
Chapter 13 describes the additions to all algorithms in case of twin- hull ships, such as semisubmersibles and catamarans. However, for interaction effects between the two individual
hulls will not be accounted here.
Chapter 14 shows some typical numerical recipes, as has been used in program SEAWAY.
Finally, Chapter 15 gives a survey of all literature used during the development of this
computer code.
Error messages, advises and all type of comments on this technical report are very welcome
by e-mail: J.M.J.Journee@wbmt.tudelft.nl.

14

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Strip Theory Methods

The ship is considered to be a rigid body, floating in the surface of an ideal fluid, which is
homogeneous, incompressible, free of surface tension, irrotational and without viscosity. It is
assumed that the problem of the motions of this floating body in waves is linear or can be
linearised. Consequently, only the external loads on the underwater part of the ship are
considered here and the effect of the above water part will be fully neglected.
Faltinsen and Svensen [1990] have discussed the incorporation of seakeeping theories in ship
design clearly. An overview of seakeeping theories for ships were presented and it was
concluded that - nevertheless some limitations - strip theories are the most successful and
practical tools for the calculation of the wave induced motions of the ship, at least in an early
design stage of a ship.
The strip theory solves the three-dimensional problem of the hydromechanical and exciting
wave forces and moments on the ship by integrating the two-dimensional potential solutions
over the ship's length. Interactions between the cross sections are ignored for the zero-speed
case. So, each cross section of the ship is considered to be part of an infinitely long cylinder.
The strip theory is a slender body theory, so one should expect less accurate predictions for
ships with low length to breadth ratios. However, experiments showed that the strip theory
appears to be remarkably effective for predicting the motions of ships with length to breadth
ratios down to about 3.0, or even sometimes lower.
The strip theory is based on the potential flow theory. This holds that viscous effects are
neglected, which can deliver serious problems when predicting roll motions at resonance
frequencies. In practice, for viscous roll damping effects can be accounted fairly by empirical
methods.
Because of the way that the forced motion problems are solved, generally in the strip theory,
substantial disagreements can be found between the calculated results and the experimental
data of the wave loads at low frequencies of encounter in following waves. In practice
however, these ''near zero frequency of encounter problems'' can be solved by forcing the
wave loads going to zero, artificially.
For high-speed vessels and for large ship motions, as appear in extreme sea states, the strip
theory can deliver less accurate results. Then the so-called ''end-terms'' can become very
important.
The strip theory accounts for the interaction with the forward speed in a very simple way. The
effect of the steady wave system around the ship is neglected and the free surface conditions
are simplified, so that the unsteady waves generated by the ship are propagating in directions
perpendicular to the centre plane of the ship. In reality the wave systems around the ship are
far more complex. For high-speed vessels, unsteady divergent wave systems become
important. This effect is neglected in the strip theory.
The strip theory is based on linearity. This means that the ship motions are supposed to be
small, relative to the cross sectional dimensions of the ship. Only hydrodynamic effects of the
hull below the still water level are accounted for. So, when parts of the ship go out of or in to
the water or when green water is shipped, inaccuracies can be expected. Also, the strip theory
does not distinguish between alternative above water hull forms.
Because of the added resistance of a ship due to the waves is proportional to the relative
motions squared, its inaccuracy will be gained strongly by inaccuracies in the predicted
motions.

15

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Nevertheless these limitations, seakeeping prediction methods based upon the strip theory
provide a sufficiently good basis for optimisation studies at an early design stage of the ship.
At a more detailed design stage, it can be considered to carry out additional model
experiments to investigate for instance added resistance or extreme event phenomena, such as
shipping green water and slamming.

16

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

2.1 Definitions
Figure 2.11 shows a harmonic wave as seen from two different perspectives. Figure 2.11-a
shows what one would observe in a snapshot photo made looking at the side of a (transparent)
wave flume; the wave profile is shown as a function of distance x along the flume at a fixed
instant in time. Figure 2.11-b shows a time record of the water level observed at one location
along the flume; it looks similar in many ways to the other figure, but time t has replaced x
on the horizontal axis.

Figure 2.11: Harmonic wave definitions


Notice that the origin of the co-ordinate system is at the still water level with the positive z axis directed upwards; most relevant values of z will be negative.
The still water level is the average water level or the level of the water if no waves were
present. The x -axis is positive in the direction of wave propagation. The water depth, h , (a
positive value) is measured between the seabed ( z = h ) and the still water level ( z = 0 ).
The highest point of the wave is called its crest and the lowest point on its surface is the
trough. If the wave is described by a harmonic wave, then its amplitude a is the distance
from the still water level to the crest, or to the trough for that matter. The subscript a denotes
the amplitude, here.
The horizontal distance (measured in the direction of wave propagation) between any two
successive wave crests is the wavelength, . The distance along the time axis is the wave
period, T . The ratio of wave height to wavelength is often referred to as the dimensionless
wave steepness: 2 a / .
Since the distance between any two corresponding points on successive harmonic waves is the
same, wave lengths and periods are usually actually measured between two consecutive
upward (or downward) crossings of the still water level. Such points are also called zerocrossings, and are easier to detect in a wave record.
Since sine or cosine waves are expressed in terms of angular arguments, the wavelength and
wave period are converted to angles using:
2
k=
k = 2

or
T = 2
2
=
T
Equation 2.11
in which k is the wave number (rad/m) and is the circular wave frequency (rad/s).
17

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Obviously, the wave form moves one wave length during one period, so that its speed or
phase velocity, c , is given by:

c= =
T
k
Equation 2.12
Suppose now a sailing ship in waves, with co-ordinate systems as given in Figure 2.12.

Figure 2.12: Co-ordinate systems


A right-handed co-ordinate system S ( x0 , y0 , z 0 ) is fixed in space. The ( x0 , y0 ) -plane lies in the
still water surface, x0 is directed as the wave propagation and z0 is directed upwards.
Another right-handed co-ordinate system O( x, y , z ) is moving forward with a constant ship
speed V . The directions of the axes are: x in the direction of the forward ship speed V , y in
the lateral port side direction and z vertically upwards. The ship is supposed to carry out
oscillations around this moving O( x, y , z ) co-ordinate system. The origin O lies vertically
above or under the time-averaged position of the centre of gravity G . The ( x, y ) -plane lies in
the still water surface.
A third right-handed co-ordinate system G( xb , yb , zb ) is connected to the ship with its origin at
G , the ship's centre of gravity. The directions of the axes are: xb in the longitudinal forward
direction, yb in the lateral port side direction and zb upwards. In still water, the ( xb , yb ) -plane
is parallel to the still water surface.
If the wave moves in the positive x0 -direction (defined in a direction with an angle relative
to the ship's speed vector, V ), the wave profile - the form of the water surface - can now be
expressed as a function of both x0 and t as follows:
= a cos (k x0 t )
or
= a cos ( t k x0 )
Equation 2.13

18

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

The right-handed co-ordinate system O( x, y , z ) is moving with the ship's speed V , which
yields:
x0 = V t cos + x cos + y sin
Equation 2.14
From the relation between the frequency of encounter e and the wave frequency :
e = k V cos
Equation 2.15
follows:
= a cos (e t k x cos k y sin )
Equation 2.16
The resulting six ship motions in the O( x, y , z ) system are defined by three translations of the
ship's centre of gravity in the direction of the x -, y - and z -axes and three rotations about
them:
surge :
sway :
heave :
roll :
pitch :
yaw :

x = xa cos (e t + x )

y = ya cos (e t + y )

z = z a cos(e t + z )

= a cos (e t + )

= a cos(e t + )

= a cos(e t + )
Equation 2.17

The phase shifts of these motions are related to the harmonic wave elevation at the origin of
the O( x, y , z ) system, i.e. the average position of the ship's centre of gravity:
wave : = a cos(e t )
Equation 2.18
The harmonic velocities and accelerations in the O( x, y , z ) system are found now by taking
the derivatives of the displacements, for instance for surge:
surge displaceme nt : x = xa cos (e t + x )
surge velocity :
surge accelerati on :

x& = e xa sin (e t + x )

&x& = e 2 xa cos (e t + x )
Equation 2.19

19

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

2.2 Incident Wave Potential


In order to use the linear potential theory for waves, it will be necessary to assume that the
water surface slope is very small. This means that the wave steepness is so small that terms in
the equations of motion of the waves with a magnitude in the order of the steepness-squared
can be ignored.
Suppose a wave moving in the ( x, z ) -plane. The profile of that simple wave with a small
steepness looks like a sine or a cosine and the motion of a water particle in a wave depends on
the distance below the still water level. This is reason why the wave potential can be written
as:
w ( x, z, t ) = P( z ) sin (k x t )
Equation 2.21
in which P( z ) is an (as yet) unknown function of z .
This velocity potential w ( x, z , t ) of the harmonic waves has to fulfil four requirements:
Continuity condition or Laplace equation
Seabed boundary condition
Free surface dynamic boundary condition
Free surface kinematic boundary condition
These requirements lead to a more complete expression for the velocity potential as will be
explained in the following subsections.
The relationships presented in these subsections are valid for all water depths, but the fact that
they contain so many hyperbolic functions makes them cumbersome to use. Engineers - as
opposed to (some) scientists - often look for ways to simplify the theory. The simplifications
stem from the following approximations for large and very small arguments, s , as shown in
Figure 2.21:
For large arguments s :

sinh [s] cosh [s ] >> s


tanh[s] 1

For small arguments s :

sinh [s ] tanh [s ] s
cosh[s ] 1
Equation 2.22

Figure 2.21: Hyperbolic function limits


20

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

2.2.1 Continuity Condition


The velocity of the water particles (u, v, w) in the three translation directions, or alternatively
(v x , v y , v z ) , follow from the definition of the velocity potential, w :
w
w
w
u = vx =
v = vy =
w = vz =
x
y
z
Equation 2.23
Since the fluid is homogeneous and incompressible, the continuity condition becomes:
u v w
+
+
=0
x y z
Equation 2.24

2.2.2 Laplace Equation


The continuity condition in Equation 2.24 results in the Laplace equation for potential flows:
2 w 2 w 2 w
2 w =
+
+
=0
x 2
y 2
z 2
Equation 2.25
Water particles move here in the ( x, z ) -plane only, so in the equations above:
v=

w
=0
y

and

v 2 w
=
=0
y
y 2
Equation 2.26

Taking this into account, a substitution of Equation 2.21 in Equation 2.25 yields a
homogeneous solution of this equation:
d 2 P( z )
k 2 P( z ) = 0
2
dz
Equation 2.27
with as a homogeneous solution for P( z ) :
P( z ) = C1 e + k z + C2 e k z
Equation 2.28
Using this result from the continuity condition and the Laplace equation, the wave potential
can be written now with two unknown coefficients as:
w (x , z , t ) = (C1 e + k z + C2 e k z ) sin (k x t )
Equation 2.29
in which:
w ( x, z , t )

wave potential (m2 /s)


21

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
e
C1 ,C 2
k
t
x
z

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

base of natural logarithms (-)


as yet undetermined constants (m2 /s)
wave number (1/m)
time (s)
horizontal distance (m)
vertical distance, positive upwards (m)
wave frequency (1/s)

2.2.3 Seabed Boundary Condition


The vertical velocity of water particles at the seabed is zero (no-leak condition):
w
=0
for: z = h
z
Equation 2.210
Substituting this boundary condition in Equation 2.29 provides:
k C1 e k h k C2 e + k h = 0
Equation 2.211
By defining:
C = 2 C1 e k h = 2 C 2 e + k h
or:
C
C
C1 = e + k h
and
C2 = e k h
2
2
it follows that P( z ) in Equation 2.28 can be worked out to:
C
P( z ) = e + k ( h + z ) + e k ( h + z )
2
= C cosh[k (h + z )]

Equation 2.212
and the wave potential Equation 2.21 becomes:
w ( x, z, t ) = C cosh[k (h + z )] sin (k x t )
Equation 2.213
in which C is an (as yet) unknown constant.

2.2.4 Free Surface Dynamic Boundary Condition


The pressure, p , at the free surface of the fluid, z = , is equal to the atmospheric pressure,
p 0 . This requirement for the pressure is called the dynamic boundary condition at the free
surface.
The Bernoulli equation for an instationary irrotational flow (with the velocity given in terms
of its three components) is in its general form:

22

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

w 1
p
+ (u 2 + v 2 + w 2 ) + + g z = 0
t
2

Equation 2.214
In two dimensions, v = 0 , and since the waves have a small steepness (u and w are small),
this equation becomes in a linearised format:
w p
+ + gz = 0
t

Equation 2.215
At the free surface this condition becomes:
w p
+ + g = 0
for: z =
t

Equation 2.216
The constant value p 0 can be included in w t ; this will not influence the velocities
being obtained from the potential w .
With this the equation becomes:
w
+ g = 0
for: z =
t
Equation 2.217
The potential at the free surface can be expanded in a Taylor series, keeping in mind that the
vertical displacement of the wave surface is relatively small:

{ w ( x, z, t )}z = = { w (x , z , t )}z = 0 + w (x , z , t )
z

or:

z = 0

+ .........

w ( x, z, t )
( x, z, t )
2

= w
+O
t
t

z =
z =0

( )
Equation 2.218

which yields for the linearised form of the free surface dynamic boundary condition in
Equation 2.217:
w
+ g = 0
for: z = 0
t
Equation 2.219
With this, the wave surface profile becomes:
1 w
for: z = 0
=
g t
Equation 2.220
A substitution of Equation 2.213 in Equation 2.220 yields the wave surface profile:
C
=
cosh [k h] cos (k x t )
g
or:
23

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
= a cos(k x t )

with: a =

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

C
cosh[k h ]
g
Equation 2.221

With this, depending on the water depth h , the wave potential in Equation 2.213 will
become:
g cosh [k (h + z )]
w = a

sin (k x t )

cosh [k h]
Equation 2.222
or when is the first of the sine function arguments, as generally will be used in ship motion
equations:
a g cosh [k (h + z )]
w =

sin ( t k x )

cosh [k h]
Equation 2.223
In deep water, the expression for the wave potential reduces to:
a g k z
w =
e sin ( t k x )
(deep water)

Equation 2.224

2.2.5 Free Surface Kinematic Boundary Condition


So far the relation between the wave period T and the wavelength, , is still unknown. This
relation between T and (or equivalently and k ) follows from the boundary condition
that the vertical velocity of a water particle in the free surface of the fluid is identical to the
vertical velocity of that free surface itself (no-leak condition); this is a kinematic boundary
condition.
Using Equation 2.221 of the free surface yields:
dz dx
=
+

dt t x dt
for the wave surface: z =

=
+u
t
x
The second term in this expression is a product of two values, which are both small because of
the assumed small wave steepness. This product becomes even smaller (second order) and can
be ignored, see Figure 2.22.

24

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Figure 2.22: Kinematic boundary condition


This linearisation provides the vertical velocity of the wave surface:
dz
=
for the wave surface: z =
dt
t
Equation 2.225
The vertical velocity of a water particle in the free surface is then:
w
=
for: z =
z
t
The vertical velocity of a water particle in the free surface is then:
Analogous to Equation 2.219 this condition is valid for z = 0 too, instead of for z = only:
w
=
for: z = 0
z
t
Equation 2.226
A differentiation of the free surface dynamic boundary condition (Equation 2.219) with
respect to t provides:
2w

+g
=0
for: z = 0
2
t
t
or after re-arranging terms:
1 2 w
+
=0
for: z = 0
t g t 2
Equation 2.227
Together with Equation 2.225 this delivers the free surface kinematic boundary condition or
the so-called Cauchy-Poisson condition:
dz 1 2 w
+
=0
for: z = 0
dt g t 2
Equation 2.228

2.2.6 Dispersion Relationship


The information is now available to establish the relationship between and k (or
equivalently T and ), referred to above. A substitution of the expression for the wave
25

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

potential (Equation 2.222) in Equation 2.228 gives the dispersion relation for any arbitrary
water depth h :
2 = k g tanh [k h ]
Equation 2.229
In many situations, or T will be known; one must determine k or . This equation will
generally has to be solved iteratively, since k appears in a nonlinear way in Equation 2.229.
In deep water ( tanh [k h ] = 1 ), Equation 2.229 degenerates to a quite simple form which can
be used without difficulty:
2 = k g
(deep water)
Equation 2.230
When calculating the hydromechanical forces and the wave exciting forces on a ship, it is
assumed that x x b , y y b and z z b . In case of forward ship speed, the wave frequency
has to be replaced by the frequency of encounter of the waves e . This leads to the
following expressions for the wave surface in the G( xb , yb , z b ) system:
= a cos(e t k xb cos k yb sin )
Equation 2.231
and the expression for the velocity potential of the regular waves, w , becomes:
a g cosh [k (h + zb )]
w =

sin (e t k xb cos k y b sin )

cosh [k h]
Equation 2.232

2.2.7 Relationships in Regular Waves


Figure 2.23 shows the relation between , T , c and h for a wide variety of conditions.
Notice the boundaries h 2 and h 20 in this figure between short (deep water) and
long (shallow water) waves.

26

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Figure 2.23: Relationships between , T , c and h

27

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

2.3 Floating Rigid Body in Waves


Consider a rigid body, floating in an ideal fluid with harmonic waves. The water depth is
assumed to be finite. The time-averaged speed of the body is zero in all directions. For the
sake of simple notation, it is assumed here that the O( x, y, z ) system is identical to the
S ( x 0 , y 0 , z 0 ) system. The x -axis is coincident with the undisturbed still water free surface
and the z -axis and z 0 -axis are positive upwards.
The linear fluid velocity potential can be split into three parts:
( x, y , z, t ) = r + w + d
Equation 2.31
in which:
r
w
d

radiation potential for the oscillatory motion of the body in still water
incident undisturbed wave potential
diffraction potential of the waves about the restrained body

2.3.1 Fluid Requirements


From the definition of a velocity potential follows the velocity of the water particles in the
three translation directions:

vx =
vy =
vz =
x
y
z
Equation 2.32
The velocity potentials, = r + w + d , have to fulfil a number of requirements and
boundary conditions in the fluid. Of these, the first three are identical to those in the incident
undisturbed waves. Additional boundary conditions are associated with the oscillating floating
body.
1. Continuity Condition or Laplace Equation
As the fluid is homogeneous and incompressible, the continuity condition:
v x v y v z
+
+
=0
x
y
z
Equation 2.33
results into the equation of Laplace:
2 2 2
2 =
+ 2 + 2 =0
x 2
y
z
Equation 2.34
2. Seabed Boundary Condition
The boundary condition on the seabed (no-leak condition), following from the definition of
the velocity potential, is given by:

28

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

=0
z

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

for: z = h
Equation 2.35

3. Dynamic Boundary Condition at the Free Surface


The pressure in a point P( x, y, z ) is given by the linearised Bernoulli equation:

p
p =
g z
or
+ g z =
t
t

Equation 2.36
At the free surface of the fluid, so for z = ( x, y , z, t ) , the pressure p is constant.
Because of the linearisation, the vertical velocity of a water particle in the free surface
becomes:
dz
=

dt
z
t
Equation 2.37
Combining these two conditions provides the boundary condition at the free surface:
2

+ g
=0
for: z = 0
2
t
z
Equation 2.38
4. Kinematic Boundary Condition on the Oscillating Body Surface
It is obvious that the boundary condition at the surface of the rigid body plays a very
important role. The velocity of a water particle at a point at the surface of the body is equal to
the velocity of this (watertight) body point itself. The outward normal velocity, v n , at a point
P( x, y, z ) at the surface of the body (positive in the direction of the fluid) is given by:

= v n ( x, y , z, t )
n
Equation 2.39
Because the solution is linearised, this can be written as:
6

= v n ( x, y , z, t ) = v j f j
n
j =1
Equation 2.310
in terms of oscillatory velocities, v j , and generalised direction-cosines, f j , on the surface of
the body, S , given by:

29

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

f 1 = cos (n, x )

f 2 = cos (n, y )
f 3 = cos (n, z )
f 4 = y cos (n, z ) z cos (n, y ) = y f 3 z f 2

f 5 = z cos(n, x ) x cos(n, z ) = z f 1 x f 3
f 6 = x cos (n, y ) y cos (n, x ) = x f 2 y f1
Equation 2.311

The direction cosines are called generalised, because f 1 , f 2 and f 3 have been normalised
(the sum of their squares is equal to 1) and used to obtain f 4 , f 5 and f 6 .
Note: The subscripts 1,2,...6 are used here to indicate the mode of the motion. Also
displacements are often indicated in literature in the same way: x1 , x 2 ,... x 6 , as used here in
the summary.
5. Radiation Condition
The radiation condition states that when the distance R of a water particle to the oscillating
body tends to infinity, the potential value tends to zero:
lim = 0
R

Equation 2.312
6. Symmetric or Anti-symmetric Condition
Since ships and many floating bodies are symmetric with respect to its middle line plane, one
can make use of this to simplify the potential equations:
for sway : ( 2 ) ( x , y ) = ( 2 ) (+ x, y )
for heave :
for roll :

(3 ) ( x, y ) = + (3 ) (+ x, y )

( 4 ) ( x , y ) = ( 4 ) (+ x, y )
Equation 2.313

in which (i ) is the velocity potential for the given direction i .


This indicates that for sway and roll oscillations, the horizontal velocities of the water
particles, thus the derivative x , at any time on both sides of the body must have the same
direction; these motions are anti-symmetric. For heave oscillations these velocities must be of
opposite sign; this is a symmetric motion. However, for all three modes of oscillations the
vertical velocities, thus the derivative y , on both sides must have the same directions at
any time.

2.3.2 Forces and Moments


The forces F and moments M follow from an integration of the pressure, p , over the
submerged surface, S , of the body:
F = p n dS
and
M = p r n dS

( )

( )

30

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003
Equation 2.314

in which n is the outward normal vector on surface dS and r is the position vector of
surface dS in the O( x, y, z ) co-ordinate system.
The pressure p - via the linearised Bernoulli equation - is determined from the velocity
potentials by:

p =
g z
t
r w d
=
+
+
g z
t
t
t
Equation 2.315
which can obviously be split into four separate parts, so that the hydromechanical forces F
and moments M can be split into four parts too:
r w d

F =
+
+
+ g z n dS
t
t
t

( )

r w d

M =
+
+
+ g z r n dS
t
t
t

S
Equation 2.316
or:
F = F r + F w + Fd + F s

and

M = Mr + Mw +Md + Ms
Equation 2.317

2.3.3 Hydrodynamic Loads


The hydrodynamic loads are the dynamic forces and moments caused by the fluid on an
oscillating body in still water; waves are radiated from the body. The radiation potential,
r , which is associated with this oscillation in still water, can be written in terms, j , for 6
degrees of freedom as:
6

r (x, y, z , t ) = j ( x, y, z , t )
j =1
6

= j ( x, y , z ) v j (t )
j =1

Equation 2.318
in which the space and time dependent potential term, j ( x. y, z , t ) in direction j , is now
written in terms of a separate space dependent potential, j ( x, y , z ) in direction j , multiplied
by an oscillatory velocity, v j (t ) in direction j .
This allows the normal velocity on the surface of the body to be written as:

31

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

r
6
=
j
n
n j =1
6
j

=
vj
j =1 n

Equation 2.319
and the generalised direction cosines are given by:
j
fj =
n
Equation 2.320
With this the radiation terms in the hydrodynamic force and moment becomes:

F = r n dS
t
S
6

= j v j n dS
t j =1
S

( )


M = r r n dS
t
S

( )

= j v j r n dS
t j =1
S

Equation 2.321
The components of these radiation forces and moments are defined by:
F r = ( X r1 , X r 2 , X r3 )
and
M r = ( X r 4 , X r 5 , X r6 )
with:
6

X rk = j v j f k dS
t j =1
S

for: k = 1,...6
6

k
= j v j
dS

t
dn
j
=
1
S

Equation 2.322
Since j and k are not time-dependent in this expression, it reduces to:
6

X rk = X rkj

for: k = 1,...6

j =1

with:
X rkj =

dv j

j k dS
dt
n
S
Equation 2.323
32

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

This radiation force or moment X rkj in the direction k is caused by a forced harmonic
oscillation of the body in the direction j . This is generally true for all j and k in the range
from 1 to 6. When j = k , the force or moment is caused by a motion in that same direction.
When j k , the force in one direction results from the motion in another direction. This
introduces what is called coupling between the forces and moments (or motions).
Equation 2.323 expresses the force and moment components, X rkj , in terms of still unknown
potentials, j . But not everything is solved yet, a solution for this will be found later in this
Chapter.
2.3.3.1 Oscillatory Motion
Now an oscillatory motion is defined; suppose a motion (in a complex notation) given by:
s j = s aj e i t
Equation 2.324
Then the velocity and acceleration of this oscillation are:
s& j = v j = i saj e i t
&s&j =

dv j
= 2 s aj e i t
dt
Equation 2.325

The hydrodynamic forces and moments can be split into a load in-phase with the acceleration
and a load in-phase with the velocity:
X rkj = M kj &s&j N kj s& j

= s aj 2 M kj + i saj Nkj e i t

= saj 2 j k dS e i t
n
S

Equation 2.326
So in case of an oscillation of the body in the direction j with a velocity potential j , the
hydrodynamic mass and damping (coupling) coefficients are defined by:

M kj = Re j k dS
and
N kj = Im j k dS
n
n
S

Equation 2.327
In case of an oscillation of the body in the direction k with a velocity potential k , the
hydrodynamic mass and damping (coupling) coefficients are defined by:

M jk = Re k j dS
and
N jk = Im k j dS
n
n
S

Equation 2.328

33

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

2.3.3.2 Green's Second Theorem


Green's second theorem transforms a large volume-integral into a much easier to handle
surface-integral. Its mathematical background is beyond the scope of this text. It is valid for
any potential function, regardless the fact if it fulfils the Laplace condition or not.
Consider two separate velocity potentials j and k . Green's second theorem, applied to
these potentials, is then:
j

2
2
*
*
* j k k j dV = * j nk k n dS
V
S

Equation 2.329
As said before, this theorem is generally valid for all kinds of potentials; it is not necessary
that they fulfil the Laplace equation. In Green's theorem, S * is a closed surface with a volume
V * . This volume is bounded by the wall of an imaginary vertical circular cylinder with a very
large radius R , the seabed at z = h , the water surface at z = and the wetted surface of the
floating body, S ; see Figure 2.31.

Figure 2.31: Boundary conditions


Both of the above radiation potentials j and k must fulfil 2 j = 2k = 0 , the Laplace
equation. So the left-hand side of Equation 2.329 becomes zero which yields for the righthand side of this equation:
j
k
*
*

dS
=

S * j n
S * k n dS
Equation 2.330
The boundary condition at the free surface becomes for = e i t :

2 + g
=0
for: z = 0
z
Equation 2.331
or with the dispersion relation, 2 = k g tanh [k h ] :

k tanh [k h ] =
for: z = 0
z
Equation 2.332
34

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

This implies that at the free surface of the fluid one can write:

1

k tanh [k h ] k = k = k k =
k
z
n
k tanh [k h] n
at the free surface
j j
j
1
k tanh [k h ] j =
=
j =

z
n
k tanh [k h ] n
Equation 2.333
When taking also the boundary condition at the seabed and the radiation condition on the wall
of the cylinder in Figure 2.31:

= 0 for: z = h
and
lim = 0
R
n
Equation 2.334
into account, the integral equation over the surface S * reduces to:
j
k

dS
=

dS
j
k
S
S
n
n
Equation 2.335
in which S is the wetted surface of the oscillating body only.
Notice that j and k still have to be evaluated.
2.3.3.3 Potential Coefficients
The previous subsection provides - for the zero forward ship speed case - symmetry in the
coefficients matrices with respect to their diagonals so that:
M jk = M kj
and
N jk = N kj
Equation 2.336
Because of the symmetry of a ship, some coefficients are zero and
hydrodynamic coefficients for a ship become:
0
M 13
0
M 15
M 11

M 22
0
M 24
0
0
M
0
M 33
0
M 35
Hydrodynam ic mass matrix : 31
M 42
0
M 44
0
0
M
0
M 53
0
M 55
51
0
M 62
0
M 64
0

N11

0
N
Hydrodynam ic damping matrix : 31
0
N
51
0

35

0
N 22
0
N 42
0
N 62

N13
0
N 33
0
N 53
0

0
N 24
0
N 44
0
N 64

N15
0
N 35
0
N 55
0

the two matrices with


0

M 26
0

M 46
0
M 66
0

N 26
0

N 46
0
N 66

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003
Equation 2.337

For clarity, the symmetry of terms about the diagonal in these matrices (for example that
M 13 = M 31 for zero forward speed) has not been included here. The terms on the diagonals
( M nn ) are the primary coefficients relating properties such as hydrodynamic mass in one
direction to the inertia forces in that same direction. Off-diagonal terms (such as M 13 )
represent hydrodynamic mass only, which is associated with an inertia dependent force in one
direction caused by a motion component in another.
Forward speed has an effect on the velocity potentials itself, but is not discussed in this
Section. This effect is quite completely explained by Timman and Newman [1962].

2.3.4 Wave and Diffraction Loads


The wave and diffraction terms in the hydrodynamic force and moment are:

d
F w + F d = w +
n dS
t
t
S

( )

d
M w + M d = w +
r n dS
t
t
S
Equation 2.338
The principle of linear superposition allows the determination of these forces on a restrained
body with zero forward speed: n = 0 . This simplifies the boundary condition on the
surface of the body to:
w d
=
+
=0
n
n
n
Equation 2.339
The space and time dependent potentials, w (x , y , z , t ) and d ( x, y, z , t ) , are written now in
terms of isolated space dependent potentials, w ( x, y, z ) and d (x , y , z ) , multiplied by a
normalised oscillatory velocity, v (t ) = 1 e i t :
w (x , y , z , t ) = w ( x, y, z ) e i t
d (x , y , z , t ) = d ( x, y , z ) e i t

Equation 2.340
This results into:
w

= d
n
n
Equation 2.341
With this and the expressions for the generalised direction-cosines it is found for the wave
forces and moments on the restrained body in waves:

36

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
X wk = i e i t (w + d ) f k dS
S

= i e i t (w + d )
S

k
dS
n

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

for: k = 1,...6

Equation 2.342
in which k is the radiation potential.
The potential of the incident waves, w , is known, but the diffraction potential, d , has to be
determined. Green's second theorem provides a relation between this diffraction potential, d ,
and a radiation potential, k :

S d nk dS =S k nd dS
Equation 2.343
and with w n = d n from Equation 2.341 one finds:

S d nk dS = S k nw dS
Equation 2.344
This elimination of the diffraction potential results into the so-called Haskind relations:

X wk = i e i t w k + k w dS
for: k = 1,...6
n
n
S
Equation 2.345
This limits the problem of the diffraction potential because the expression for X wk depends
only on the undisturbed wave potential w and the radiation potential k .
These relations, found by Haskind [1957], are very important; they underlie the relative
motion (displacement - velocity - acceleration) hypothesis, as used in strip theory. These
relations are valid only for a floating body with a zero time-averaged speed in all directions.
Newman [1962] however, has generalised the Haskind relations for a body with a constant
forward speed. He derived equations, which differ only slightly from those found by Haskind.
According to Newman's approach the wave potential has to be defined in the moving
O( x, y, z ) system. The radiation potential has to be determined for the constant forward speed
case, taking an opposite sign into account.
The corresponding wave potential for deep water - as given in a previous section - now
becomes:
a g k z
w =
e sin ( t k x cos k y sin )

i a g k z i k ( x cos + y sin ) i t
=
e e
e

Equation 2.346
so that the isolated space dependent term is given by:

37

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
w =

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

i a g k z i k ( x cos + y sin )
e e

Equation 2.347

In these equations is the wave direction, defined as given in Figure 2.12.


The velocity of the water particles in the direction of the outward normal n on the surface of
the body is:
w
z
y
x

= w k + i cos +
sin
n
n
n

n
= w k { f 3 + i ( f 1 cos + f 2 sin )}
Equation 2.348
With this, the wave loads are given by:
X wk = i e i t w f k dS
S

+ i e

i t

k w k { f 3 + i ( f1 cos + f 2 sin )} dS

for: k = 1,...6

Equation 2.349
The first term in this expression for the wave forces and moments is the so-called FroudeKrilov force or moment, which is the wave load caused by the undisturbed incident wave. The
second term is related to the disturbance caused by the presence of the (restrained) body.

2.3.5 Hydrostatic Loads


In the notations used here, the buoyancy forces and moments are:
F s = g z n dS
and
M s = g z r n dS
S

( )

Equation 2.350
or more generally:
X sk = g z f k dS

for: k = 1,...6

Equation 2.351
in which the X sk are the components of these hydrostatic forces and moments.

38

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

2.4 Equations of Motion


The equations of motion are given here in a - with the ship speed V steadily moving - righthanded co-ordinate system G(x, y , z ) , with the origin in the average position of the ships
centre of gravity G .
The total mass as well as its distribution over the body is considered to be constant with time.
For ships and other floating structures, this assumption is normally valid during a time that is
large relative to the period of the motions. This holds that small effects - such as for instance a
decreasing mass due to fuel consumption - can be ignored.
The solid mass matrix of a floating structure is given below.
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0

Solid mass matrix : m =


0
0
0
I xx
0 I xz
0
0
0
0
I yy
0

0
0
0
I zx 0
I zz

Equation 2.41
The moments of inertia here are often expressed in terms of the radii of inertia and the solid
mass of the structure. Since Archimedes law ( m = ) is valid for a free floating structure:
I xx = k xx 2
I yy = k yy
2

I zz = k zz 2
Equation 2.42
When the actual distribution of the solid mass of a ship is unknown, the radii of inertia can be
approximated by:
k xx 0.30 B to 0.40 B

for ships : k yy 0.22 L to 0.28 L


k 0.22 L to 0.28 L
zz
Equation 2.43
in which L is the length and B is the breadth of the ship.
Often, the (generally small) coupling terms, I xz = I zx , are simply neglected.
Bureau Veritas proposes for the radius of inertia for roll of the ship's solid mass:
2

2 KG

k xx 0.289 B 1.0 +


Equation 2.44
in which KG is the height of the centre of gravity, G , above the keel.
For many ships without cargo on board (ballast condition), the mass is concentrated at the
ends (engine room aft and ballast water forward to avoid a large trim), while for ships with
cargo on board (full load condition) the - more or less amidships laden - cargo plays an
39

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

important role. Thus for normal ships, the radii of inertia, k yy and k zz , are usually smaller in
the full load condition than in the ballast condition.
Notice here that the longitudinal radius of gyration of a long homogeneous rectangular beam
with a length L is equal to about 1 12 L or 0.289 L .
The equations of motions of a rigid body in a space fixed co-ordinate system follow from
Newton's second law. The vector equations for the translations of and the rotations about the
centre of gravity are given respectively by:
d
d
F=
m U
and
M=
H
dt
dt

( )

Equation 2.45
in which:
F
m

resulting external force acting in the centre of gravity


mass of the rigid body

U
M

instantaneous velocity of the centre of gravity


resulting external moment acting about the centre of gravity

instantaneous angular momentum about the centre of gravity


time

Two important assumptions are made for the loads in the right-hand side of these equations:
a) The so-called hydromechanic forces and moments are induced by the harmonic
oscillations of the rigid body, moving in the undisturbed surface of the fluid.
b) The so-called wave exciting forces and moments are produced by waves coming in on the
restrained body.
Since the system is linear, these loads are added up for obtaining the total loads. Thus, after
assuming small motions, symmetry of the body and that the x -, y - and z -axes are principal
axes, one can write the following six equations of motion for the ship:
d
Surge :
( x& )
= &x&
= X h1 + X w1
dt
d
Sway :
( y& )
= y&&
= X h2 + X w 2
dt
d
( z& )
Heave :
= &z&
= X h3 + X w 3
dt
d
&& = X h 4 + X w 4
Roll :
I xx & I xz & = I xx && I xz
dt
d
Pitch
I yy &
= I xx &&
= X h 5 + X w5
dt
d
&& = X h 6 + X w 6
&& I zx
Yaw
I zz & I zx & = I zz
dt

(
(
(

Equation 2.46
in which:

density of water
40

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

I ij

volume of displacement of the ship


solid mass moment of inertia of the ship

X h1 , X h 2 , X h 3
X h4 , X h5 , X h6
X w1 , X w2 , X w3
X w4 , X w5 , X w6

hydromechanic forces in the x -, y - and z -directions


hydromechanic moments about the x -, y - and z -axes
exciting wave forces in the x -, y - and z -directions
exciting wave moments about the x -, y - and z -axes

Generally, a ship has a vertical-longitudinal plane of symmetry, so that its motions can be split
into symmetric and anti-symmetric components. Surge, heave and pitch motions are
symmetric motions, that is to say that a point to starboard has the same motion as the mirrored
point to port side. It is obvious that the remaining motions sway, roll and yaw are antisymmetric motions. Symmetric and anti-symmetric motions of a free-floating structure are not
coupled; they don't have any effect on each other. For instance, a vertical force acting at the
centre of gravity can cause surge, heave and pitch motions, but will not result in sway, roll or
yaw motions.
Because of this symmetry and anti-symmetry, two sets of three coupled equations of motion
can be distinguished for ships:
Surge : &x&
X h1 = X w1

Heave : &z&
X h 3 = X w3 symmetric motions
Pitch : I xx &&
X h 5 = X w5
Sway : &y&
Xh 2 = Xw2

&& X h 4 = X w 4 anti - symmetric motions


Roll : I xx && I xz
&& I zx && X h 6 = X w6
Yaw : I zz
Equation 2.47
Note that this distinction between symmetric and anti-symmetric motions disappears when the
ship is anchored. Then, for instance, the pitch motions can generate roll motions via the
anchor lines.
The coupled surge, heave and pitch equations of symmetric motion are:

( + a11 ) &x&

+ b11 x& + c11 x


+ a13 &z& + b13 z& + c13 z
+ a15 && + b15 & + c15

= X w1

(surge)

a 31 x&& + b31 x& + c 31 x


+ ( + a 33 ) &z& + b33 z& + c 33 z
+ a35 && + b35 & + c35 = X w 3

(heave)

a 51 x&& + b51 x& + c 51 x


+ a 53 &z& + b53 z& + c 53 z
+ (I yy + a 55 ) && + b55 & + c55 = X w 5

(pitch)

41

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003
Equation 2.48

The coupled sway, roll and yaw equations of anti-symmetric motion are:

( + a22 ) &y&

+ b22 y& + c22 y


&& + b24 & + c24
+ a24
&& + b26 & + c26 = X w 2
+ a26

(sway)

a42 y&& + b42 y& + c42 y


&& + b44 & + c44
+ ( I xx + a44 )
&& + b46 & + c46 = X w 4
+ ( I xz + a46 )

(roll)

a62 y&& + b62 y& + c62 y


&& + b64 & + c64
+ ( I zx + a64 )
&& + b66 & + c66 = X w6
+ (I zz + a66 )

(yaw)
Equation 2.49

In many applications, I xz = I zx is not known or small; hence their terms are often omitted. In
program SEAWAY they have been introduced in the equations of motion if they can be
calculated from an input of the mass distribution along the ships length, only.
After the determination of the in and out of phase terms of the hydromechanic and the wave
loads, these equations can be solved with a numerical method.

42

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

2.5 Strip Theory Approaches


Strip theory is a computational method by which the forces on and motions of a threedimensional floating body can be determined using results from two-dimensional potential
theory. Strip theory considers a ship to be made up of a finite number of transverse twodimensional slices, which are rigidly connected to each other. Each of these slices will have a
form that closely resembles the segment of the ship that it represents. Each slice is treated
hydrodynamically as if it is a segment of an infinitely long floating cylinder; see Figure 2.51.

Figure 2.51: Strip theory representation by cross sections


This means that all waves which are produced by the oscillating ship (hydromechanic loads)
and the diffracted waves (wave loads) are assumed to travel perpendicular to the middle line
plane - thus parallel to the ( y, z ) -plane - of the ship. This holds too that the strip theory
supposes that the fore and aft side of the body (such as a pontoon) does not produce waves in
the x -direction. For the zero forward speed case, interactions between the cross sections are
ignored as well.
Fundamentally, strip theory is valid for long and slender bodies only. In spite of this
restriction, experiments have shown that strip theory can be applied successfully for floating
bodies with a length to breadth ratio larger than three, L B 3 , at least from a practical point
of view.

2.5.1 Zero Forward Ship Speed


When applying the strip theory, the loads on the body are found by an integration of the 2-D
loads:

43

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

X h 1 = X h 1' dxb

X w1 = X w1 ' dxb

X h 2 = X h 2 dxb

X w 2 = X w 2 ' dxb

Heave :

X h 3 = X h 3 dxb

X w3 = X w3 ' dxb

Roll :

X h 4 = X h 4 dxb

X w 4 = X w 4 dxb

Pitch :

X h 5 = X h 3 xb dxb

X w5 = X w 3 xb dxb

X h 6 = + X h 2 xb dxb

X w 6 = + X w 2 xb dxb

Surge :

'

Sway :

'

'

'

Yaw :

'

'

'

'

Equation 2.51
in which:
'
X hj
X wj

sectional hydromechanic force or moment in direction j per unit ship length


'

sectional exciting wave force or moment in direction j per unit ship length

The appearance of two-dimensional surge forces seems strange here. It is strange! A more or
less empirical method has been used in SEAWAY for the surge motion, by defining an
equivalent longitudinal cross section that is swaying. Then, the 2-D hydrodynamic sway
coefficients of this equivalent cross section are translated to 2-D hydrodynamic surge
coefficients by an empirical method based on theoretical results from three-dimensional
calculations and these coefficients are used to determine 2-D loads. In this way, all sets of six
surge loads can be treated in the same numerical way in SEAWAY for the determination of the
3-D loads. Inaccuracies of the hydromechanic coefficients for surge of (slender) ships are of
minor importance, because these coefficients are relatively small.
Notice how in the strip theory the pitch and yaw moments are derived from the 2-D heave and
sway forces, respectively, while the roll moments are obtained directly.
The equations of motions are defined in the moving axis system with the origin at the timeaveraged position of the centre of gravity, G . All two-dimensional potential coefficients have
been defined here in an axis system with the origin, O , in the water plane; the hydromechanic
and exciting wave moments have to be corrected for the distance OG .

2.5.2 Forward Ship Speed


Relative to an oscillating ship moving forward in the undisturbed surface of the fluid, the
*
*
*
displacements, hj , velocities, & hj , and accelerations, &&hj , at forward ship speed V in one
of the 6 directions j of a water particle in a cross section are defined by:
D
D & *
*
hj
&hj * =
hj*
&&hj * =
hj
Dt
Dt

{ }

{ }

Equation 2.52
in which:

44

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

= V
Dt t
x
Equation 2.53
is a mathematical operator which transforms the potentials ( x0 , y 0 , z 0 , t ) , defined in the
earth bounded (fixed) co-ordinate system, to the potentials ( x, y, z , t ) , defined in the ship's
steadily translating co-ordinate system with speed V .
In waves the motions of the water particles are depending on its local vertical distance to the
mean or still water surface. At each cross section of the ship an average (or equivalent)
constant value has to be found.
Relative to a restrained ship, moving forward with speed V in waves, the equivalent j
*
*
constant components of water particle displacements ( ), velocities ( & ) and
wj

wj

accelerations ( &&wj ) in a cross section are defined in a similar way by:


D
D & *
*
wj
&wj * =
wj *
&&wj * =

Dt
Dt wj
*

{ }

{ }

Equation 2.54
The effect of the operator in Equation 2.53 can be understood easily when one realises that in
that earth-bound co-ordinate system the sailing ship penetrates through a ''virtual vertical
disk''. For instance, when a ship sails with speed V and constant trim angle through still
water, the relative vertical velocity of a water particle with respect to the bottom of the sailing
ship becomes V sin V .
Two different types of strip theory methods (as has been used in SEAWAY) are discussed
here:
1. Ordinary Strip Theory Method
According to this classic method, the uncoupled two-dimensional
hydromechanic loads and wave loads in an arbitrary direction j are defined by:
D
X hj * =
M jj ' & hj * + N jj ' & hj * + X rsj '
Dt
D
*
'
*
'
*
'
X wj =
M jj &wj + N jj & wj + X fkj
Dt

potential

Equation 2.55
This is the first formulation of the strip theory that can be found in the literature. It
contains a more or less intuitive approach to the forward speed problem, as published in
detail by Korvin-Kroukovski and Jacobs [1957].
2. Modified Strip Theory Method
According to this modified method, these loads become:

45

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

X hj * =

D
i
'
N jj ' & hj * + X rsj '
M jj
Dt
e

X wj * =

D
i
'
N jj ' & wj * + X fkj '
M jj
Dt
e

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Equation 2.56
This formulation is a more fundamental approach of the forward speed problem, as
published in detail by Tasai [1969] and many others.
'

'

In the equations above, M jj and N jj are the 2-D potential mass and damping coefficients.
'

X rsj is the two-dimensional quasi-static restoring spring term, as generally present for heave,
'

roll and pitch only. X fkj is the two-dimensional Froude-Krilov force or moment which is
calculated by integration of the directional pressure gradient in the undisturbed wave over the
cross sectional area of the hull.
Equivalent directional components of the orbital acceleration and velocity - derived from
these Froude-Krilov loads - are used here to calculate the diffraction parts of the total wave
forces and moments.
From a theoretical point of view, one should prefer the use of the modified strip theory
method. However, it appeared from the authors experiences that for ships with moderate
forward speed ( Fn 0.30 ) the ordinary method could provide in some cases a better fit with
experimental data.

2.5.3 End-Terms
From the previous, it is obvious that in the equations of motion longitudinal derivatives of the
'
'
two-dimensional potential mass M jj and damping N jj will appear. These derivatives have to
be determined numerically over the whole ship length in such a manner that the following
relation is fulfilled:
xb ( L )+
x b (0 )
x b (L )
xb ( L )+
df ( xb )
df ( xb )
df ( xb )
df ( xb )

dx
=

dx
+

dx
+
dx b
b
b
b

dxb
dx b
dx b
dx b
xb (0 )
xb (0 )
xb ( 0 )
xb ( L )
= f (0 ) +

df (x b )
dxb f ( L )

dx
x b (0 )
b
xb ( L )

=0
Equation 2.57
with << L , while f (x b ) is equal to the local values of N jj ( xb ) or M jj ( xb ) ; see Figure 2.5
2.
'

46

'

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Figure 2.52: Integration of derivatives


The numerical integration of the derivatives will be carried out in the region
x b (0 ) x b x b (L ) only. So, the additional so-called ''end terms'' are defined by f (0 ) and
f (L ) .
Because the integration of the derivatives should be carried out in the region just behind until
just before the ship, so x b (0 ) xb xb ( L ) + , some can algebra provide the integral and
the first and second order moments (with respect to G ) over the whole ship length (slender
body assumption):
xb ( L ) +

( )

xb 0

df (x b )
dxb = 0
dxb

b
df (x b )

dx
=

dxb b b x (0)f ( x b ) dx b
xb (0 )
b

xb ( L ) +

(L)

xb ( L )
df (x b )
2

dx
=

f (x b ) x b dx b
b
b

dx
b
xb ( 0 )
xb ( 0 )

xb ( L ) +

Equation 2.58
Notice that these expressions are valid for the integration of the potential coefficients over the
full ship length only. They can not be used for calculating local hydromechanic loads. Also for
the wave loads, these expressions can not be used, because there these derivatives are
multiplied with equivalent x b -depending orbital motion amplitudes.

47

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

2.6 Hydrodynamic Coefficients


In strip theory, the two-dimensional hydrodynamic sway, heave and roll coefficients can be
calculated by several methods:
1. Methods based on Ursell's Theory and Conformal Mapping
Ursell [1949] derived an analytical solution for solving the problem of calculating the
hydrodynamic coefficients of an oscillating circular cylinder in the surface of a fluid:
a) Deep Water Coefficients with Lewis Conformal Mapping
Tasai [1959], Tasai [1961] and many others added the so-called Lewis transformation which is a very simple and in a lot of cases also more or less realistic method to
transform ship-like cross sections to this unit circle - to Ursell's solution. This
transformation will be carried out using a scale factor and two mapping coefficients.
Only the breadth, the draft and the area of the mapped cross section will be similar to
that of the actual cross section.
b) Deep Water Coefficients with Close-Fit Conformal Mapping
A more accurate way of mapping has been added by Tasai [1960] and others too, by
using more than only two mapping coefficients. The accuracy obtained depends on the
number of mapping coefficients. Generally, a maximum number of 10 coefficients are
used for defining the cross section. These coefficients are determined in such a way
that the Root Mean Square of the differences between the offsets of the mapped and
the actual cross section is minimal.
c) Shallow Water Coefficients with Lewis Conformal Mapping
For shallow water, the theory of Keil [1974] - based on an expansion of Ursell's
potential theory for circular cylinders at deep water to shallow water - and Lewis
conformal mapping can be used.
2. Frank's Pulsating Source Theory for Deep Water
Mapping methods require an intersection of the cross section with the water plane and, as
a consequence of this, they are not suitable for submerged cross sections, like at a bulbous
bow. Also, conformal mapping can fail for cross sections with very low sectional area
coefficients, such as are sometimes present in the aft body of a ship.
Frank [1967] considered a cylinder of constant cross sections with an arbitrarily
symmetrical shape, of which the cross sections are simply a region of connected line
elements. This vertical cross section can be fully or partly immersed in a previously
undisturbed fluid of infinite depth. He developed an integral equation method utilising the
Green's function, which represents a complex potential of a pulsating point source of unit
strength at the midpoint of each line element. Wave systems were defined in such a way
that all required boundary conditions were fulfilled. The linearised Bernoulli equation
provides the pressures after which the potential coefficients were obtained from the inphase and out-of-phase components of the resultant hydrodynamic loads.
The 2-D potential pitch and yaw (moment) coefficients follow from the previous heave and
sway coefficients and the lever, i.e., the distance of the cross section to the centre of gravity
G.

48

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

A more or less empirical procedure has followed by the author for the surge motion. An
equivalent longitudinal cross section has been defined. For each frequency, the twodimensional potential hydrodynamic sway coefficient of this equivalent cross section is
translated to two-dimensional potential hydrodynamic surge coefficients, by an empirical
method based on theoretical results of three-dimensional calculations.
The 3-D coefficients follow from an integration of these 2-D coefficients over the ship's
length. Viscous terms have been be added for surge and roll.

49

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

50

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

2-D Potential Coefficients

This Chapter described the various methods, used in the SEAWAY computer code, to obtain
the 2-D potential coefficients:
the theory of Tasai for deep water, based on Ursell's potential theory for circular cylinders
and Lewis and N-parameter conformal mapping
the theory of Keil for very shallow to deep water, based on a variation of Ursell's potential
theory for circular cylinders and Lewis conformal mapping
the theory of Frank for deep water, using pulsating sources on the cross sectional contour.
During the ship motions calculations different co-ordinate systems, as shown before, will be
used. The two-dimensional hydrodynamic potential coefficients have been defined here with
respect to the O( x, y , z ) co-ordinate system for the moving ship in still water.
However, in this section deviating axes systems are used for the determination of the twodimensional hydrodynamic potential coefficients for sway, heave and roll motions. This holds
for the sway and roll coupling coefficients a change of sign. The signs of the uncoupled sway,
heave and roll coefficients do not change.
For each cross section, the following two-dimensional hydrodynamic coefficients have to be
obtained:
M 22 ' and N 22'
2-D potential mass and damping coefficients of sway

M 24 ' and N 24'

M 33 and N33

'

'

2-D potential mass and damping coupling coefficients of roll into sway
2-D potential mass and damping coefficients of heave

M 44 and N

'
44

2-D potential mass and damping coefficients of roll

M42 and N

'
42

2-D potential mass and damping coupling coefficients of sway into roll

'

'

'

'

'

'

The 2-D potential pitch and yaw (moment) coefficients, M 55 , N 55 , M 66 and N 66 , follow
from the previous heave and sway coefficients and the lever of the loads, i.e., the distance of
the cross section to the centre of gravity G .
Finally, an approximation is given for the determination of the 2-D potential surge coefficients
M 11' and N11' .

51

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

52

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

3.1 Conformal Mapping Methods


Ursell's derivation of potential coefficients is valid for semicircular cross sections only. For
the determination of the two-dimensional added mass and damping in the sway, heave and roll
mode of the motions of ship-like cross sections by Ursell's method, the cross sections have to
be mapped conformally to the unit semicircle. The advantage of conformal mapping is that the
velocity potential of the fluid around an arbitrarily shape of a cross section in a complex plane
can be derived from the more convenient semicircular section in another complex plane. In
this manner hydrodynamic problems can be solved directly with the coefficients of the
mapping function.
The general transformation formula see also Figure 3.11 - is given by:

z = M s a2 n 1 (2 n 1 )

}
Equation 3.11

with:

z = x + iy

plane of the ship's cross section

= ie e i
Ms
a 1
a 2 n 1
N

plane of the unit circle


scale factor
= +1
conformal mapping coefficients ( n = 1,... N )
Maximum parameter index number

Figure 3.11: Mapping relation between two planes


From this follows the relation between the co-ordinates in the z -plane (the ship's cross
section) and the variables in the -plane (the circular cross section):
N

x = M s ( 1)n a2 n 1 e (2 n 1 ) a sin ((2n 1) )


n= 0
N

y = + M s ( 1)n a2 n 1 e (2 n 1 )a cos((2n 1) )
n= 0

Equation 3.12
53

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

The contour of the - by conformal mapping approximated - ship's cross section follows from
putting = 0 in the previous relations in Equation 3.12:
N

x0 = M s ( 1)n a2 n 1 sin ((2n 1) )


n =0
N

y0 = +M s ( 1)n a2 n 1 cos((2n 1) )
n =0

Equation 3.13
The breadth on the waterline of the approximated ship's cross section is defined by:
N
b
b0 = 2 M s a
with: a = {a2 n 1 } and M s = 0
2 a
n =0
Equation 3.14
The draught is defined by:
d 0 = M s b

with: b = ( 1)n a 2 n 1
n =0

}
Equation 3.15

3.1.1 Lewis Conformal Mapping


A very simple and in a lot of cases also a more or less realistic transformation of the cross
sectional hull form will be obtained with N = 2 in the transformation formula, the well
known Lewis transformation, see reference Lewis [1929]. An extended and clear description
of the representation of ship hull forms by this Lewis two-parameter conformal mapping is
given by von Kerczek and Tuck [1969].
The two-parameter Lewis transformation of a cross section is defined by:
z = M s (a 1 + a1 1 + a3 3 )
Equation 3.16
In here a 1 = +1 and the conformal mapping coefficients a1 and a 3 are called Lewis
coefficients, while M s is the scale factor.
Then:
x = M s e sin + a1 e sin a3 e 3 sin 3
y = Ms

(
(e

cos a1 e cos + a3 e 3 cos 3

Equation 3.17
By putting = 0 is the contour of this so-called Lewis form expressed as:
x0 = M s ((1 + a1 ) sin a3 sin 3 )
y0 = M s ((1 a1 ) cos + a3 cos 3 )
with scale factor:
Bs 2
Ds
Ms =
=
1 + a1 + a3 1 a1 + a3
Equation 3.18
54

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
in which:
Bs
Ds

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

sectional breadth on the water line


sectional draught

Now the coefficients a1 and a 3 and the scale factor M s will be determined in such a manner
that the sectional breadth, draught and area of the approximated cross section and of the actual
cross section are identical.
The half breadth to draught ratio H 0 is given by:
B 2 1 + a1 + a 3
H0 = s =
Ds
1 a1 + a 3
Equation 3.19
An integration of the Lewis form delivers the sectional area coefficient s :
As
1 a1 3 a3
s =
=
Bs Ds 4 (1 + a3 ) 2 a1 2
2

Equation 3.110
in which As is the area of the cross section.
Putting a1 , derived from the expression for H 0 in Equation 3.19, into the expression for s
in Equation 3.110 yields a quadratic equation in a 3 :
c1 a3 + c 2 a3 + c3 = 0
in which:
2

4 s 4 s H 0 1

c1 = 3 +
+ 1

H 0 + 1

c 2 = 2 c1 6
c3 = c1 4

Equation 3.111
The (valid) solutions for a 3 and a1 become:
a3 =
a1 =

c1 + 3 + 9 2 c1
c1
H 0 1
(a + 1)
H 0 +1 3
Equation 3.112

Lewis forms with the other solution of a 3 in the quadratic equation, with a minus sign before
the square root expression:
c1 + 3 9 2 c1
a3 =
c1
55

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

are looped; they intersect themselves at a point within the fourth quadrant. Since ships are
''better behaved'', these solutions are not considered.
It is obvious that a transformation of a half-immersed circle with radius R will result in
M s = R , a1 = 0 and a 3 = 0 .
Some typical and realistic Lewis forms are presented in Figure 3.12.

Figure 3.12: Typical Lewis forms

3.1.1.1 Boundaries of Lewis Forms


In some cases the Lewis transformation can give more or less ridiculous results. The
following typical Lewis hull forms, with the regions of the half breadth to draught ratio H 0
and the area coefficient s to match as presented before, can be distinguished:

re-entrant forms, bounded by:


3
for H 0 1.0 :
s <
(2 H 0 )
32
3
1

for H 0 1.0 :
s <
2
32
H 0
Equation 3.113

conventional forms, bounded by:


3
3
H
for H 0 1.0 :
(2 H0 ) < s <
3 + 0
32
32
4
3
1
3
1
< s <

for H 0 1.0 :
2
3 +
32
H0
32
4 H 0
Equation 3.114

bulbous and not-tunneled forms, bounded by:


3
H
3
1

H 0 1.0 and
3 + 0 < s <
3 +
32
4
32
4 H 0
Equation 3.115

tunneled and not-bulbous forms, bounded by:


3
1
3
H
< s <
for: H 0 1.0 and
3 +
3 + 0
32
4 H0
32
4
56

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003
Equation 3.116

combined bulbous and tunneled forms, bounded by:


3
1

1
< s <

for: H 0 1.0 and


3 +
10 + H0 +
32
4 H0
32
H0
3
H

1

for: H 0 1.0 and


3 + 0 < s <
10 + H 0 +
32
4
32
H 0
Equation 3.117

non-symmetric forms, bounded by:



1

0 < H 0 < and


s >
10 + H0 +
32
H 0
Equation 3.118

These ranges of the half breadth to draught ratio H 0 and the area coefficient s for the
different typical Lewis forms are shown in Figure 3.13.

Figure 3.13: Ranges of H 0 and s of Lewis Forms


3.1.1.2 Acceptable Lewis Forms
Not-acceptable forms of ships are supposed to be the re-entrant forms and the asymmetric
forms. So conventional forms, bulbous forms and tunneled forms are considered to be valid
forms here, see Figure 3.13. To obtain ship-like Lewis forms, the area coefficient s is
bounded by a lower limit to omit re-entrant Lewis forms and by an upper limit to omit nonsymmetric Lewis forms:
3

1

for H 0 1.0 :
(2 H 0 ) < s <
10 + H 0 +
32
32
H 0
for H 0 1.0 :

3
1

1
< s <

2
10 + H0 +
32
H0
32
H0
57

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003
Equation 3.119

If a value of s is outside of this range it has to be set (from a practical point of view) to the
value of the nearest border of this range, to calculate the Lewis coefficients.
Numerical problems, for instance with bulbous or aft cross sections of a ship, are avoided
when the following requirements are fulfilled:
Bs
B
> Ds and Ds > s with for instance = 0.01 .
2
2

3.1.2 Extended Lewis Conformal Mapping


Somewhat better approximations will be obtained by taking into account also the first order
moments of half the cross section about the x0 - and y0 -axes. These two additions to the
Lewis formulation were proposed by Reed and Nowacki [1974] and have been simplified by
Athanassoulis and Loukakis [1985] by taking into account the vertical position of the centroid
of the cross section. Extending the Lewis transformation from N = 2 to N = 3 in the general
transformation formula has done this.
The three-parameter Extended-Lewis transformation is defined by:
z = M s (a1 + a1 1 + a3 3 + a5 5 )
with a1 = +1 .
Equation 3.120
So:

(
(e

x = M s e sin + a1 e sin a3 e 3 sin 3 + a5 e 5 sin 5


y = Ms

cos a1 e cos + a3 e

cos 3 a5 e

cos 5

)
Equation 3.121

By putting = 0 , the contour of this approximated form is expressed as:


x0 = M s ((1 + a1 ) sin a3 sin 3 + a5 sin 5 )
y0 = M s ((1 a1 ) cos + a3 cos 3 a5 cos 5 )
with scale factor:
Bs 2
Ds
Ms =
=
1 + a1 + a3 + a5 1 a1 + a3 a5
Equation 3.122
in which:
Bs
sectional breadth on the water line
Ds
sectional draught
Now the coefficients a1 , a 3 and a5 and the scale factor M s will be determined such that,
except the sectional breadth, draught and area, also the centroids of the approximated cross
section and of the actual cross section have a similar position.
The half breadth to draught ratio H 0 is given by:
B 2 1 + a1 + a3 + a5
H0 = s =
Ds
1 a1 + a3 a5
58

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003
Equation 3.123

An integration of the approximated form results into the sectional area coefficient s :
As
1 a1 2 3 a3 2 5 a5 2
s =
=
Bs Ds 4 (1 + a3 )2 (a1 + a5 )2
Equation 3.124
A more complex expression has been obtained by Athanassoulis and Loukakis [1985] for the
relative distance of the centroid to the keel point:
KB
=
=1
Ds

{A
3

i =0

j= 0

k =0

ijk

a2 i 1 a2 j 1 a2 k 1 }
3

H0 s a2 i 13
i =0

in which:
Aijk =

1
1 2 k
1 2k
1 2 k
1 2 k

+
+

4 3 2 (i + j + k ) 1 2 (i j + k ) 1 2 (i + j k ) 1 2 ( i + j + k )
Equation 3.125

The following requirements should be fulfilled when also bulbous cross sections are allowed:
re-entrant forms are avoided when:
1 a1 3 a3 5 a5 > 0
1 + a1 3 a3 + 5 a5 > 0
Equation 3.126

existence of a point of self-intersection is avoided when:


9 a3 2 + 145 a5 2 + 10 a3 a5 + 20 H 0 a5 > 0
9 a3 2 + 145 a5 2 10 a3 a5 20 H 0 a5 > 0
Equation 3.127

Taking these restrictions into account, the equations above can be solved in an iterative
manner.

3.1.3 Close-Fit Conformal Mapping


A more accurate transformation of the cross sectional hull form can be obtained by using a
greater number of parameters N . A very simple and straight on iterative least squares method
of the first author to determine the Close-Fit conformal mapping coefficients will be described
here shortly.
The scale factor M s and the conformal mapping coefficients a2 n 1 , with a maximum value of
n varying from N = 2 until N = 10 , have been determined successfully from the offsets of
various cross sections in such that the sum of the squares of the deviations of the actual cross
section from the approximate described cross section is minimised.
59

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

The general transformation formula is again given by:


N

z = M s a2 n 1 ( 2 n 1 )
with: a1 = +1 .

n =0

Equation 3.128
Then the contour of the approximated cross section is given by:
N

x0 = M s ( 1)n a2 n 1 sin ((2n 1) )


n= 0
N

y0 = + M s ( 1)n a2 n 1 cos ((2 n 1) )


n= 0

with scale factor:


B 2
Ms = N s
=
{a 2n 1 }
n= 0

Ds

{( 1)
N

n= 0

a2 n 1

}
Equation 3.129

The procedure starts with initial values for [M s a 2 n 1 ] . The initial values of M s , a1 and a 3
are obtained with the Lewis method as has been described before, while the initial values of
a 5 through a2 N 1 are set to zero. With these [M s a 2 n 1 ] values, a i -value is determined for
each offset in such a manner that the actual offset ( xi , yi ) lies on the normal of the
approximated contour of the cross section in ( x0 i , y 0 i ) .
Now i has to be determined. Therefore a function F (i ) , will be defined by the distance
from the offset ( xi , yi ) to the normal of the contour to the actual cross section through
(x0i , y 0i ), see Figure 3.14.

Figure 3.14: Cose-Fit conformal mapping

60

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

These i offsets ( i = 0,...I ) have to be selected at approximately equal mutual circumferential


lengths, eventually with somewhat more dense offsets near sharp corners. Then i is defined
by:
+ x i +1 xi 1
cos i =
( xi+1 x i1 ) 2 + ( y i+1 yi 1 )2
sin i =

yi +1 + y i 1

(x i+1 xi 1 )2 + ( y i+1 y i1 )2
Equation 3.130

With this i -value, the numerical value of the square of the deviation of ( xi , yi ) from ( x0 i , y 0 i )
is calculated:
2
2
ei = ( xi x0 i ) + ( yi y0 i )
Equation 3.131
After doing this for all I + 1 offsets, the numerical value of the sum of the squares of
deviations is known:
I

E = {ei }
i= 0

Equation 3.132
The sum of the squares of these deviations can also be expressed as:
2
N


n

x
+
(

1
)

[
M

a
]

sin
(
(
2
n

1
)

i
s
2 n 1
i
I

n= 0

E =

2
N
i =0

n
+ y i ( 1) [M s a 2 n 1 ] cos((2n 1) i )
n =0

Equation 3.133
Then, new values of [M s a 2 n 1 ] have to be determined such that E is minimised. This means
that the derivative of this equation to each coefficient [M s a 2 n 1 ] is zero, so:
E
=0
for: j = 0,... N
{M s a2 j 1 }
Equation 3.134
This provides N + 1 equations:
N

sin
(
(
2
j

1
)

( 1) n [M s a 2n 1 ] sin ((2n 1) i )

i
I

n =0

N
i= 0
n
cos ((2 j 1) i ) ( 1) [M s a2 n 1 ] cos ((2n 1) i )

n= 0

= {xi sin ((2 j 1) i ) y i cos((2 j 1) i )}


i =0

which are rewritten as:

61

for: j = 0,... N

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

n
(

1
)

[
M

a
]

cos((2 j 2n ) i ) =

s
2 n 1
n= 0
i= 0

{ x
i= 0

sin ((2 j 1) i ) + yi cos((2 j 1) i )}

for: j = 0,... N

Equation 3.135
To obtain the exact actual breadth and draught, the last two equations ( j = N 1 and j = N )
in Equation 3.135 are replaced by the equations for the breadth at the water line and the
draught:
N
I

n
(

1
)

[
M

a
]

{cos ((2 j 2n ) i )} =

s
2 n 1

n= 0
i= 0

{ x

sin ((2 j 1) i ) + yi cos ((2 j 1) i )}

for : j = 0,...N 2

i= 0

{[M
n =0

{( 1) [M
N

a 2 n 1 ]} = Bs 2

a2 n 1 ] = Ds

n= 0

Equation 3.136
These N + 1 equations can be solved numerically, so that new values for [M s a 2 n 1 ] will be
obtained. These new values are used instead of the initial values to obtain new i -values of
the I + 1 offsets again, etc. This procedure will be repeated several times and stops when the
difference between the numerical E -values of two subsequent calculations becomes less than
a certain threshold value E , depending on the dimensions of the cross section; for instance:
2
2
E = (I + 1) 0.00005 bmax + d max

Equation 3.137
in which:
bmax
d max

maximum half breadth of the cross section


maximum draught of the cross section

Because a 1 = +1 , the scale factor M s is equal to the final solution of the first coefficient
( n = 0 ). The N other coefficients a 2 n 1 can be found by dividing the final solutions of
[M s a 2n1 ] by this M s -value.
Reference is also given here to a report of de Jong [1973]. In that report several other, suitable
but more complex, methods are described to determine the scale factor M s and the conformal
mapping coefficients a 2 n 1 from the offsets of a cross section.
Attention has been paid in SEAWAY to divergence in the calculation routines and re-entrant
forms. In these cases the number N will be decreased until the divergence or re-entrance
vanish. In the worse case the ''minimum'' value of N will be attained without success. One
62

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

can then switch to Lewis coefficients with an area coefficient of the cross section, eventually
set to the nearest border of the valid Lewis form area.

3.1.4 Mapping Comparisons


A first example has been given here for the amidships cross section of a container vessel, with
a breadth of 25.40 meter and a draught of 9.00 meter, with offsets as tabled below.

Table 3.1-1:

Offsets of a cross section

For the least square method in the conformal mapping method, 33 new offsets at equidistant
length intervals on the contour of this cross section can be determined by a second degree
interpolation routine. The calculated data of the two-parameter Lewis and the N -parameter
Close-Fit conformal mapping of this amidships cross section are tabled below. The last line
lists the RMS -values for the deviations of the 33 equidistant points on the approximate
contour of this cross section.

Table 3.1-2: Conformal mapping coefficients


Another example is given in Figure 3.15, which shows the differences between a Lewis
transformation and a 10-parameter close-fit conformal mapping of a rectangular cross section.

63

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Figure 3.15: Lewis and Close-Fit conformal mapping of a rectangle

64

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

3.2 Potential Theory of Tasai


In this section, the determination of the hydrodynamic coefficients of a heaving, swaying and
rolling cross section of a ship in deep water at zero forward speed is based on work published
by Ursell [1949], Tasai [1959], Tasai [1960], Tasai [1961] and de Jong [1973]. Tasai's
notations have been maintained here as far as possible.
The axes system of Tasai (and used here) is given in Figure 3.21.

Figure 3.21: Tasais axes system for heave, sway and roll oscillations
The figure shows a cross section of an infinite long cylinder in the surface of a fluid. This
cylinder will carry out forced harmonic heave, sway and roll motions, respectively. Using the
approach of Tasai (and de Jong), the determination of the hydrodynamic loads will be showed
in the following Sections.

65

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

3.2.1 Heave Motions


The determination of the hydrodynamic coefficients of a heaving cross section of a ship in
deep and still water at zero forward speed, as described here, is based on work published by
Ursell [1949], Tasai [1959] and Tasai [1960]. Starting points for the derivation these
coefficients here are the velocity potentials and the conjugate stream functions of the fluid, as
they have been derived by Tasai and also by de Jong [1973].
Suppose an infinite long cylinder in the surface of a fluid, of which a cross section is given in
Figure 3.21. The cylinder is forced to carry out a simple harmonic vertical motion about its
initial position with a frequency of oscillation and small amplitude of displacement ya :
y = ya cos( t + )
Equation 3.21
in which is a phase angle.
Respectively, the vertical velocity and acceleration of the cylinder are:
&y& = 2 y a cos ( t + )
y& = y a sin ( t + )
and
Equation 3.22
This forced vertical oscillation of the cylinder causes a surface disturbance of the fluid.
Because the cylinder is supposed to be infinitely long, the generated waves will be twodimensional. These waves travel away from the cylinder and a stationary state is rapidly
attained.
Two kinds of waves will be produced:
A standing wave system, denoted here by subscript A .
The amplitudes of these waves decrease strongly with the distance to the cylinder.
A regular progressive wave system, denoted here by subscript B .
These waves dissipate energy. At a distance of a few wavelengths from the cylinder, the
waves on each side can be described by a single regular wave train. The wave amplitude at
infinity a is proportional to the amplitude of oscillation of the cylinder ya , provided that
this amplitude is sufficiently small compared with the radius of the cylinder and the
wavelength is not much smaller than the diameter of the cylinder.
The two-dimensional velocity potential of the fluid has to fulfil the following requirements:
1. The velocity potential must satisfy to the equation of Laplace:
2 2
2 =
+ 2 =0
x 2
y
Equation 3.23
2. Because the heave motion of the fluid is symmetrical about the (vertical) y -axis, this
velocity potential has the following relation:
( x, y ) = (+ x , y )
Equation 3.24
from which follows:
66

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

=0

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

for: = 0
Equation 3.25

3. The linearised free surface condition in deep water is expressed as follows:


2

B
+
=0
for: x s and y = 0
g
y
2
Equation 3.26
In consequence of the conformal mapping, the free surface condition in Equation 3.26 can be
written as:
N
b

(2n 1) a2 n 1 e ( 2 n 1 )
=0
for: 0 and =
a

2
n= 0
in which:
b 2
2 b0
=
M s
or
b =
(non-dimensional frequency squared)
a
g
2 g

Equation 3.27
From the definition of the velocity potential follows the boundary condition on the surface of
the cylinder for = 0 :
0 ( )
y
= y& 0
n
n
Equation 3.28
in which n is the outward normal of the cylinder surface.
Using the stream function , this boundary condition on the surface of the cylinder ( = 0 )
reduces to:
0 ( )
y
= y& 0

= y& M s ( 1) n (2n 1) a 2 n 1 cos((2n 1) )


n= 0

Equation 3.29
Integration results into the following requirement for the stream function on the surface of the
cylinder:
N

0 ( ) = y& M s ( 1)n a 2 n 1 sin ((2n 1) ) + C (t )


n =0

Equation 3.210
in which C (t ) is a function of time only.
When defining:

67

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
h ( ) =

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

2 x0
b0

1 N
n
( 1) a 2 n 1 sin ((2n 1) )
a n =0

Equation 3.211
the stream function on the surface of the cylinder is given by:
b
0 ( ) = y& 0 h( ) + C(t )
2
Equation 3.212
Because of the symmetry of the fluid about the y -axis, it is clear that C (t ) = 0 , so that:
b
0 ( ) = y& 0 h ( )
2
Equation 3.213
For the standing wave system a velocity potential and a stream function satisfying the
equation of Laplace, the symmetrical motion of the fluid and the free surface condition has to
be found.
The following set of velocity potentials, as they are given by Tasai [1959], Tasai [1960] and
de Jong [1973], fulfil these requirements:

g a

A =
{P2 m A 2 m (, ) cos( t )} + {Q2 m A 2 m (, ) sin ( t )}
m =1
m =1

in which:
A 2 m (, ) = e 2 m cos (2m )

b N
2n 1
n

( 1)
a 2 n 1 e ( 2 m + 2 n 1) cos((2m + 2 n 1) )
a n = 0
2m + 2 n 1

Equation 3.214

The set of conjugate stream functions is expressed as:

g a

A =
{P2 m A 2 m (, ) cos( t )} + {Q2 m A 2 m (, ) sin ( t )}
m =1
m =1

in which:
A 2 m (, ) = e 2 m sin (2m )

b N
2n 1
n

( 1)
a 2 n 1 e (2 m + 2 n 1) sin ((2m + 2 n 1) )
a n = 0
2 m + 2n 1

Equation 3.215

These sets of functions tend to zero as tends to infinity.


In these expressions the magnitudes of the P2 m and Q2 m series follow from the boundary
conditions as will be explained further on.
Another requirement is a diverging wave train for goes to infinity. It is therefore necessary
to add a stream function, satisfying the free surface condition and the symmetry about the y 68

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

axis, representing such a train of waves at infinity. For this, a function describing a source at
the origin O is chosen.
Tasai [1959], Tasai [1960] and de Jong [1973] gave the velocity potential of the progressive
wave system as:
g a
B =
{Bc (x , y ) cos( t ) + Bs ( x, y ) sin ( t )}

in which:
Bc = + e y cos ( x )
sin (k y ) k cos( k y ) k x
e
dk
k 2 + 2
0

Bs = + e y sin ( x ) +
while:
2
=
g

(wave number for deep water)


Equation 3.216

Changing the parameters provides:


g a
B =
{Bc (, ) cos( t ) + Bs (, ) sin ( t )}

Equation 3.217
The conjugate stream function is given by:
g a
B =
{Bc ( x, y ) cos( t ) + Bs ( x, y ) sin ( t )}

in which:
Bc = + e y sin ( x )
cos(k y ) + k sin (k y ) k x
e
dk
k 2 + 2
0

Bs = e y cos ( x ) +

Equation 3.218
Changing the parameters provides:
g a
B =
{Bc (, ) cos( t ) + Bs (, ) sin ( t )}

Equation 3.219
When calculating the integrals in the expressions for Bs and Bc numerically, the
convergence is very slowly.
Power series expansions, as given by Porter [1960], can be used instead of these last integrals
over k . Summations in these expansions converge much faster than the numeric integration
procedure. This will be shown in the Section 3.2.2 for the sway case.
The total velocity potential and stream function to describe the waves generated by a heaving
cylinder are:
= A + B
= A + B
Equation 3.220
69

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

So the velocity potential and the conjugate stream function are expressed by:

+ Bc (, ) + {P2 m A 2 m (, )} cos ( t )
g a

m =1

(, ) =

{Q2 m A 2m (, )} sin ( t )
+ Bs (, ) +
m =1

+ Bc (, ) + {P2 m A 2 m (, )} cos ( t )
g a

m =1

(, ) =

)
+
{
Q

)
}

sin
(

t
)
Bs

2m
A2m

m
=
1

Equation 3.221
When putting = 0 , the stream function is equal to the expression in Equation 3.213, found
from the boundary condition on the surface of the cylinder:

+ B 0 c ( ) + {P2 m A 02 m ( )} cos( t )
g a

m =1

0 ( ) =

{Q2m A02m ()} sin ( t )


+ B 0 s ( ) +
m =1

b
= y& 0 h( )
2
in which:
A 02 m ( ) = sin (2m )

b N
2n 1
n

( 1)
a
sin ((2 m + 2n 1) )
a n= 0
2m + 2n 1 2 n 1

Equation 3.222

In this expression, B 0 c ( ) and B 0 s ( ) are the values of Bc (, ) and Bs (, ) at the


surface of the cylinder, so for = 0 .
So for each , the following equation has been obtained from Equation 3.222:

+ B 0 c ( ) + {P2 m A 02 m ( )} cos( t )

b0
m =1

= y& 2 g h ( )

a
+ B 0 s ( ) + {Q2 m A 02 m ( )} sin ( t )

m =1

Equation 3.223
The right hand side of this equation can be written as:
b0
y

y&
h( ) = h( ) a b sin ( t + )
2 g a
a

= h( ) {A0 cos( t ) + B0 sin ( t )}

in which:
70

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
A0 =

ya
b sin
a

and

B0 =

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003
ya
b cos
a
Equation 3.224

This results for each into a set of two equations:

B 0 c ( ) + {P2 m A 02 m ( )} = h( ) A0
m =1

B 0 s ( ) + {Q2 m A 02 m ( )} = h( ) B0
m =1

Equation 3.225
When putting = 2 , so at the intersection of the surface of the cylinder with the free
surface of the fluid where h ( ) = 1 , we obtain the coefficients A0 and B0 :

A0 = B 0 c ( 2) + {P2 m A 02 m ( 2 )}
m =1

B0 = B 0 s ( 2 ) + {Q2 m A 02 m ( 2)}
m =1

in which:
N
b
m
2n 1

A 02 m ( 2) =
( 1)
a 2 n 1
a

n =0 2m + 2n 1

Equation 3.226
A substitution of A0 and B0 into the set of two equations for each , results for each -value
less than 2 in a set of two equations with the yet unknown parameters P2 m and Q2 m , so:

B 0 c ( ) h( ) B 0 c ( 2 ) = { f 2 m ( ) P2 m }
m =1

B 0 s ( ) h( ) B 0 s ( 2 ) = { f 2 m ( ) Q2 m }
m =1

in which:
f 2 m ( ) = A 02 m ( ) + h( ) A 02 m ( 2 )
Equation 3.227
The series in these two sets of equations converges uniformly with an increasing value of m .
For practical reasons the maximum value of m is limited to M , for instance M = 10 .
Each -value less than 2 will provide an equation for the P2 m and Q2 m series. For a lot of
-values, the best fit values of P2 m and Q2 m are supposed to be those found by means of a
least square method. Notice that at least M values of , less than 2 , are required to solve
these equations.
Another favourable method is to multiply both sides of the equations with . Then the
summation over can be replaced by integration.
Herewith, two sets of M equations have been obtained, one set for P2 m and one set for Q2 m :
71

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

2
P2 m f 2 m ( ) f 2 n ( ) d = (B 0 c ( ) h( ) B 0 c ( 2 )) f 2 n ( ) d

0
m =1
0

2
M
2

Q2 m f 2 m ( ) f 2 n ( ) d = (B 0 s ( ) h ( ) B 0 s ( 2)) f 2 n ( ) d

0
m =1
0

for: n = 1,...M
M

Equation 3.228
Now the P2 m and Q2 m series can be solved by a numerical method and with these values, the
coefficients A0 and B0 are known too.
From the definition of these coefficients in Equation 3.224 follows the amplitude ratio of the
radiated waves and the forced heave oscillation:
a
b
=
2
2
ya
A +B
0

Equation 3.229
With the solved P2 m and Q2 m values, the velocity potential on the surface of the cylinder
( = 0 ) is known too:

+ B 0 c ( ) + {P2 m A 02 m ( )} cos( t )
g a

m =1

0 ( ) =

{Q2m A02m ( )} sin ( t )


+ B 0 s ( ) +
m =1

in which:
A 02 m ( ) = cos(2 m )

b N
2n 1
n

( 1)
a 2 n 1 cos((2m + 2 n 1) )
a n =0
2m + 2n 1

Equation 3.230

In this expression, B0 c ( ) and B0 s ( ) are the values of Bc (, ) and Bs (, ) at the


surface of the cylinder, so for = 0 .
3.2.1.1 Pressure Distribution During Heave Motions
Now the hydrodynamic pressure on the surface of the cylinder can be obtained from the
linearised equation of Bernoulli:

72

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

0 ( )
t
M

+ B 0 s ( ) + {Q2 m A 02 m ( )} cos ( t )
g a

m =1

B 0 c ( ) + {P2 m A 02 m ( )} sin ( t )

m =1

p ( ) =

Equation 3.231
It is obvious that this pressure is symmetric in .
3.2.1.2 Heave Coefficients
The two-dimensional hydrodynamic vertical force, acting on the cylinder in the direction of
the y -axis, can be found by integrating the vertical component of the hydrodynamic pressure
on the surface of the cylinder:
+ 2
dx
'
Fy = p( ) 0 ds
ds
2
2

= 2

dx 0

p () d d
0

Equation 3.232
With this the two-dimensional hydrodynamic vertical force due to heave oscillations can be
written as follows:
g b0 a
'
Fy =
(M 0 cos ( t ) N 0 sin ( t ))

in which:
1
M0 =

n
B 0s () {( 1) (2n 1) a2n 1 cos((2n 1) )} d

n= 0

1 M
(
2n 1)2
m

( 1) Q2 m
a2 n 1
2
2
a m =1
n = 0 (2m ) (2n 1)

N
N m

Q
+
(

1
)

{(2n 1) a2n 1 a2m + 2 n1}

2
m

2
4 a
m =1
n= 0

and N 0 as obtained from this expression above for M 0 , by replacing there B0 s ( ) by


B0 c ( ) and Q2 m by P2 m .
Equation 3.233
For the determination of M 0 and N 0 , it is required that M N . These expressions coincide
with those as given by Tasai [1960].
With Equation 3.233 in some other format:

73

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

g b0 a
(M 0 cos ( t + ) N 0 sin ( t + ))

a
sin =
A0
y a b
a
cos =
B
y a b 0
Fy =
'

Equation 3.234
the two-dimensional hydrodynamic vertical force can be resolved into components in phase
and out phase with the vertical displacement of the cylinder:
2
g b0 a
Fy ' =

2 b y a

{(M 0 B0 + N 0 A0 ) cos ( t + ) + ( M 0 A0 N 0 B0 ) sin ( t + )}

Equation 3.235
This hydrodynamic vertical force can also be written as:
Fy ' = M 33 ' &y& N 33 ' y&
= M 33 ' 2 ya cos ( t + ) + N 33 ' y a sin ( t + )
Equation 3.236
in which:
'
M 33
N 33

2-D hydrodynamic mass coefficient of heave

'

2-D hydrodynamic damping coefficient of heave

When using also the amplitude ratio of the radiated waves and the forced heave oscillation,
found before in Equation 3.229, the two-dimensional hydrodynamic mass and damping
coefficients of heave are given by:
b0 2 M 0 B0 + N 0 A0
M 33 ' =

2
A0 2 + B0 2
N 33

'

b0 2 M 0 A0 N 0 B0
=

2
A0 2 + B0 2
Equation 3.237

The signs of these two coefficients are proper in both, the axes system of Tasai and the ship
motions O( x, y, z ) co-ordinate system.
The energy delivered by the exciting forces should be equal to the energy radiated by the
waves, so:
1

Tosc

Tosc

(N
0

'
33

y& ( y& dt ) =

g a c
2
2

Equation 3.238
in which Tosc is the period of oscillation.
74

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

With the relation for the wave speed c = g at deep water, follows the relation between the
two-dimensional heave damping coefficient and the amplitude ratio of the radiated waves and
the forced heave oscillation:
N33

'

g 2
=
3


a
ya

Equation 3.239
With this amplitude ratio the two-dimensional hydrodynamic damping coefficient of heave is
also given by:
2
2 b0
1
'
N 33 =
2

2
4
A0 + B0
Equation 3.240
'

When comparing this expression for N 33 with the expression found before, the following
energy balance relation is found:
2
M 0 A0 N 0 B0 =
2
Equation 3.241

75

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

3.2.2 Sway Motions


The determination of the hydrodynamic coefficients of a swaying cross section of a ship in
deep and still water at zero forward speed is based here on work published by Tasai [1961] for
the Lewis conformal mapping method. Starting points for the derivation these coefficients
here are the velocity potentials and the conjugate stream functions of the fluid as they have
been derived by Tasai [1961] and also by de Jong [1973].
Suppose an infinite long cylinder in the surface of a fluid, of which a cross section is given in
Figure 3.21. The cylinder is forced to carry out a simple harmonic lateral motion about its
initial position with a frequency of oscillation and small amplitude of displacement x a :
x = x a cos ( t + )
Equation 3.242
in which is a phase angle.
Respectively, the lateral velocity and acceleration of the cylinder are:
&x& = 2 xa cos ( t + )
x& = xa sin ( t + )
and
Equation 3.243
This forced lateral oscillation of the cylinder causes a surface disturbance of the fluid.
Because the cylinder is supposed to be infinitely long, the generated waves will be twodimensional. These waves travel away from the cylinder and a stationary state is rapidly
attained.
Two kinds of waves will be produced:
A standing wave system, denoted here by subscript A .
The amplitudes of these waves decrease strongly with the distance to the cylinder.
A regular progressive wave system, denoted here by subscript B .
These waves dissipate energy. At a distance of a few wavelengths from the cylinder, the
waves on each side can be described by a single regular wave train. The wave amplitude at
infinity a is proportional to the amplitude of oscillation of the cylinder x a , provided that
this amplitude is sufficiently small compared with the radius of the cylinder and the
wavelength is not much smaller than the diameter of the cylinder.
The two-dimensional velocity potential of the fluid has to fulfil the following requirements:
1. The velocity potential must satisfy to the equation of Laplace:
2 2
2 =
+ 2 =0
x 2
y
Equation 3.244
2. Because the sway motion of the fluid is not symmetrical about the y -axis, this velocity
potential has the following anti-symmetric relation:
( x, y ) = (+ x, y )
Equation 3.245
3. The linearised free surface condition in deep water is expressed as follows:

76

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
2

+
=0
g
y

for: x

Bs
2

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

y=0

and

Equation 3.246
In consequence of the conformal mapping, this free surface condition can be written as:
N
b

(2n 1) a2 n 1 e ( 2 n 1 )
=0
for: 0 and =
a

2
n= 0
in which:
b 2
2 b0
=
M s
or
b =
(non-dimensional frequency squared)
a
g
2 g

Equation 3.247
From the definition of the velocity potential follows the boundary condition on the surface of
the cylinder S for = 0 :
0 ( )
x
= x& 0
n
n
Equation 3.248
in which n is the outward normal of the cylinder surface S .
Using the stream function , this boundary condition on the surface of the cylinder ( = 0 )
reduces to:
0 ( )
x
= x& 0

= x& M s ( 1) (2n 1) a2 n 1 sin ((2 n 1) )


n =0

Equation 3.249
Integration results into the following requirement for the stream function on the surface of the
cylinder:
N

0 ( ) = x& M s ( 1)n a 2 n 1 cos((2n 1) ) + C (t )


n= 0

Equation 3.250
in which C (t ) is a function of time only.
When defining:
2 y0
g ( ) =
b0

1 N
n
=
( 1) a2 n 1 cos ((2 n 1) )
a n = 0

Equation 3.251
the stream function on the surface of the cylinder is given by:

77

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
0 ( ) = x&

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

b0
g ( ) + C (t )
2
Equation 3.252

For the standing wave system a velocity potential and a stream function satisfying to the
equation of Laplace, the non-symmetrical motion of the fluid and the free surface condition
has to be found.
The following set of velocity potentials, as they are given by Tasai [1961] and de Jong [1973],
fulfil these requirements:

g a

A =
{P2 m A 2 m (, ) cos( t )} + {Q2 m A 2 m (, ) sin ( t )}
m =1
m =1

in which:
A 2 m (, ) = + e ( 2 m +1) sin ((2m + 1) )

b N
2n 1
n

( 1)
a
e (2 m + 2 n ) sin ((2m + 2n ) )
a n = 0
2 m + 2n 2 n 1

Equation 3.253

The set of conjugate stream functions is expressed as:

g a

A =
{P2 m A 2 m (, ) cos( t )} + {Q2 m A 2 m (, ) sin ( t )}
m =1
m =1

in which:
A 2 m (, ) = e (2 m +1 ) cos((2m + 1) )
+

b N
2n 1
n

( 1)
a2 n 1 e (2 m + 2 n ) cos ((2m + 2 n) )
a n = 0
2m + 2n

Equation 3.254

These sets of functions tend to zero as tends to infinity.


In these expressions the magnitudes of the P2 m and Q2 m series follow from the boundary
conditions as will be explained further on.
Another requirement is a diverging wave train for goes to infinity. It is therefore necessary
to add a stream function, satisfying the equation of Laplace, the non-symmetrical motion and
the free surface condition, representing such a train of waves at infinity. For this, a function
describing a two-dimensional horizontal doublet at the origin O is chosen.
Tasai [1961] and de Jong [1973] gave the velocity potential of the progressive wave system
as:
g a
B =
{Bc ( x, y ) cos( t ) + Bs ( x, y ) sin ( t )}

in which:

78

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Bc j = e y sin ( x )
cos(k y ) + k sin (k y ) k x
e
dk
2
2
k
+

Bs j = + e y cos( x )
+
while:

x
x + y2

j = +1 for: x > 0
j = 1 for: x < 0
=

2
g

(wave number for deep water)


Equation 3.255

Changing the parameters provides:


g a
B =
{Bc (, ) cos( t ) + Bs (, ) sin ( t )}

Equation 3.256
The conjugate stream function is given by:
g a
B =
{Bc ( x, y ) cos( t ) + Bs ( x, y ) sin ( t )}

in which:
Bc = + e y cos ( x )
Bs = + e

sin ( x ) +

y
x + y2

sin (k y ) k cos(k y ) k x
e
dk
k 2 + 2
0

)
Equation 3.257

Changing the parameters provides:


g a
B =
{Bc (, ) cos( t ) + Bs (, ) sin ( t )}

Equation 3.258
When calculating the integrals in the expressions for Bs and Bc numerically, the
convergence is very slowly.
Power series expansions, as given by Porter [1960], can be used instead of these last integrals
over k :

cos(k y ) + k sin (k y ) k x
e dk = {Q sin ( x ) ( S ) cos ( x )} e y
2
2
0
k +
sin (k y ) k cos (k y ) k x
e dk = {Q cos ( x ) + (S ) sin ( x )} e y
2
2
k
+

0
in which:

79

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Q = + ln x 2 + y 2 + { pn cos(n )}
n =1

S = + { pn sin (n )}
n =1

x
= arctan
y

(
=

x2 + y2
pn
n n!
= 0.57722..... (Euler constant)
Equation 3.259
The summations in these expansions converge much faster than the numeric integration
procedure. A suitable maximum value for n should be chosen, n = 1,...N .
The total velocity potential and stream function to describe the waves generated by a swaying
cylinder are:
= A + B
= A + B
Equation 3.260
So the velocity potential and the conjugate stream function are expressed by:

+ Bc (, ) + {P2 m A 2 m (, )} cos ( t )
g a

m =1

(, ) =

{Q2 m A 2m (, )} sin ( t )
+ Bs (, ) +
m
=
1

+ Bc (, ) + {P2 m A 2 m (, )} cos ( t )
g a

m =1

(, ) =

{Q2 m A2m (, )} sin ( t )


+ Bs (, ) +
m =1

Equation 3.261
When putting = 0 , the stream function is equal to the expression found before in Equation
3.252 from the boundary condition on the surface of the cylinder:

+ B 0 c ( ) + {P2 m A 02 m ( )} cos ( t )

g a
m =1

0 ( ) =

+ B 0 s ( ) + {Q2 m A 02 m ( )} sin ( t )
m =1

b
= x& 0 g ( ) + C (t )
2
80

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

in which:
A 02 m ( ) = cos((2m + 1) )
+

b N
2n 1
n

( 1)
a2 n 1 cos ((2 m + 2n ) )
a n = 0
2 m + 2n

Equation 3.262

In this expression, B 0 c ( ) and B 0 s ( ) are the values of Bc (, ) and Bs (, ) at the


surface of the cylinder, so for = 0 .
So for each , the following equation has been obtained from Equation 3.262:

+ B 0 c ( ) + {P2 m A 02 m ( )} cos ( t )

m =1

b0
*

= x& 2 g g ( ) + C (t )

a
+ B 0 s ( ) + {Q2 m A 02 m ( )} sin ( t )

m =1

Equation 3.263
When putting = 2 , so at the intersection of the surface of the cylinder with the free
surface of the fluid where g ( ) = 0 , we obtain the constant C * (t ) :

+ B 0 c ( 2 ) + {P2 m A 02 m ( 2 )} cos ( t )

m =1

C * (t ) =

+ B 0 s ( 2 ) + {Q2 m A 02 m ( 2 )} sin ( t )

m =1

in which:
N

m
2n 1

A 02 m ( 2 ) = b ( 1)
a2 n 1
a

n = 0 2m + 2 n

Equation 3.264
A substitution of C * (t ) in the equation for each -value, results for each -value less than
2 into the following equation:

+ B 0 c ( ) B 0 c ( 2 ) + {P2 m (A 02 m ( ) A 02 m ( 2 ))} cos ( t )


m =1

+ ( ) ( 2) + {Q (

B 0s

2m
A 02 m ( ) A 02 m ( 2))} sin ( t )
B0s
m
=
1

b0
x&
g ( )
2 g a

Equation 3.265
The right hand side of this equation can be written as:
x

b0
x&
g ( ) = g ( ) a b sin ( t + )
2 g a
a

= g ( ) {P0 cos ( t ) + Q0 sin ( t )}

in which:
81

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
P0 =

xa
b sin
a

Q0 =

and

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003
xa
b cos
a
Equation 3.266

This provides for each -value less than 2 a set of two equations with the unknown
parameters P2 m and Q2 m :

B 0 c ( ) B 0 c ( 2) = g ( ) P0 + { f 2 m ( ) P2 m }
m =1

B 0 s ( ) B 0 s ( 2) = g ( ) Q0 + { f 2 m ( ) Q2 m }
m =1

in which:
f 2 m ( ) = A 02 m ( ) + A 02 m ( 2)
Equation 3.267
These equations can also be written as:

B 0 c ( ) B 0 c ( 2) = { f 2 m ( ) P2 m }
m =0

B 0 s ( ) B 0 s ( 2) =
in which:
for m = 0 :
for m > 0 :

{ f ( ) Q }

m =0

2m

2m

f 0 ( ) = g ( )
f 2 m ( ) = A 02 m ( ) + A 02 m ( 2)
Equation 3.268

The series in these two sets of equations converges uniformly with an increasing value of m .
For practical reasons the maximum value of m is limited to M , for instance M = 10 .
Each -value less than 2 will provide an equation for the P2 m and Q2 m series. For a lot of
-values, the best fit values of P2 m and Q2 m are supposed to be those found by means of a
least squares method. Notice that at least M + 1 values of , less than 2 , are required to
solve these equations.
Another favourable method is to multiply both sides of the equations with . Then the
summation over can be replaced by integration.
Herewith, two sets of M + 1 equations have been obtained, one set for P2 m and one set for
Q2m :
2

2
P

f
(

f
(

2m 2 m
= (B 0 c ( ) B 0 c ( 2 )) f 2 n ( ) d

2n
0
m= 0
0

for: n = 0,...M
2
M
2

Q2 m f 2 m ( ) f 2 n ( ) d = (B 0 s ( ) B 0 s ( 2)) f 2 n ( ) d

0
m= 0
0

Equation 3.269
82

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Now the P2 m and Q2 m series can be solved by a numerical method and with these values, the
coefficients P0 and Q0 are known now and from the definition of these coefficients in
Equation 3.266 follows the amplitude ratio of the radiated waves and the forced sway
oscillation:
a
b
=
xa
P0 2 + Q0 2
Equation 3.270
With the solved P2 m and Q2 m values, the velocity potential on the surface of the cylinder
( = 0 ) is known too:
M

+ B 0 c ( ) + {P2 m A 02 m ( )} cos( t )
g a

m =1

0 ( ) =

{Q2m A02m ( )} sin ( t )


+ B 0 s ( ) +
m =1

in which:
A 02 m ( ) = + sin ((2m + 1) )

b N
2n 1
n

( 1)
a
sin ((2m + 2 n) )
a n = 0
2m + 2 n 2 n 1

Equation 3.271

In this expression, B0 c ( ) and B0 s ( ) are the values of Bc (, ) and Bs (, ) at the


surface of the cylinder, so for = 0 .
3.2.2.1 Pressure Distribution During Sway Motions
Now the hydrodynamic pressure on the surface of the cylinder can be obtained from the
linearised equation of Bernoulli:
0 ( )
p ( ) =
t

+ B 0 s ( ) + {Q2 m A 02 m ( )} cos ( t )
g a

m =1

B 0 c ( ) + {P2 m A 02 m ( )} sin ( t )

m =1

Equation 3.272
It is obvious that this pressure is skew-symmetric in .
3.2.2.2 Sway Coefficients

83

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

The two-dimensional hydrodynamic horizontal force, acting on the cylinder in the direction of
the x -axis, can be found by integrating the horizontal component of the hydrodynamic
pressure on the surface S of the cylinder:
+ 2

{ p (+ ) p( )}

Fx =
'

=2

dy0
ds
ds

dy0

p( ) d d
0

Equation 3.273
With this the two-dimensional hydrodynamic horizontal force due to sway oscillations can be
written as follows:
g b0 a
Fx ' =
( M 0 cos ( t ) N 0 sin ( t ))

in which:
1
M0 =

n =0

B 0s () ( 1) (2n 1) a 2n1 sin ((2 n 1) ) d


n

N 1
( 1)m Q2 m (2m + 1) a2 m +1
4 a m =1

N N
(2n 1) (2i 1)

b M
m
(

1
)

a2 n 1 a2 i 1

2 m
2
2
2
a m =1
n =0 i = 0 (2m + 2i ) (2 n 1)

and N 0 as obtained from this expression above for M 0 , by replacing there B0 s ( ) by


B0 c ( ) and Q2 m by P2 m .
Equation 3.274
For the determination of M 0 and N 0 , it is required that M N .
With Equation 3.274 in some other format:
g b0 a
Fx ' =
(M 0 cos( t + ) N0 sin ( t + ))

a
sin =
P0
xa b
a
cos =
Q
xa b 0
Equation 3.275
the two-dimensional hydrodynamic horizontal force can be resolved into components in phase
and out phase with the horizontal displacement of the cylinder:
2
g b0 a
'
Fx =

2 b x a

{(M 0 Q0 + N 0 P0 ) cos ( t + ) + (M 0 P0 N 0 Q0 ) sin ( t + )}

Equation 3.276

84

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

This hydrodynamic vertical force can also be written as:


Fx ' = M 22 ' &x& N22 ' x&
= M 22 ' 2 xa cos ( t + ) + N22 ' xa sin ( t + )
Equation 3.277
in which:
M 22 '

2-D hydrodynamic mass coefficient of sway

N 22' 2-D hydrodynamic damping coefficient of sway


When using also the amplitude ratio of the radiated waves and the forced sway oscillation,
found before in Equation 3.270, the two-dimensional hydrodynamic mass and damping
coefficients of sway are given by:
b0 2 M 0 Q0 + N 0 P0
M 22 ' =

2
P0 2 + Q0 2
N 22

b0 2 M 0 P0 N 0 Q0
=

2
P0 2 + Q0 2

'

Equation 3.278
The signs of these two coefficients are proper in both, the axes system of Tasai and the ship
motions O( x, y, z ) co-ordinate system.
The energy delivered by the exciting forces should be equal to the energy radiated by the
waves, so:
1

Tosc

Tosc

(N
0

'
22

g a c
x& (x& dt ) =
2
2

Equation 3.279
in which Tosc is the period of oscillation.
With the relation for the wave speed c = g at deep water, follows the relation between the
two-dimensional heave damping coefficient and the amplitude ratio of the radiated waves and
the forced sway oscillation:
N 22

'

g 2 a
=

3 xa

Equation 3.280
With this amplitude ratio the two-dimensional hydrodynamic damping coefficient of heave is
also given by:
2 b0 2
1
N 22 ' =
2

4
P0 + Q0 2
Equation 3.281
When comparing this expression for N 22' with the expression found before, the following
energy balance relation is found:

85

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

M 0 P0 N 0 Q0 =

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

2
2
Equation 3.282

3.2.2.3 Coupling of Sway into Roll


In the case of a sway oscillation generally a roll moment is produced. The hydrodynamic
pressure is skew-symmetric in .
The two-dimensional hydrodynamic moment acting on the cylinder in the clockwise direction
can be found by integrating the roll component of the hydrodynamic pressure on the surface
S of the cylinder:
+ 2

MR =
'

{ p(+ ) p( )} x

= 2

p () x

+ dx0
dy0
+ y0
ds
ds
ds

dx0
dy
+ y0 0 d
d
d
Equation 3.283

With this the two-dimensional hydrodynamic roll moment due to sway oscillations can be
written as follows:
g b0 2 a
MR' =
(YR cos( t ) X R sin ( t ))

in which:
2
N N
1
YR =

( 1)n +i (2i 1) a2 n1 a2i 1 sin ((2n 2i ) ) d


B 0s

2 a 0
n =0 i =0

M
N
N
1
(2i 1) (2 n 2i) a a

1
)

2
m

2 n 1
2 i 1
2
2
2 a 2 m =1
n = 0 i = 0 (2m + 1) (2 n 2i )

( 1) m Q2 m

N
n m

2
m
+
2
n

2
i

1
)

(
2
i

1
)

b N +
a 2 n 1 a 2 i 1 a 2 m +2 n 2 i 1
+
2n 2i
n = m i =0

8 a 3 m =1 N m N


+ ( 2m 2n + 2i 1) (2i 1) a
2 n 1 a 2 i 1 a 2 m 2 n + 2 i 1
n =0 i = m + n
2n 2i

and X R as obtained from this expression above for YR , by replacing there B0 s ( ) by


B0 c ( ) and Q2 m by P2 m .
Equation 3.284
With Equation 3.284 in some other format:

86

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

g b0 2 a
(YR cos( t + ) X R sin ( t + ))

a
sin =
P0
xa b
a
cos =
Q
xa b 0
M R' =

Equation 3.285
the two-dimensional hydrodynamic roll moment can be resolved into components in phase
and out phase with the lateral displacement of the cylinder:
g b0 2 a 2
MR' =

2 b xa
((YR Q0 + X R P0 ) cos( t + ) + (YR P0 X R Q0 ) sin ( t + ))
Equation 3.286
This hydrodynamic roll moment can also be written as:
'
'
'
M R = M 42 &x& N 42 x&
= M 42 2 xa cos( t + ) + N42 xa sin ( t + )
'

'

Equation 3.287
in which:
M 42 '
N

'
42

2-D hydrodynamic mass coupling coefficient of sway into roll


2-D hydrodynamic damping coupling coefficient of sway into roll

When using also the amplitude ratio of the radiated waves and the forced sway oscillation,
found before, the two-dimensional hydrodynamic mass and damping coupling coefficients of
sway into roll in Tasai's axes system are given by:
b0 3 YR Q0 + X R P0
'
M 42 =

2
P0 2 + Q0 2
N 42 ' =

b0 3 YR P0 X R Q0

2
P0 2 + Q0 2
Equation 3.288

In the ship motions O( x, y , z ) co-ordinate system these two coupling coefficients will change
sign.

87

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

3.2.3 Roll Motions


The determination of the hydrodynamic coefficients of a rolling cross section of a ship in deep
and still water at zero forward speed, is based here on work published by Tasai [1961] for the
Lewis method. Starting points for the derivation these coefficients here are the velocity
potentials and the conjugate stream functions of the fluid as they have been derived by Tasai
and also by de Jong [1973].
Suppose an infinite long cylinder in the surface of a fluid, of which a cross section is given in
Figure 3.21. The cylinder is forced to carry out a simple harmonic roll motion about the
origin O with a frequency of oscillation and small amplitude of displacement a :
= a cos( t + )
Equation 3.289
in which is a phase angle.
Respectively, the angular velocity and acceleration of the cylinder are:
&& = 2 a cos( t + )
& = a sin ( t + )
and

Equation 3.290
This forced angular oscillation of the cylinder causes a surface disturbance of the fluid.
Because the cylinder is supposed to be infinitely long, the generated waves will be twodimensional. These waves travel away from the cylinder and a stationary state is rapidly
attained.
Two kinds of waves will be produced:
A standing wave system, denoted here by subscript A .
The amplitudes of these waves decrease strongly with the distance to the cylinder.
A regular progressive wave system, denoted here by subscript B .
These waves dissipate energy. At a distance of a few wavelengths from the cylinder, the
waves on each side can be described by a single regular wave train. The wave amplitude at
infinity a is proportional to the amplitude of oscillation of the cylinder a , provided that
this amplitude is sufficiently small compared with the radius of the cylinder and the wave
length is not much smaller than the diameter of the cylinder.
The two-dimensional velocity potential of the fluid has to fulfil the following requirements:
1. The velocity potential must satisfy to the equation of Laplace:
2 2
2 =
+ 2 =0
x 2
y
Equation 3.291
2. Because the sway motion of the fluid is not symmetrical about the y -axis, this velocity
potential has the following anti-symmetric relation:
( x, y ) = (+ x, y )
Equation 3.292
3. The linearised free surface condition in deep water is expressed as follows:

88

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
2

+
=0
g
y

for: x

Bs
2

and

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

y=0
Equation 3.293

In consequence of the conformal mapping, this free surface condition can be written as:
N
b

(2n 1) a2 n 1 e ( 2 n 1 )
=0
for: 0 and =
a

2
n= 0
in which:
b 2
2 b0
=
M s
or
b =
(non-dimensional frequency squared)
a
g
2 g

Equation 3.294
From the definition of the velocity potential follows the boundary condition on the surface of
the cylinder S for = 0 :
0 ( )
r
= r0 & 0
n
s
Equation 3.295
in which n is the outward normal of the cylinder surface S and r0 is the radius from the
origin to the surface of the cylinder.
Using the stream function , this boundary condition on the surface of the cylinder ( = 0 )
reduces to:
2
2
0 ( ) & x0 + y 0
=

s
s
2

Equation 3.296
Integration results into the following requirement for the stream function on the surface of the
cylinder:
&
0 ( ) = x0 2 + y0 2 + C(t )
2

Equation 3.297
in which C (t ) is a function of time only.
The vertical oscillation at the intersection of the surface of the cylinder and the waterline is
defined by:
b
= 0 = a sin ( t + )
2
Equation 3.298
When defining:

89

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
( ) =

x0 + y 0
(b0 2 )2
2

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

1 N

n
=
( 1) a2 n 1 sin ((2 n 1) )
a n = 0

1 N

n
+ +
( 1) a2 n 1 cos ((2n 1) )
a n = 0

Equation 3.299
the stream function on the surface of the cylinder is given by:
b
0 ( ) = & 0 ( ) + C(t )
4
Equation 3.2100
For the standing wave system a velocity potential and a stream function satisfying to the
equation of Laplace, the non-symmetrical motion of the fluid and the free surface condition
has to be found.
The following set of velocity potentials, as they are given by Tasai [1961] and de Jong [1973],
fulfil these requirements:

g a

A =
{P2 m A 2 m (, ) cos( t )} + {Q2 m A 2 m (, ) sin ( t )}
m =1
m =1

in which:
A 2 m (, ) = + e ( 2 m +1) sin ((2m + 1) )

b N
2n 1
n

( 1)
a2 n 1 e (2 m + 2 n ) sin ((2m + 2n ) )
a n = 0
2 m + 2n

Equation 3.2101

The set of conjugate stream functions is expressed as:

g a

A =
{P2 m A 2 m (, ) cos( t )} + {Q2 m A 2 m (, ) sin ( t )}
m =1
m =1

in which:
A 2 m (, ) = e ( 2 m +1) cos ((2 m + 1) )
+

b N
2n 1

( 1)n
a2 n 1 e (2 m + 2 n ) cos((2m + 2n ) )
a n = 0
2m + 2 n

Equation 3.2102

These sets of functions tend to zero as tends to infinity.


In these expressions the magnitudes of the P2 m and the Q2 m series follow from the boundary
conditions as will be explained further on.
Another requirement is a diverging wave train for goes to infinity. It is therefore necessary
to add a stream function, satisfying the equation of Laplace, the non-symmetrical motion and
90

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

the free surface condition, representing such a train of waves at infinity. For this, a function
describing a two-dimensional horizontal doublet at the origin O is chosen.
Tasai [1961] and de Jong [1973] gave the velocity potential of the progressive wave system
as:
g a
B =
{Bc ( x, y ) cos( t ) + Bs ( x, y ) sin ( t )}

in which:
Bc j = e y sin ( x )
cos(k y ) + k sin (k y ) k x
e
dk
k 2 + 2
0

Bs j = + e y cos( x )
+
while:

x
x + y2

j = +1 for: x > 0
j = 1 for: x < 0
=

2
g

(wave number for deep water)


Equation 3.2103

Changing the parameters provides:


g a
B =
{Bc (, ) cos( t ) + Bs (, ) sin ( t )}

Equation 3.2104
The conjugate stream function is given by:
g a
B =
{Bc ( x, y ) cos( t ) + Bs (x , y ) sin ( t )}

in which:
Bc = + e y cos ( x )
Bs = + e

sin ( x ) +

y
x + y2

sin (k y ) k cos(k y ) k x
e
dk
k 2 + 2
0

)
Equation 3.2105

Changing the parameters provides:


g a
B =
{Bc (, ) cos( t ) + Bs (, ) sin ( t )}

Equation 3.2106
When calculating the integrals in the expressions for Bs and Bc numerically, the
convergence is very slowly.

91

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Power series expansions, as given by Porter [1960], can be used instead of these last integrals
over k . Summations in these expansions converge much faster than the numeric integration
procedure. This has been showed for the sway case.
The total velocity potential and stream function to describe the waves generated by a swaying
cylinder are:
= A + B
= A + B
Equation 3.2107
So the velocity potential and the conjugate stream function are expressed by:

+ Bc (, ) + {P2 m A 2 m (, )} cos ( t )
g a

m =1

(, ) =

{Q2 m A 2m (, )} sin ( t )
+ Bs (, ) +
m =1

+ Bc (, ) + {P2 m A 2 m (, )} cos ( t )
g a

m =1

(, ) =

{Q2 m A2m (, )} sin ( t )


+ Bs (, ) +
m =1

Equation 3.2108
When putting = 0 , the stream function is equal to the expression found before in Equation
3.2100 from the boundary condition on the surface of the cylinder:

+ B 0 c ( ) + {P2 m A 02 m ( )} cos( t )

g a
m =1

0 ( ) =

(
)
{
(
)
}
(
)
+

+
Q

sin

B 0s
2m
A 02 m

m =1

b
= & 0 ( ) + C(t )
4
in which:
A 02 m ( ) = cos((2m + 1) )
b N
2n 1
n

+
( 1)
a2 n 1 cos ((2 m + 2n ) )
a n = 0
2 m + 2n

Equation 3.2109
In this expression, B 0 c ( ) and B 0 s ( ) are the values of Bc (, ) and Bs (, ) at the
surface of the cylinder, so for = 0 .
So for each , the following equation has been obtained:

92

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

+ B 0 c ( ) + {P2 m A 02 m ( )} cos ( t )

m =1

b0
= &
( ) + C* (t )

a
+ B 0 s ( ) + {Q2 m A 02 m ( )} sin ( t )

m =1

Equation 3.2110
When putting = 2 , so at the intersection of the surface of the cylinder with the free
surface of the fluid where ( ) = 1 , we obtain the constant C * (t ) :

C * (t ) = B 0 c ( 2 ) + {P2 m A 02 m ( 2 )} cos( t )

m =1

+ B 0 s ( 2) + {Q2 m A 02 m ( 2 )} sin ( t )

m =1

b0
+ &
4 g a
in which:
N

m
2n 1

A 02 m ( 2 ) = b ( 1)
a2 n 1
a

n = 0 2m + 2 n

Equation 3.2111
A substitution of C * (t ) in the equation for each -value, results for any -value less than
2 into the following equation:

+ B 0 c ( ) B 0 c ( 2) + {P2 m (A 02 m ( ) A 02 m ( 2 ))} cos ( t )


m =1

+ ( ) ( 2 ) + {Q (
( )
( ))} sin ( t )
B 0s
B 0S
2m
A 02 m A 02 m 2

m
=
1

b0
&
{( ) 1}
4 g a

Equation 3.2112
The right hand side of this equation can be written as:
a

b0
&
{( ) 1} = {( ) 1}
b sin ( t + )
4 g a
2 a

= {( ) 1} {P0 cos( t ) + Q0 sin ( t )}

in which:
P0 =

a
sin ( )
2 a b

and

Q0 =

a
cos( )
2 a b
Equation 3.2113

This provides for each -value less than 2 a set of two equations with the unknown
parameters P2 m and Q2 m :
93

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

B 0 c ( ) B 0 c ( 2) = {( ) 1} P0 + { f 2 m ( ) P2 m }
m =1

B 0 s ( ) B 0 s ( 2) = {( ) 1} Q0 + { f 2 m ( ) Q2 m }
m =1

in which:
f 2 m ( ) = A 02 m ( ) + A 02 m ( 2)
Equation 3.2114
These equations can also be written as:

B 0 c ( ) B 0 c ( 2) = { f 2 m ( ) P2 m }
m =0

B 0 s ( ) B 0 s ( 2) =
in which:
for m = 0 :
for m > 0 :

{ f ( ) Q }

m =0

2m

2m

f 0 ( ) = ( ) 1
f 2 m ( ) = A 02 m ( ) + A 02 m ( 2)
Equation 3.2115

The series in these two sets of equations converges uniformly with an increasing value of m .
For practical reasons the maximum value of m is limited to M , for instance M = 10 .
Each -value less than 2 will provide an equation for the P2 m and Q2 m series. For a lot of
-values, the best fit values of P2 m and Q2 m are supposed to be those found by means of a
least squares method. Note that at least M + 1 values of , less than 2 , are required to
solve these equations.
Another favourable method is to multiply both sides of the equations with . Then the
summation over can be replaced by integration. Herewith, two sets of M + 1 equations
have been obtained, one set for P2 m and one set for Q2 m :
2

2
P2 m f 2 m ( ) f 2 n ( ) d = (B 0 c ( ) B 0 c ( 2 )) f 2 n ( ) d

0
m= 0
0

2
M
2

Q2 m f 2 m ( ) f 2 n ( ) d = (B 0 s ( ) B 0 s ( 2)) f 2 n ( ) d

0
m= 0
0

for: n = 0,...M
M

Equation 3.2116
Now the P2 m and Q2 m series can be solved by a numerical method and with these values, the
coefficients P0 and Q0 are known now and from the definition of these coefficients follows
the amplitude ratio of the radiated waves and the forced sway oscillation:
a
b
=
a 2 P0 2 + Q0 2
Equation 3.2117
94

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

With the solved P2 m and Q2 m values, the velocity potential on the surface of the cylinder
( = 0 ) is known too:
M

+ B 0 c ( ) + {P2 m A 02 m ( )} cos( t )
g a

m =1

0 ( ) =

{Q2m A02m ( )} sin ( t )


+ B 0 s ( ) +
m =1

in which:
A 02 m ( ) = + sin ((2m + 1) )

b N
2n 1
n

( 1)
a2 n 1 sin ((2m + 2 n) )
a n = 0
2m + 2 n

Equation 3.2118

In this expression B0 c ( ) and B0 s ( ) are the values of Bc (, ) and Bs (, ) at the surface


of the cylinder, so for = 0 .
3.2.3.1 Pressure Distribution During Roll Motions
Now the hydrodynamic pressure on the surface of the cylinder can be obtained from the
linearised equation of Bernoulli:
0 ( )
p ( ) =
t

+ B 0 s ( ) + {Q2 m A 02 m ( )} cos ( t )
g a

m =1

B 0 c ( ) + {P2 m A 02 m ( )} sin ( t )

m =1

Equation 3.2119
It is obvious that this pressure is skew-symmetric in .
3.2.3.2 Roll Coefficients
The two-dimensional hydrodynamic moment acting on the cylinder in the clockwise direction
can be found by integrating the roll component of the hydrodynamic pressure on the surface
S of the cylinder:
+ 2

MR =
'

{ p(+ ) p( )} x

= 2

p () x

+ dx0
dy0
+ y0
ds
ds
ds

dx0
dy
+ y0 0 d
d
d
Equation 3.2120

With this the two-dimensional hydrodynamic moment due to roll oscillations can be written as
follows:
95

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

MR' =

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

g b0 2 a
(YR cos( t ) X R sin ( t ))

in which:
1

2 a 2

YR =
+

n +i
B 0s ( ) ( 1) (2i 1) a 2n1 a2i 1 sin ((2n 2i ) ) d
0

n =0 i =0

M
N
N

1
(2i 1) (2 n 2i) a a
m

1
)

2 m
2 n 1
2 i 1
2
2
2
2 a m =1
n = 0 i = 0 (2m + 1) (2 n 2i )

( 1)m Q2 m

N n m
(
2m + 2 n 2i 1) (2i 1)

M
b
a 2 n 1 a 2 i 1 a 2 m +2 n 2 i 1
+

2n 2i

3
n = m i =0
8 a m =1 N m N

+ ( 2m 2n + 2i 1) (2i 1) a 2 n 1 a 2 i 1 a 2 m 2 n + 2 i 1

n =0 i = m + n
2n 2i

and X R as obtained from this expression above for YR , by replacing there B0 s ( ) by
B0 c ( ) and Q2 m by P2 m .
Equation 3.2121
These expressions are similar to those found before for the hydrodynamic roll moment due to
sway oscillations.
With Equation 3.2121 in some other format:
g b0 2 a
'
MR =
(YR cos ( t + ) X R sin ( t + ))

2 a
sin =
P0
xa b
2 a
cos =
Q
xa b 0
Equation 3.2122
the two-dimensional hydrodynamic roll moment can be resolved into components in phase
and out phase with the angular displacement of the cylinder:
2
2
2 g b0 a
M R' =

2 b a

{(YR Q0 + X R P0 ) cos( t + ) + (YR P0 X R Q0 ) sin ( t + )}


Equation 3.2123
This hydrodynamic roll moment can also be written as:
'
' &&
'
M R = M 44
N 44 &

= M 44 ' 2 a cos( t + ) + N 44 ' a sin ( t + )


Equation 3.2124

in which:
96

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

M 44 '

2-D hydrodynamic mass moment of inertia coefficient of roll

2-D hydrodynamic damping coefficient of roll

'
44

When using also the amplitude ratio of the radiated waves and the forced roll oscillation,
found before, the two-dimensional hydrodynamic mass and damping coefficients of roll in
Tasai's axes system are given by:
+ b0 4 YR Q0 + X R P0
M 44 ' =

8
P0 2 + Q0 2
N 44

+ b0 4 YR P0 X R Q0
=

8
P0 2 + Q0 2

'

Equation 3.2125
The signs of these two coefficients are proper in both, the axes system of Tasai and the ship
motions O( x, y , z ) co-ordinate system.
The energy delivered by the exciting moments should be equal to the energy radiated by the
waves, so:
1

Tosc

Tosc

(N
0

'
44

)(

g a c
& & dt =
2
2

Equation 3.2126
in which Tosc is the period of oscillation.
With the relation for the wave speed c = g in deep water, follows the relation between the
two-dimensional heave damping coefficient and the amplitude ratio of the radiated waves and
the forced sway oscillation:
N 44

'

g2
=
3

a
a

Equation 3.2127
With this amplitude ratio the two-dimensional hydrodynamic damping coefficient of heave is
also given by:
2 b0 4
1
N 44 ' =
2

64
P0 + Q0 2
Equation 3.2128
When comparing this expression for N 44' with the expression found before, the following
energy balance relation is found:
2
YR P0 X R Q0 =
8
Equation 3.2129

97

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

3.2.3.3 Coupling of Roll into Sway


In the case of a roll oscillation generally a sway force produced too. The hydrodynamic
pressure is skew-symmetric in .
The two-dimensional hydrodynamic lateral force, acting on the cylinder in the direction of the
x -axis, can be found by integrating the horizontal component of the hydrodynamic pressure
on the surface S of the cylinder:
+ 2

{ p (+ ) p( )}

Fx =
'

=2

dy0
ds
ds

dy0

p( ) d d
0

Equation 3.2130
With this the two-dimensional hydrodynamic horizontal force due to sway oscillations can be
written as follows:
g b0 a
Fx ' =
( M 0 cos ( t ) N 0 sin ( t ))

in which:
2
N
1
n
M0 =
B 0 s ( ) ( 1) (2n 1) a 2 n 1 sin ((2 n 1) ) d
a 0
n =0

N 1
( 1)m Q2 m (2m + 1) a2 m +1
4 a m =1

N N
(2n 1) (2i 1)

b M
m
(

1
)

2
m

2
n

1
2
i

1
2
2
a 2 m =1
n =0 i = 0 (2m + 2i ) (2 n 1)

and N 0 as obtained from this expression above for M 0 , by replacing there B0 s ( ) by


B0 c ( ) and Q2 m by P2 m .
Equation 3.2131
For the determination of M 0 and N 0 , it is required that M N .
With Equation 3.2131 in some other format:
g b0 a
Fx ' =
(M 0 cos( t + ) N 0 sin ( t + ))

2 a
sin =
P0
xa b
2 a
cos =
Q
xa b 0
Equation 3.2132
the two-dimensional hydrodynamic horizontal force can be resolved into components in phase
and out phase with the horizontal displacement of the cylinder:

98

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

2 g b0 a 2

2 b a
(( M 0 Q0 + N 0 P0 ) cos ( t + ) + (M 0 P0 N 0 Q0 ) sin ( t + ))

Fx ' =

Equation 3.2133
This hydrodynamic vertical force can also be written as:
&& N24 ' &
Fx ' = M 24 '
= M 24' 2 a cos ( t + ) + N 24 ' a sin ( t + )
Equation 3.2134
in which:
M 24 '
N 24'

2-D hydrodynamic mass coupling coefficient of roll into sway


2-D hydrodynamic damping coupling coefficient of roll into sway

When using also the amplitude ratio of the radiated waves and the forced sway oscillation,
found before, the two-dimensional hydrodynamic mass and damping coupling coefficients of
roll into sway are given by:
b0 3 M 0 Q0 + N 0 P0
M 24 ' =

8
P0 2 + Q0 2
N 24 ' =

b0 3 M 0 P0 N 0 Q0

8
P0 2 + Q0 2
Equation 3.2135

In the ship motions O( x, y, z ) co-ordinate system these two coupling coefficients will change
sign.

99

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

3.2.4 Low and High Frequencies


The potential coefficients for very small and very large frequencies in the ship motions
O( x, y, z ) co-ordinate system have been given in the following subsections.
3.2.4.1 Near-Zero Frequency Coefficients
The 2-D hydrodynamic mass coefficient for sway of a Lewis cross section is given by Tasai
[1961] as:
2

M 22

'

Ds

(1 a1 )2 + 3 a3 2
( 0 ) =
2 1 a1 + a3

}
Equation 3.2136

The 2-D hydrodynamic mass coupling coefficient of sway into roll of a Lewis cross section is
given by Grim [1955] as:
16
Ds
M 42 ' ( 0) = M 22 ' ( 0)

3 1 a1 + a3
4
3
4
12
a1 1 a1 + a3 a1 a3 + a3 2 + a3 a3 2
5
5
7

5
2
2
(1 a1 ) + 3 a3
Equation 3.2137
In Tasai's axes system, M 42 ' will change sign.
The 2-D hydrodynamic mass coefficient of heave of a Lewis cross section goes to infinite, so:
'
M 33 ( 0) =
Equation 3.2138
The 2-D hydrodynamic mass moment of inertia coefficient of roll of a Lewis cross section is
given by Grim [1955] as:
4

16
Bs

M 44 ( 0 ) =

2 (1 + a1 + a3 )
'

8
16 2
2
2
a1 (1 + a3 ) + a1 a3 (1 + a3 ) + a3
9
9

Equation 3.2139
The 2-D hydrodynamic mass coupling coefficient of roll into sway of a Lewis cross section is
given by Grim [1955] as:

100

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
M 24 ' ( 0) = M 44 ' ( 0 )

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

1 a1 + a3

6
Ds

3
4
12 2
a1 (1 a1 ) (1 + a3 ) + a1 a3 (1 + a3 ) + a3 (1 a1 ) a3
5
5
7
8
16 2
2
2
a1 (1 + a3 ) + a1 a3 (1 + a3 ) + a3
9
9
Equation 3.2140
In Tasai's axes system, M 24 ' will change sign.
All potential damping values for zero frequency will be zero:
'
'
N 22 ( 0 ) = 0
N 44 ( 0 ) = 0
'
N33 ( 0) = 0
N 42 ' ( 0 ) = 0
N 24 ' ( 0 ) = 0
Equation 3.2141

3.2.4.2 Infinite Frequency Coefficients


The 2-D hydrodynamic mass coefficient of sway of a Lewis cross section is given by
Landweber and de Macagno [1957, 1959] as:
2


2
Ds
16
(1 a1 + a3 )2 + a3 2
M 22 ( ) =

1 a1 + a3
3

'

Equation 3.2142
The 2-D hydrodynamic mass coefficient of heave of a Lewis cross section is given by Tasai
[1959] as:
2


Bs
(1 + a1 )2 + 3 a3 2
M 33 ( ) =

2 2 (1 + a1 + a3 )
'

)
Equation 3.2143

The 2-D hydrodynamic mass moment of inertia coefficient of roll of a Lewis cross section is
given by Kumai [1959] as:
4

Bs
a12 (1 + a3 )2 + 2 a3 2
M 44 ( ) =
2 (1 + a1 + a3 )
'

)
Equation 3.2144

Information about the 2-D hydrodynamic mass coupling coefficients between sway and roll
of a Lewis cross section could not be found in literature, so:
'
M 42 ( ) = ?
M 24 ' ( ) = ?

Equation 3.2145
101

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

All potential damping values for infinite frequency will be zero:


'
'
N 22 ( ) = 0
N 44 ( ) = 0
'
N33 ( ) = 0
N 42 ' ( ) = 0
N 24 ' ( ) = 0
Equation 3.2146

102

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

3.3 Potential Theory of Keil


In this section, the determination of the hydrodynamic coefficients of a heaving, swaying and
rolling cross section of a ship in shallow at zero forward speed is based on work published by
Keil [1974]. His method is based on Lewis conformal mapping of the ships' cross sections to
the unit circle and the shallow water potential theory.
Journe [2001] has given a few comparisons of predicted and measured data on vertical
motions at various water depths. Recently, Vantorre and Journe [2003] have given more
extended comparisons of computed results by Keils theory with model test data on vertical
motions of a slender and a full ship, sailing at very shallow water.
For a significant part, the detailed description of the shallow water potential theory in this
Section is simply a translation of Keils original 1974 German report into the English
language. However, it has been supplemented with some numerical improvements and
outcomes of discussions with the author in the early eighties. The theory has been presented
here in a layout, more or less as used in the computer code SEAWAY.

3.3.1 Notations of Keil


Keils notations have been maintained here as far as possible:
a
Aindex

Lewis coefficient
source strength

Aindex
b
B
c
Cindex
Eindex
Findex
g
G
h
H
H indices
HT
I"
kx
ky

amplitude ratio
Lewis coefficient
breadth of body
wave velocity
non-dimensional force or moment
non-dimensional exciting force or moment
hydrodynamic force
acceleration of gravity
function (real part)
water depth
function (imaginary part)
fictive moment arm
water depth - draft ratio
hydrodynamic moment of inertia
wave number in x -direction
wave number in y -direction

m"
M indices
N indices
p

hydrodynamic mass
hydrodynamic moment
hydrodynamic damping coefficient
pressure

r = x 2 + y 2 polar coordinate
103

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
t
T
U
V
Ax
x, y, z
Yindices

time or integer value


draught
velocity amplitude of horizontal oscillation
velocity amplitude of vertical oscillation
cross sectional area
earth-bounded co-ordinates
transfer functions
Euler constant (= 0.57722)
phase shift
wave amplitude
polar co-ordinate or pitch amplitude
wavelength
wave direction

= 2 g
0 = 2

indices
indices
indices
indices

wave number at deep water


wave number
density of water
roll angle
time-dependent potential
part of potential
time-dependent stream function
part of stream function
circular frequency of oscillation

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

In here, the indices being used by Keil - are:


E
H
j
n
Q
r
R
V
W

related to excitation
horizontal or related to horizontal motions
imaginary part
numbering of potential parts
related to transverse motions
real part
related to roll motions
related to vertical or vertical motions
related to waves

3.3.2 Basic Assumptions


Figure 3.31 shows the co-ordinate system as used by Keil and maintained here.
The potentials of the incoming waves have been described in Appendix I of this Section.

104

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Figure 3.31: Keils axes system


The wave number, 0 = 2 , follows from:
=

2 2
2 h
=
tanh
= 0 tanh [0 h]
g


Equation 3.31

The fluid is supposed to be incompressible and inviscid. The flow caused by the oscillating
body in the surface of this fluid can be described by a potential flow. The problem will be
linearised, i.e., contributions of second and higher order in the definition of the boundary
conditions will be ignored. Physically, this yields an assumption of small amplitude motions.
The earth-bounded axes system of the sectional contour is given in Figure 3.32-a.

Figure 3.32: Definition of sectional contour


Velocities are positive if they are directed in the positive co-ordinate direction:

= vy
= vz
y
z
The value of the stream function increases when - going in the positive direction - the flow
goes in the negative y -direction:
1 < 2

=+

z
y

105

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

3 > 4

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003


z = y

s
n

s = + n

Equation 3.32

For the imaginary parts, the symbols i and j have been used: i for geometrical variables
(potential and stream function) and j for functions of time.

3.3.3 Vertical Motions


3.3.3.1 Boundary Conditions
The two-dimensional velocity potential of the fluid has to fulfil the following requirements:
1. The fluid is incompressible and the velocity potential must satisfy to the Continuity
Condition and the Equation of Laplace:
2 2
2 =
+ 2 =0
y 2
z
Equation 3.33
2. The linearised free surface condition follows from the condition that the pressure at the
free surface is not time-depending but constant:
2
p
B
= g
2 = 0
for: y
and z = 0
t
t
2
z
from which follows:
2

B
+
= 0 or +
=0
for: y
and z = 0
g
z
z
2
Equation 3.34
3. The seabed is impervious, so the vertical fluid velocity at z = h is zero:

=0
for: z = h
z
Equation 3.35
4. The harmonic oscillating cylinder produces a regular progressive wave system, travelling
away from the cylinder, which fulfils the Sommerfeld radiation condition:

lim y Re{} 0 Im {} = 0
y
y

Equation 3.36
In here, 0 = 2 is the wave number of the radiated wave.
106

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

5. The oscillating cylinder is impervious too; thus at the surface of the body is the fluid
velocity equal to the body velocity, see Figure 3.32-b. This yields that the boundary
conditions on the surface of the body are given by:

= vn body
n body
dy dz

z ds y ds

d
ds

body

body

Equation 3.37
Two cases have to be distinguished:
a) The hydromechanical loads, which have to be obtained for the vertically oscillating
cylinder in still water with a vertical velocity equal to:
V = V e j t
The boundary condition on the surface of the body becomes:
d
dy

=V
e j t
ds body
ds body
or:
( y, z , t ) body = V e j t y body + C
Equation 3.38
b) The wave loads, which have to be obtained for the restrained cylinder in regular waves
from the incoming undisturbed wave potential W and the diffraction potential S :
W S
+
n
n

=0
body

W dy W dz S dy S dz

z ds
y ds
z ds
y ds

=
=
or:

dS ( y , z , t )

body

dW dS
+
ds
ds

= dW ( y, z, t )
=

body

body

body

W
W
dy
dz
z
y

body

Equation 3.39
The stream function of an incoming wave - which travels in the negative y -direction, so
= +90 0 - is given in Appendix I of this Section by:
107

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

W = j

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

j ( t + 0 y )
e
{sinh [0 z ] tanh [ 0 h ] cosh [0 z ]}

Equation 3.310

Because only vertical forces have to be determined, only the in y -symmetric part of the
potential and stream functions have to be considered. From this follows the boundary
condition on the surface of the body for beam waves, so wave direction = +90 0 :
S ( y, z , t ) body = W ( y, z, t ) body
=

j t
e
sinh [0 z ] tanh [0 h ] cosh[0 z ] sinh [0 y ] body

Equation 3.311

In case of another wave direction, this problem becomes three-dimensional and a stream
function can not be written. However, boundary condition (Equation 3.311) provides us a
~
''quasi stream function'' s , i.e. this is the amount of fluid which has to come out of the body
per unit of length, so that - in total - no fluid of the incoming wave enters into the body.
This function can be used as an approximation of the problem:
~
s ( x1 , y1 , z1 , t )

y1

1
W

=
dy W dz
body
z
y
0
z0

body

j t
e
cos(0 x cos )

sin sin (0 y1 sin ) (sinh [0 z1 ] tanh [0 h] cosh [0 z1 ])

+ 1 sin 2

y1

cos ( y sin ) (sinh [ z ] tanh [ h] cosh [ z ]) dy


0
0
0
0
0

Equation 3.312

3.3.3.2 Potentials
3.3.3.2.1 3-D Radiation Potential

Suppose a three-dimensional oscillating cylindrical body in previously still water. To find the
potential of the resulting fluid motions, an oscillating pressure p at the free surface will
replace this body. The unknown amplitude p of this pressure has to follow from the boundary
conditions.
This pressure is not supposed to act over the full breadth of the body; it is supposed to act over the full length L of the body - only over a small distance y 2 on both sides of y = 0 ,
so:

108

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

p ( x, y , z = z0 , t ) = j p (x , y, z = z0 ) e j t
or :
p ( x, y , z = z0 ) = 0

for : y y 2 and x L 2
Equation 3.313

in which z0 is the z -co-ordinate of the fluid surface.


The resulting force P in the z -direction becomes:
+ L 2 + y 2

P=

p( x, y , z = z ) dy dx
0

L 2 y 2
+L 2

P (x ) dx <
'

L 2

Equation 3.314
The boundary condition in Equation 3.313 can be fulfilled by pressure amplitude
p ( x, y , z = z 0 ) , which is found by a superposition of an infinite number of harmonic pressures.

From Equation 3.314 follows that the pressure amplitude p (x ) can be integrated, so a
Fourier series expansion follows from:
+
1
p ( x ) = p() cos (kx ( x )) d dk x
0
Because the pressure amplitude p depends on two variables, the Fourier series expansion has
to be two-dimensional too:
1 + +
p ( x, y , z = z0 ) = 2 p(,)
0 0
cos(k y ( y )) cos(k x ( x )) d d dk y dk x

in which k x is the wave number in the x -direction and k y is the wave number in the y direction.
According to Equation 3.313, the pressure amplitude p disappears for y y 2 and
x L 2 , so for this pressure expression remains:
p ( x, y , z = z0 ) =

+ L 2 + y 2

p(,)
2 0 0 L 2 y 2

cos(k y ( y )) cos(k x ( x )) d d dk y dk x
It is assumed that the value of y is small. This means that remains small too. Thus, one
can safely suppose that:
cos (k y ( y )) cos (k y y )
which results in:
+ L 2 + y 2
1
p ( x, y , z = z0 ) = 2 p(,) d cos (k x ( x )) d cos(k y y ) dk y dk x
0 0 L 2 y 2
+L 2

'
1
cos(k y y ) P () cos(k x (x )) d dk y dk x
2
00
L 2

109

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003
Equation 3.315

This pressure definition leads - as a start - to the following initial definition of the radiation
potential:

0 r ( x, y , z , t ) = e j t C(k x , k y ) cos (kx ( x )) cos(k y y )


0 0 0

cosh k x 2 + k y 2 ( z h )

dk dk d
x
y
2
2

sinh k x + k y h

Equation 3.316
in which the function C (k x , k y ) is still unknown.
This expression in Equation 3.316 for the radiation potential fulfils the Equation of Laplace:
2 2 2
+
+ 2 =0
x 2 y 2
z
Now, the harmonic pressure at the free surface p1 can be obtained from an integration of the with the Bernoulli Equation obtained - derivative to the time of the pressure:

p1
j t
=e
C (k x , k y ) cos(k x (x )) cos(k y y )
t
0 0 0
2 g k x 2 + k y 2 tanh k x 2 + k y 2 h

dk dk d
x
y
2
2
tanh k x + k y h

Equation 3.317
The harmonic oscillating pressure is given by:
p1 ( x, y , z = z 0 , t ) = j p1 ( x, y , z = z 0 ) e j t
Equation 3.318
and its amplitude becomes:

p1 ( x, y , z = z0 ) = C (k x , k y ) cos(k x (x )) cos (k y y )
000
2 g k x 2 + k y 2 tanh k x 2 + k y 2 h

dk dk d
x
y
2
2
tanh k x + k y h

Equation 3.319
If this pressure amplitude p 1 is supposed to be equal to the amplitude p , then combining
Equation 3.315 and Equation 3.319 provides the unknown function C (k x , k y ):

110

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
p ( x, y , z = z0 ) =

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

+L 2

'
1
cos(k y y ) P ( ) cos (k x ( x )) d dk y dk x
2
00
L 2

= p1 ( x, y , z = z 0 )
=

g
cos(k y y ) C (k x , k y ) cos (k x ( x ))
00
0

2
2
2
2
k x + k y tanh kx + k y h

dk dk d
x
y
2
2
tanh k x + k y h

Equation 3.320
Comparing the two integrands provides:
2
2
2
2

g k x + k y tanh k x + k y h
d =
0 C (k x , k y ) cos(k x (x ))
2
2
tanh k x + k y h

+L 2

'
1
P () cos (k x ( x )) d
2
L 2

or:
tanh k x 2 + k y 2 h

0 C (k x , k y ) cos(k x ( x )) d = k 2 + k 2 tanh k 2 + k 2 h
x
y
y
x

+L 2

'

P () cos(k x (x )) d
2
g L 2

Equation 3.321
When defining:
P ( )
A0 () =
g 2
and substituting Equation 3.321 in Equation 3.316 provides the radiation potential:
'

0 r ( x, y , z , t ) = e

j t

+L 2

L 2

A0 ( ) cos (k x ( x ))

cosh k x 2 + k y 2 ( z h ) cos (k y y )
0 cosh k 2 +k 2 h k 2 + k 2 sinh k 2 + k 2 h dk x dk y d
y
x
y
y
x

Equation 3.322
This potential fulfils both, the radiation condition at infinity and the boundary condition at the
free surface.
3.3.3.2.2 2-D Radiation Potential

111

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

In case of an oscillating two-dimensional body, no waves are travelling in the x -direction, so


k x = 0 and k y = k . The distribution of A( ) is constant over the full length of the body from
= until = + and the radiation potential - given in Equation 3.322 - reduces to:
0 r ( y, z , t ) = e

j t

cosh [k ( z h )]
cos(k y ) dk
cosh[k h] k sinh [k h]
0

A0

Equation 3.323
To fulfil also the Sommerfeld radiation condition in Equation 3.36, a term has to be added.
For this, use will be made here of the value of the potential given in Equation 3.323 at a large
distance from the body:

cosh [k ( z h )]
0 r ( y, z , t ) = e j t A0
cos(k y ) dk

cosh
[
k

h
]

sinh
[
k

h
]
0

1
= e j t A0 F (k ) e + i k y dk + F (k ) e i k y dk
2 0
0

with:
F (k ) =

cosh[k ( z h)]
cosh [k h] k sinh [k h ]

The treatment of the singularities is visualised in Figure 3.33.

Figure 3.33: Treatment of singularities


When substituting for k the term u = k + i l , the first integral integrates for y > 0 over the
closed line I-II-III-IV in the first quadrant of the complex domain and the second integral
integrates for y > 0 over the closed line I-V-VI-VII in the fourth quadrant, so:
1. For line I-II-III-IV :

112

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

+i u y
F (u ) e du = ...dk + ...du + ...du + ...du
II

III

IV

= J I + J II + J III + J IV
=0
with:

F (k ) e

+ i k y

dk = lim ( J II + J III + J IV )
R

The location of the singular point follows from the denominator in the expression for
F (k ) :
cosh [0 h ] 0 sinh [0 h] = 0
Because lim ( J III ) = 0 and J IV disappears too for a large y , the singular point itself
R

delivers a contribution only:


J II = i Residue (0 )

cosh [0 (z h )]
e+ i 0 y
h sinh [0 h] sinh [0 h ] 0 h cosh [0 h]
cosh [0 h] cosh[0 ( z h )] + i 0 y
= +i
e
0 h + sinh [0 h] cosh [0 h ]
and the searched integral becomes for y :
= i

F (k ) e

+ i k y

dk = i

cosh [0 h] cosh [0 ( z h)] + i 0 y


e
0 h + sinh [0 h] cosh [0 h]

2. For line I-V-VI-VII:


R

i u y
F (u ) e du = ...dk + ...du + ...du + ...du
V

VI

VII

= J I + J V + JVI + JVII
=0
with:

F (k ) e

i k y

dk = lim ( JV + JVI + JVII )


R

Because lim ( J VI ) = 0 and J VII disappears too for a large y , the singular point itself
R

delivers a contribution only:


J V = +i Residue (0 )
cosh [0 h] cosh[ 0 ( z h )] i 0 y
= i
e
0 h + sinh [0 h ] cosh [0 h]
and the searched integral becomes for y :

F (k ) e
0

i k y

dk = +i

cosh [0 h ] cosh[0 ( z h )] i 0 y
e
0 h + sinh [0 h] cosh[0 h ]

This provides for the potential in Equation 3.323 for y :


113

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
0 r ( y, z , t ) = e j t A0

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

cosh[0 h] cosh [0 (z h )]
sin (0 y )
0 h + sinh [0 h ] cosh [0 h]
Equation 3.324

The Sommerfeld radiation condition in Equation 3.36 will be fulfilled when:


cosh[0 h ] cosh [0 ( z h )]
e j t A0 0
cos (0 y ) 0 Im{ 0 ( y, z, t )} = 0
0 h + sinh [0 h ] cosh[0 h ]
or:
Im { 0 ( y, z , t )} = 0 j ( y , z , t )
= e j t A0

cosh[0 h ] cosh[0 ( z h )]
cos (0 y )
0 h + sinh [0 h] cosh[0 h ]

Equation 3.325
With Equation 3.324 and Equation 3.325, the radiation potential becomes:
0 r ( y, z , t ) + j 0 j ( y , z , t ) = e j t A0

cosh[k (z h )]
cos(k y ) dk +

0 cosh [k h ] k sinh [k h]

j cosh [0 h] cosh [0 ( z h)] cos( y )


0

0 h + sinh [0 h] cosh [0 h]
Equation 3.326
From this follows for y :

cosh [0 h] cosh [0 ( z h)] j 0 y


e
0 h + sinh [0 h] cosh [0 h]
This means that Equation 3.326 describes a flow, consisting of waves with amplitude:

cosh 2 [0 h ]
= A0

g 0 h + sinh [0 h] cosh[0 h ]
0 ( y , z , t ) = j e j t A0

Equation 3.327
travelling away from both sides of the cylinder.
From the orthogonality condition:

=+
y
z
follows the stream function:
0 r ( y, z , t ) + j 0 j ( y , z , t ) = e j t A0

sinh [k ( z h )]
sin (k y ) dk +

0 cosh [k h ] k sinh [k h]

j cosh[0 h ] sinh [0 ( z h )] sin ( y )


0

0 h + sinh [0 h] cosh [0 h]
Equation 3.328
For an infinite water depth, Equation 3.326 and Equation 3.328 reduce to:
114

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

0 r ( y , z , t ) + j 0 j ( y, z , t ) = e j t A0
e k z

cos(k y ) dk + j e z cos( y )

0 k

j t
0 r ( y , z , t ) + j 0 j ( y, z , t ) = e
A0
e k z

sin (k y ) dk + j e z sin ( y )

0 k

Equation 3.329
Now, the potential and stream functions can be written as:
0 = 0 r + 0 rad + j 0 j
e k z
cos (k y ) dk +

0 k
e k h
sinh [k z ] k cosh[k z ]
= e j t A0
cos (k y )
dk

cosh
[
k

h
]

sinh
[
k

h
]
0

cosh [0 h ] cosh[0 ( z h )]
cos (0 y )
j
0 h + sinh [0 h] cosh[0 h ]

0 = 0 r + 0 rad + j 0 j

e k z

sin (k y ) dk

0 k

e k h

cosh [k z ] k sinh [k z ]
= e j t A0
sin (k y )
dk
cosh[k h] k sinh [k h]
0 k

cosh[0 h] sinh [0 ( z h)]


sin (0 y )
j

0 h + sinh [0 h] cosh[0 h ]

Equation 3.330
In here, 0 r is the potential at deep water and 0 rad is the additional potential due to the
finite water depth. j can be written in the same way.
3.3.3.2.3 Alternative Derivation

Assuming that the real part of the potential at an infinite water depth, r , is known, another
derivation of the 2-D potential is given by Porter [1960]. The additional potential for a
restricted water depth, rad , will be determined in such a way that it fulfils the free surface
condition and - together with r - also the boundary condition at the seabed.
As a start for the real additional potential will be chosen:

0 rad ( y, z , t ) = e j t A0 {C1 (k ) sinh [k z ] + C2 (k ) cosh[k (z h )]} cos (k y ) dk


0

Equation 3.331
115

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

From the free surface condition in Equation 3.34 follows for y B 2 :

e j t A0 { C2 (k ) cosh[k h ] + C1 (k ) k C2 (k ) k sinh [k h]} cos (k y ) dk = 0


0

The solution of this Fourier integral equation:

f (k ) cos (k ) dk = g ()
0

is known:
f (k ) =

1
g ( ) cos (k ) d
0

Also will be obtained:


f (k ) = C1 (k ) k + C2 (k ) { cosh [k h] k sinh [k h ]} = 0
from which follows:
k
C 2 (k ) =
C1 (k )
cosh[k h] k sinh [k h ]
With this will be obtained:
0 rad ( y, z, t ) = e j t A0

k cosh [k ( z h )]

C (k ) sinh [k z ] cosh [k h ] k sinh [k h] cos(k y ) dk


1

The still unknown function C1 (k ) follows from the boundary condition at the seabed:
0 r 0 rad
+
=0
z
z z = h
k e k h

cos (k y ) dk

0 k

j t
= e
A0

C (k ) k cosh[k h] cos (k y ) dk
1

So:
C1 (k ) =

e k h
( k ) cosh[k h]

C 2 (k ) =

k e k h
( k ) { cosh[k h] k sinh [k h]} cosh[k h ]

With this, the real additional potential, as given in Equation 3.330, becomes:
0 rad ( y, z, t ) = e j t A0
e k h sinh [k z ] k cosh[k z ]
0 k cosh [k h ] k sinh [k h] cos(k y ) dk

Equation 3.332
The imaginary part can be obtained as described before.
116

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

3.3.3.2.4 2-D Multi-Potential

The free surface conditions can not be fulfilled with the potential and the stream function in
Equation 3.330 only.
Additional potentials n are required which fulfil the boundary conditions in Equation 3.33
through Equation 3.36 and together with 0 also fulfil the boundary conditions in Equation
3.37 through Equation 3.39:

( y , z , t ) = A0 0 ' ( y , z , t ) + An n ' ( y , z , t )

n =1

}
( y , z , t )}

= A0 0 r ( y , z , t ) + 0 rad ' ( y, z , t ) + j 0 j ' ( y , z , t ) +


'

A { ( y , z , t ) + ( y , z , t ) +

'

'

nr

nrad

j nj '

n =1

Equation 3.333
Use will be made here of multi-potentials given by Grim [1956, 1957] of which - using the
Sommerfeld radiation condition - the real additional potential nrad and the imaginary
potential part nj will be determined. This results in:
nr ( y , z , t ) = + e j t An

(k + ) k

2 (n 1)

e kz cos (k y ) dk

nrad ( y , z , t ) = + e j t An

(k + ) k

2 (n 1)

e kh

nj ( y , z , t ) = e j t An

sinh [k z ] k cosh [k z ]
cos (k y ) dk
cosh [k h] k sinh [k h ]

0 2 n
cosh [0 (z h )]

cos (0 y )
cosh[0 h] 0 h + sinh [0 h ] cosh[0 h ]
Equation 3.334
The orthogonality condition provides the stream functions:
nr ( y , z , t ) = + e j t An

(k + ) k

2 (n 1)

e kz sin (k y ) dk

nrad ( y , z , t ) = e j t An

(k + ) k
0

2 (n 1)

nj ( y , z , t ) = + e j t An

e kh

cosh[k z ] k sinh [k z ]
sin (k y ) dk
cosh [k h] k sinh [k h ]

0 2 n
sinh [0 ( z h )]

sin (0 y )
cosh[0 h] 0 h + sinh [0 h ] cosh[0 h ]
117

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003
Equation 3.335

The potentials nj and nrad disappear in deep water.


3.3.3.2.5 Total Potentials

Only the complex constant An with 0 n in the potential has to be determined:

}}

( y , z, t ) = {Anr + j Anj } nr ' ( y, z , t ) + nrad ' ( y , z, t ) + j nj ' ( y , z, t )

n =0

{
{ {

Anr nr ' + nrad ' Anj nj '

'
'
'
n =0 + j Anj nr + nrad + Anr nj

A {

nr nr + nrad } Anj nj
= e j t

n =0
+ j {Anj {nr + nrad } + Anr nj }

}}

( y , z , t ) = {Anr + j Anj } nr ' ( y, z, t ) + nrad ' ( y, z, t ) + j nj ' ( y, z, t )

n =0

{
{ {

Anr nr ' + nrad ' Anj nj '

'
'
'
n =0 + j Anj nr + nrad + Anr nj

A {

nr + nrad } Anj nj
nr
= e j t

n =0
+ j {Anj {nr + nrad } + Anr nj }

Equation 3.336
Summarised, the complex total potential can now be written as:
( y , z , t ) + i ( y, z, t ) = e j t {A0 r + j A0 j }
cos (k ( y + i ( z h )))

dk

0 cosh[k h] k sinh [k h]

+
cosh
[

h
]

cos
(

(
y
+
i

(
z

h
)
)
)
+ j
0
0

0 h + sinh [0 h ] cosh[0 h ]
{Anr + j Anj }

cos
(
k

(
y
+
i

(
z

h
)
)
)

2
2
2 ( n 1 )

dk
k k
j t
e
0
cosh [k h ] k sinh [k h]

n =1

2n
cos(0 ( y + i ( z h)))

j 0

cosh [0 h ] 0 h + sinh [0 h] cosh [0 h]

Equation 3.337
The coefficients Anr and Anj with 0 n have to be determined in such a way that the
instantaneous boundary conditions on the body surface have been fulfilled. These coefficients
are dimensional and it is very practical to determine them for the amplitude of the flow
velocity V ; also if they then have the dimension L2 n +1 :

118

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
Ar + j Aj
V
'
= V Ar + j A j '

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Ar + j Aj = V

Then, An n and An n have the dimensions of a length [L] .


'

'

3.3.3.3 Expansion of Potential Parts


The expansion of the potential parts at an infinite water depth is given by Grim, see Kirsch
[1969].
For r = y 2 + z 2 0 :

0 r = e

0 r = e

+
ln
(

r
)
+
Re ( z + i y )m cos ( y ) +

m =1 m m!

m
arctan y +
Im ( z + i y ) sin ( y )

z m =1 m m!

m
m

(
)

+
ln

r
+
Re ( z + i y ) sin ( y )

m =1 m m!

m
arctan y + Im ( z + i y )m cos ( y )

z m =1 m m!

Equation 3.338
with the Euler constant: = 0.57722 .
For r = y 2 + z 2 :

M
(m 1)!
y
0 r = m 2 m Re ( z + i y )m + e z sin ( y )
y

m =1 r

M
y
(m 1)!

0 r = m 2 m Im ( z + i y )m e z cos ( y )
y

m =1 r

Equation 3.339
Mind you that

(m 1)! ( z + i y )m

m r 2m

is semi-convergent.

nr = ( 1)n (2n 1)! Re ( y + i z ) 2 n +


Im ( y + i z ) ( 2 n 1 )
2
n

nr = ( 1)n (2n 1)! Im ( y + i z ) 2 n


Re ( y + i z ) (2 n 1 )
2
n

Equation 3.340
For the expansion of the remaining potential parts use has been made of the following
relations as derived in Appendix II:
119

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

k 2t
cosh [k z ] cos(k y ) =
Re ( z + i y )2 t
t = 0 (2t )!

k 2t
2t
Im (z + i y )
t = 0 (2t )!

sinh [k z ] sin (k y ) =

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

k 2 t +1
Re ( z + i y )2 t +1
t = 0 (2t + 1)!

sinh [k z ] cos(k y ) =

k 2 t +1
cosh [k z ] sin (k y ) =
Im ( z + i y )2 t +1
t = 0 (2t + 1)!

With these relations follows from Equation 3.332:

e k h

0 rad =
dk
0 ( k ) ( cosh[k h] k sinh [k h])

k 2t+ 1
k 2t
2 t +1

Re
(
z
+
i

y
)

Re ( z + i y )2 t

t = 0 (2t + 1)!
t = 0 (2t )!

k 2 t +1 e k h


dk

= (2t + 1)! 0 ( k ) ( cosh [k h ] k sinh [k h])

t =0

2 t +1
2t
(2t + 1) Re (z + i y )
Re ( z + i y )

}
{
})
G(2t + 1)

=
( Re {( z + i y ) } (2t + 1) Re{(z + i y ) })
(2t + 1)!

t =0

2 t +1

2t

Equation 3.341

It is obvious that:

G(2t + 1)

0 rad =
(2t + 1) Im ( z + i y )2 t Im ( z + i y )2 t +1
(2t + 1)!
t =0

})

Equation 3.342
The function:

k t e k h
dk
(k ) ( cosh [k h ] k sinh [k h])
0
will be treated in the next Section.
G (t ) =

Further follows from Equation 3.334:

120

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

k 2 2 k 2 ( n 1 ) e k h
nrad =
dk
0 (k ) ( cosh [k h] k sinh [k h ])

2 t +1
2t

k
2 t +1
k
Re ( z + i y )2 t
k
t = 0 (2t + 1)! Re ( z + i y )
t = 0 (2t )!


k 2 t + 2 n +1 e k h

dk


1 0 (k ) ( cosh[k h ] k sinh [k h])


(2t + 1)!

=
k 2 t + 2 n 1 e k h

2
dk
t =0

(k ) ( cosh[k h ] k sinh [k h])


0

Re ( z + i y )2 t +1 (2t + 1) Re ( z + i y )2 t

G(2t + 2n + 1) 2 G(2t + 2n 1)

(2t + 1)!
=
t =0
2 t +1
(2t + 1) Re ( z + i y )2 t
Re ( z + i y )

})

})

Equation 3.343
It is clear that:
nrad

G(2t + 2n + 1) 2 G(2t + 2n 1)

(2t + 1)!
=
t =0
2 t +1
(2t + 1) Im ( z + i y )2 t
Im ( z + i y )

})

Equation 3.344
For the imaginary parts can be written:
+ cosh 2 [ 0 h ]
0 j =

0 h + sinh [ 0 h] cosh [ 0 h ]
2 t +1

0 2 t
2t

0
2 t +1

Re ( z + i y ) tanh [0 h]
Re (z + i y )
t = 0 (2t )!

t =0
(2t + 1)!

cosh 2 [0 h]
=

0 h + sinh [ 0 h] cosh [ 0 h ]

0 j

0 2 t
2t

Im (z + i y )
t = 0 (2t )!

2 t +1

0
2 t +1
Im ( z + i y )
tanh [0 h]

t =0
(2t + 1)!

Equation 3.345

121

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

nj =

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

0 2 n

0 h + sinh [ 0 h] cosh [ 0 h ]

0 2 t

Re ( z + i y )2 t
t = 0 (2t )!

2 t +1

0

h
]

Re ( z + i y )2 t +1

t =0
(2t + 1)!

2 t +1

0 2 t

Im (z + i y )2 t tanh [0 h] 0
Im ( z + i y ) 2 t +1
t = 0 (2t )!

t =0
(2t + 1)!

= 0 2 ( n 1) 0 2 2 0 j

= 0
nj =

2 ( n 1)

} tanh [

0 0 j
2

+ 0 2 n

0 h + sinh [ 0 h] cosh [ 0 h ]

Equation 3.346
3.3.3.4 Function G(t)
The function:

k t e k h
dk
(k ) ( cosh [k h ] k sinh [k h])
0

G (t ) =

[ ]

with unit L1 t has two singular points: k = and k = 0 , see Figure 3.34.

Figure 3.34: Singularities in the G-function


Thus, it is not possible to solve this integral directly.
First, this integral will be normalised:
G' (t ) = G(t ) ht 1

ut eu
du
(u h ) ( h cosh [u ] u sinh [u ])
0

Equation 3.347
A substitution of:
w = u +i v =

2 ei
2
122

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

provides:
J =

wt e w
dw
(w h) { h cosh [w] w sinh [w]}

= ...du + ...dw + ...dw + ...dw + ...dw


0

II

III

IV

= ...du + J I + J II + J III + J IV
0

=0
From this follows:

u t eu
0 (u h ) { h cosh [u] u sinh [u ]} du = Re{J I + J II + J III + J IV }
J I and J II are imaginary because they are residues and J III = 0 for R .
So, it remains:

ut eu
0 (u h ) { h cosh [u ] u sinh [u ]} du

= Re{J IV }

wt e w
= Re
dw
IV (w h) { h cosh [w] w sinh [w]}

With the complex function:


(w~ h ) { h cosh[w~] w~ sinh [w~]}

~ = 2 ei
with real: w
2
the nominator of this integral will be made real by removing.
So:

123

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

wt e w

~] w
~ sinh [w
~]}
(w h ) { h cosh[w

'
G (t ) = Re
dw
IV ( w h ) { h cosh [w] w sinh [w]}

~ h) { h cosh [w
~] w
~ sinh [w
~]}
( w

t
= cos


2(h )2 1 tan t cos + e + 1 + tan t sin

4
4

4h cos + tan t sin


cos e 1 tan sin


t + 1 + tan


4
4


d
0 2
2

h
)

2
2
2
cosh [ ] 2 h + 2h tanh []

+ 2 2 h 2 2 cos + 2h sin

Equation 3.348
Because t is always odd:

t 4(h ) sin + 2 2 cos e 4h(cos + sin )


G (t ) = cos

d
4 0
2 2h( h )

cosh[] 2 2 h 2 + 2 2h tanh [ ]


2 2
2

+ 2 h cos + 2h sin
for t = 1,5,9,......

'

(
{

t 4(h ) cos + e 2 2 sin 4h(cos sin )


G (t ) = cos

d
4 0
2 2h ( h )

cosh [ ] 2 2 h 2 + 2 2h tanh []


2 2
2

+ 2 h cos + 2h sin

'

for t = 3,7,11,......

For t > 1 the function G ' (t ) becomes finite.


However, G ' (1) does not converge for h 0 ; the integral increases monotone with
decreasing h . This will be investigated first.

u e u
'
G (1) = G(1) =
du
(u h ) ( h cosh [u ] u sinh [u ])
0
Equation 3.349
124

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

This integral converges fast for small h -values. This will be approximated by:

u e u
lim G1 (1) =
du
h 0
(u h ) h u 2
0

Equation 3.350
This can be written as:

e u

du +

1 h 0 u h

1
e
lim G1 (1) = lim

du +
h 0
h 0 2 h
h 1 0 u h

1
e

du
2 h h + 1 0 u + h

From:

eu
am
a

du
=

+
ln
a
+

0 u a
m =1 m m!

follows:

e h
(
h )m

1 h + ln ( h ) + m m! +

m =1

+ e h
ln ( h ) ( h ) 2

lim G1 (1) = lim


+
+
+

h 0
h 0
2
m =1 m m!
2 h 1 h

+ h

e
ln ( h )
( h) 2

+
+ ( 1)m
2
m m!
2 h 1+ h
m =1

or:

e h
(
h )m
1 h + ln ( h) + m m! +
m =1

ln ( h)
(
h ) 2
1 + h e h
lim G1 (1) = lim
+
+ h +

h 0
h 0
2
m =2 m m!
2 h (1 h)

m
1 h e + h

ln
(

h
)

m ( h ) 2

+
h + ( 1)
2
m m!
2 h (1 h )
m= 2

or:

125

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

e h
(
h)m

+ ln ( h ) +

+
m =1 m m!
1 h

1 cosh h sinh h + ln ( h ) +
1 h
2
h

cosh h sinh h
1

lim G1 (1) = lim +


h 0
h 0
1 h
2 (1 h )
h

m 1
m

+ e h ( h ) 2 + e h ( h) 2

m = 2 m m!
m = 2 m m!

m 1
m

+ h
m ( h ) 2
m ( h ) 2
+ h
e
( 1)
+e
( 1)

m m!
m m!
m =2
m =2

or:

]
[

lim G1 (1) = 1 ln ( h )

h 0

Equation 3.351
The imaginary part of integral in Equation 3.348 has been treated in Appendix III.
3.3.3.5 Hydrodynamic Loads
The hydrodynamic loads can be found from an integration of the pressures on the hull of the
oscillating body in (previously) still water. With a known potential, these pressures can be
found from the linear part of the instationary pressures as follows from the Bernoulli equation:
pdyn = p pstat

t
= j
The potential is in-phase with the oscillation velocity. To obtain the phase of the pressures
with respect to the oscillatory motion a phase shift of 90 0 is required, which means a
multiplication with j . Then the pressure is:
=

p dyn =
The hydrodynamic force on the body is equal to the integrated pressure on the body. In the
two-dimensional case, this is a force per unit length.
The vertical force becomes:
FV = FVr + j FVj
= p dy
S

)
{A

= V FVr ' + j FVj '


= V e j t

n= 0 S

nr

'

)}

nr Anj nj + j Anr nj Anj nr dy


'

'

'

Equation 3.352

126

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

The real part of this force is equal to the hydrodynamic mass coefficient times the oscillatory
acceleration, from which the hydrodynamic mass coefficient follows:
F
F Vr
m" = Vr =
b
V
or non-dimensional:
m"
F Vr
CV =
=
2
2
B
B V
8
8
Equation 3.353
The imaginary part of the force must be equal to the hydrodynamic damping coefficient times
the oscillatory velocity, from which the damping coefficient follows:
F Vj
NV =
V
Instead of this coefficient, generally the ratio between amplitude of the radiated wave and
the oscillatory motion z will be used. The energy balance provides:
2

AV


=
z
2
NV
=

g 2 cgroup
=
=

0
sinh [2 0 h]

N
g 2 0 h + sinh [2 0 h] V

2
cosh 2 [0 h]

F Vj
V 0 h + sinh [0 h ] cosh[0 h ]
Equation 3.354

In deep water, the hydrodynamic mass for 0 becomes infinite, because the potential in
Equation 3.338 becomes:
lim 0 r = + ln ( r )
0

Equation 3.355
and the non-dimensional mass of a circle becomes:

m"

lim CV = lim
0
0
2
B

8
1

= 2 ln ( r ) +

2

n =1 n 4 n 1
and the amplitude ratio in this deep water case becomes:
d AV
= B
lim
0
d

The hydrodynamic mass for 0 in shallow water remains finite. Because the multipotentials - just as in deep water provide finite contributions, the radiation potential has to

127

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

be discussed only, which is decisive (infinite mass) in deep water. The change-over borderline
''deep to shallow'' water provides for this radiation potential:
lim (0 r + 0 rad ) = + ln ( r ) ln ( h )
0

r
= + ln
h
Equation 3.356
It is obvious that Equation 3.356 - just as Equation 3.355 - provides an infinite value.
When the contributions of the multi-potentials (which disappear here for the borderline case
0 ) are ignored, it follows from Equation 3.327 for the amplitude ratio in shallow water:

AV =
z

cosh 2 [0 h]
= A0

g z 0 h + sinh [0 h] cosh [0 h]

cosh 2 [0 h]
= A0

z 0 h + sinh [0 h ] cosh[0 h]
A0
cosh 2 [0 h ]

0 h + sinh [0 h] cosh [0 h ]
V
sinh [0 h ] cosh[0 h]
'
= A0 0
0 h + sinh [0 h] cosh [0 h ]
=

Because:
A '
=1
lim 0

0
B

follows:
sinh [0 h] cosh[0 h ]
lim AV = B 0
0
0 h + sinh [0 h] cosh [0 h ]
and:
d AV
d A d
= lim V 0
lim
0
d 0 0 d0 d
=

B
1

lim
2 0 0 0 h + sinh [0 h ] cosh [0 h]

=
Thus, AV ( B 2) has at B 2 = 0 a vertical tangent.
The fact that the hydrodynamic mass goes to infinity for zero frequency can be explained
physically as follows. The smaller the frequency becomes, the longer becomes the radiated
wave and the faster travels it away from the cylinder. In the borderline case 0 has the
wave an infinite length and it travels away - just as the pressure (incompressible fluid) - with
an infinite velocity. This means that all fluid particles are in phase with the motions of the
body. This means that the hydrodynamic force is in phase with the motion of the body, which
holds too that:

128

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

'
F Vi

= arctan F Vj ' = 0
HT = = arctan
F Vr
F Vr

'
This condition is fulfilled only when F Vj = 0 or F Vj ' = m" = .

However, F Vj ' is finite:


F Vj

'

F Vj
NV
g2
AV 2
2
=
=
=
AV = 2

V 4

Because lim AV = B follows lim F Vj ' = B 2 . The term F Vj ' = m" has to be infinite.
0 0

0 0

The finite value of the hydrodynamic mass at shallow water is physically hard to interpret. A
full explanation is not given here. However, it has been shown here that the result makes some
sense. At shallow water can the wave (even in an incompressible fluid) not travel with an
infinite velocity; its maximum velocity is g h . In case of long waves at shallow water, the
energy has the same velocity. From that can be concluded that at low decreasing frequencies
the damping part in the hydrodynamic force will increase. This means that:
F Vi '
0
HT = arctan
'
F Vr
So, F Vr ' = m" has to be finite.
3.3.3.6 Wave Loads
The wave forces FE on the restrained body in waves consist of:
forces F1 in the undisturbed incoming waves (Froude-Krylov hypothesis) and
forces caused by the disturbance of the waves by the body:
one part F2 in phase with the accelerations of the water particles and
another part F3 in phase with the velocity of the water particles.
Thus:
FE = F1 + F2 + j F3
These forces will be determined from the undisturbed wave potential W and the disturbance
potential S . As mentioned before, for 900 only an approximation will be found.
FE = F1 + F2 + j F3
= ( W + S ) dy
S

= e j t

j xcos

e 0

{cosh [ 0 z ] tanh [ 0 h ] sinh [0 z ]} cos ( 0 y sin ) + dy


S

V Anr ' nr Anj ' nj + j Anr ' nj + Anj ' nr

n =0 S

)}

Equation 3.357
129

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

In here:
2 j ( t 0 xcos )
F1 =
e

{{cosh[ z ] tanh [ h] sinh [ z ]} cos(


0

y sin )} dy

F2 = V e j t Anr ' nr Anj ' nj dy


n =0 S

F3 = V e j t Anr ' nj + Anj ' nr dy


n =0 S

Using V = , the non-dimensional amplitudes are:


F1
g B
1
= {{cosh [0 z ] tanh [0 h] sinh [0 z ]} cos(0 y sin )} dy
B S

E1 =

E2 =

F2
g B

=
E3 =


Anr ' nr Anj ' nj dy
B n= 0 S

F3
g B


Anr ' nj + Anj ' nr dy
B n = 0 S
Equation 3.358

In case of = 900 , so beam waves, the theory of Haskind-Newman see Haskind [1957] or
Newman [1962] - can be used too to determine the amplitudes E1 , E 2 and E 3 .
When W = W e j t is the potential of the incoming wave and S = S e j t is the potential
of the disturbance by the body at a large distance from the body with velocity amplitude
V = 1 , then:
h


FE = e j t W
W dz
y
y
0
Equation 3.359
According to Equation 3.3105 in Appendix I is:

W =
{cosh [0 z ] tanh [0 h] sinh [0 z ]} cos(0 y )

From the previous subsections follows the asymptotic expression for the disturbance potential
in still water with V = 1 :

130

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

cosh 2 [0 h ]

0 h + sinh [0 h ] cosh [0 h]
{cosh [0 z ] tanh [0 h] sinh [0 z ]} sin (0 y )

( y ) =

) {(

'
'
2
'
'
2 ( n 1 )
2
A0 r + j A0 j 0 Anr + j Anj 0

n =1

Substituting this in Equation 3.359, provides:


2 cosh 2 [0 h ]
j t
FE = g 0 e

0 h + sinh [0 h ] cosh [0 h]
h

{cosh [ z ] tanh [ h ] sinh [ z ]} dz


2

) {(

) {(

'

'
2
2
A
+
j

Anr ' + j Anj ' 0 2 (n 1)


0r
0j
0

n =1

j t
= g e

'
'
2
'
'
2 (n 1)
2
A0 r + j A0 j 0 Anr + j Anj 0

n =1

Non-dimensional:
E1 + E 2 =

{ }

Re F E
g B

) {

) {

'
2
'
2 ( n 1 )
2
= A0 r 0 Anr 0

B
n =1

E3 =

{ }

Im F E
g B

'

A0 j 0 2 2 Anj ' 0 2 (n 1 )
B
n =1

Equation 3.360

3.3.3.7 Solution
The Lewis transformation of a cross section is given by:
y + i z = e + i + a e i + b e i 3
Equation 3.361
Then, the co-ordinates of the cross section are:
y = (1 + a ) cos( ) + b cos(3 )
z = (1 a ) sin ( ) b sin (3 )
Equation 3.362
Then:
131

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

z + i y = i ( y i z ) = i e i + a e + i + b e +i 3

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

)
Equation 3.363

All calculations will be carried out in the Lewis domain. Scale factors are given in the table
below.

Breadth
Draught
Water depth
Wave number
Acceleration
Forces

Ship

Lewis form

Ship
Lewis form

BR
TI
HT TI
0
g
FG

2 (1 + a + b)
1 a + b
WT = HT (1 a + b )
WF = 0 TI / (1 a + b )
g
F

BR {2 (1 + a + b )}
TI (1 a + b )
TI (1 a + b )
(1 a + b ) TI
1
{TI (1 a + b )}2

Table 3.31: Lewis form parameters

3.3.3.8 Determination of Source Strengths An


The yet unknown complex coefficients An ( 0 n ), the source strengths of the by the flow
generated singularity, can be determined by substituting the stream function in Equation 3.3
36 and the co-ordinates of the cross section in the relevant boundary conditions in Equation
3.37 through Equation 3.39.
y, z body , t = body y , z body , t

Equation 3.364
To determine the unknowns An , an equal number of equations has to be formulated. Because
only Lewis forms are used here, a simple approach is possible.
All stream function parts and boundary conditions can be given as a Fourier series:

n = {c mn sin (2 m ) + d mn cos[(2m + 1) ]}
m= 0

or with:
2

2 2
(
2m + 1)
cos ((2 m + 1) ) = 1
+

sin
(
2
k

k =1 k 4k 2 (2m + 1)

in:

n = an 0 + {a nm sin (2m )}
m =1

'

The solution of the by equating coefficients generated equations provide the unknowns An .

132

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

3.3.4 Horizontal Motions


3.3.4.1 Boundary Conditions
The first four assumptions for the vertical motions are valid for horizontal motions too. The
potential must fulfil the motion-dependent boundary conditions, which have been substituted
in Equation 3.33 through Equation 3.36. However, the fifth boundary condition needs here
a new formulation.
Because two motions (a translation and a rotation) are considered here, follows from:

= vn body
n body
also in still water two boundary conditions:
1. For sway:

= vn
n body
=

body

dy dz

z ds y ds
d
ds

body

body

U e j t

dz
ds

body

or:
d

body

= U e j t dz

body

from which follows:


body ( y , z , t ) = U e j t z

body

+C
Equation 3.365

2. For roll:

= vn
body

=
=

body

dy dz

z ds y ds
d
ds

body

body

= e j t

dr
r
ds

body

or:
d

body

= e j t r dr

body

from which follows:


133

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

body

( y, z , t ) = e j t

y2 + z2

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

body

+C
Equation 3.366

For the restrained body in waves, only the force in the horizontal direction and the moment
about the longitudinal axis of the body will be calculated. One gets in beam waves only the in
y -point-symmetric part of the potential and the in y -symmetric part of the stream function of
the wave (see Appendix I), respectively:
j t
S body ( y , z , t ) =
e

{sinh [0 z ] tanh [0 h] cosh [0 z ]} cos(0 y ) body


Equation 3.367
and in oblique waves:
S

body

( x, y1 , z1 , t ) = e j t sin (0 x cos )

+ sin cos(0 y1 sin )

{sinh [0 z1 ] tanh [0 h ] cosh[0 z1 ]}

0 1 sin 2
y1

sin (

y sin ) {sinh [0 z ] tanh [ 0 h] cosh[ 0 z ]} dy


body

Equation 3.368

3.3.4.2 Potentials
3.3.4.2.1 2-D Radiation Potential

In a similar way as Equation 3.322 for heave, the three-dimensional radiation potential for
sway and roll can be derived as:
0 r ( x, y , z , t ) = e j t

+L 2

L 2

A0 ( ) cos (k x ( x ))

k x 2 + k y 2 cosh k x 2 + k y 2 ( z h)

0 cosh k 2 + k 2 h k 2 + k 2 sinh k 2 + k 2 h
y
x
y
y
x

sin (k y y ) dk x dk y d

Equation 3.369
This expression reduces for the two-dimensional case ( k x = 0 and k y = k ) into:

134

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

0 r ( y, z , t ) = e j t A0

k cosh [k ( z h )]

cosh [k h ] k sinh [k h] sin (k y ) dk


0

Equation 3.370
With the Sommerfeld radiation condition in Equation 3.36 and Appendix III, the total
radiation potential becomes:
0 r ( y, z , t ) + j 0 j ( y , z , t ) = e j t A0

k cosh[k (z h )]
sin (k y ) dk +

0 cosh [k h] k sinh [k h ]

j cosh [0 (z h )] cosh[0 h ] sin ( y )


0
0

0 h + sinh [0 h] cosh [0 h ]
Equation 3.371
and the stream function becomes:
0 r ( y, z , t ) + j 0 j ( y , z , t ) = e j t A0

k sinh [k ( z h )]
cos(k y ) dk +

0 cosh [k h] k sinh [k h ]

j sinh [0 ( z h )] cosh [0 h ] cos ( y )


0
0

0 h + sinh [0 h] cosh [0 h ]
Equation 3.372
Potential and stream function are divided in:
0 = 0 r + 0 rad + j 0 j = e j t A0
k e k z

sin (k y ) dk +

0 k

k e k h sinh [k z ] k cosh[k z ]

sin (k y ) dk +

0 k cosh [k h] k sinh [k h ]

cosh[0 ( z h )] cosh [0 h]
j 0
sin (0 y )
0 h + sinh [ 0 h] cosh[ 0 h ]

Equation 3.373

135

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

0 = 0 r + 0 rad + j 0 j = e j t A0
k e k z

cos (k y ) dk +

0 k

k e k h cosh[k z ] k sinh [k z ]

cos
(
k

y
)

dk
+

0 k cosh [k h ] k sinh [k h]

sinh [0 (z h )] cosh [ 0 h]
j 0
cos(0 y )
0 h + sinh [0 h] cosh [ 0 h]

Equation 3.374

3.3.4.2.2 2-D Multi-Potential

The two-dimensional multi-pole potential becomes:

nr ( y , z , t ) = e j t An (k + ) k 2 n 1 e k z sin (k y ) dk
0

nrad ( y , z , t ) = e j t An (k + ) k 2 n 1 e k h
0

sinh [k z ] k cosh[k z ]
sin (k y ) dk
cosh [k h ] k sinh [k h]

nj ( y , z , t ) = + e j t An

0 2 n +1
cosh [0 ( z h )]

sin (0 y )
cosh[0 h] 0 h + sinh [0 h] cosh [0 h ]
Equation 3.375
The related stream function is:
nr ( y , z , t ) = + e

j t

An (k + ) k 2 n 1 e k z cos( k y ) dk
0

nrad ( y , z , t ) = e j t An (k + ) k 2 n 1 e k h
0

cosh[k z ] k sinh [k z ]
cos (k y ) dk
cosh [k h ] k sinh [k h ]

nj ( y , z , t ) = + e j t An

0 2 n +1
sinh [0 ( z h )]

cos(0 y )
cosh [0 h] 0 h + sinh [0 h ] cosh[0 h]
Equation 3.376

136

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

3.3.4.2.3 Total Potentials

With exception of the complex constant An with 0 n , the potential is known:


( y , z , t ) + i ( y, z , t ) = + e j t (A0 r + j Aoj )

k sin {k ( y + i ( z h))}

dk +

0 cosh [k h ] k sinh [k h]

j cosh [0 h] sin {0 ( y + i ( z h))}


0

0 h + sinh [0 h] cosh[0 h ]
e j t

( Anr + j Anj )

sin
{
k

(
y
+
i

(
z

h
)
)
}

2
2
2
n
+
1

dk
k k
cosh[k h] k sinh [k h]

n =1

2 n +1
sin {0 ( y + i ( z h))}

j 0

cosh[0 h ] 0 h + sinh [0 h] cosh [0 h ]

Equation 3.377
Writing this in a similar way as for heave provides:
A (

nr nr + nrad ) Anj nj
( y , z , t ) = +e j t

n =0
j {Anj (nr + nrad ) + Anr nj }
Equation 3.378
and

A (
)

nr
nr + nrad Anj nj
( y , z , t ) = +e j t

n= 0
+ j {Anj (nr + nrad ) + Anr nj }

Equation 3.379
with:

Ar + j Aj = U Ar ' + j Aj '

Ar + j Aj = Ar ' + j Aj '

for sway
for roll

An has dimension L2 n + 2 .
'

[ ]

An n and An n have for sway dimension [L] and for roll dimension L2 .
'

'

'

The determination of the coefficients An follow from the boundary conditions at the body
contour.
3.3.4.3 Expansion of Potential Parts
For r = y 2 + z 2 0 :

137

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

0 r

0 r

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

+
ln
(

r
)
+
Re ( z + i y )m sin ( y )

m =1 m m!
y

= 2
+ e z

y +z
m
m
arctan y +
Im ( z + i y ) cos( y )

z
m

m
!
m =1

z
=+ 2
e z
y + z2

m
m

(
)

+
ln

r
+
Re ( z + i y ) cos ( y ) +

m =1 m m!

m
arctan y + Im ( z + i y ) m sin ( y )

z m =1 m m!

Equation 3.380
with the Euler constant: = 0.57722 .
For r = y 2 + z 2 :
0 r =
0 r = +

M
y
y
(m 1)!
m
z
+

m 2 m Im (z + i y ) e cos ( y )

2
2
y +z
y

m =1 r

M
z
y
(m 1)!
m
z

m 2 m Re ( z + i y ) e sin ( y )

2
2
y +z
y

m =1 r

Equation 3.381

nr = ( 1)n +1 (2n )! Re ( y + i z ) (2 n +1 ) +
Im ( y + i z ) 2 n
2n

nr = ( 1)n +1 (2n )! Im ( y + i z ) (2 n +1 ) Re ( y + i z ) 2 n
2n

Equation 3.382

G(2t + 3)
G (2t + 1)
0 rad =
Im ( z + i y )2 t +1
Im (z + i y )2 t
(2t )!
t = 0 (2t + 1)!

G(2t + 3)
G(2t + 1)
2 t +1
2t
0 rad =
Re ( z + i y )

Re ( z + i y )
(2t )!
t = 0 (2t + 1)!

Equation 3.383

nrad

nrad

G( 2t + 2n + 3) 2 G(2t + 2n + 1)
+
Im ( z + i y )2 t +1

(
2
t
+
1
)
!

=
G (2t + 2n + 1) 2 G(2t + 2n 1)
t =0

Im (z + i y )2 t

(2t )!
G( 2t + 2n + 3) 2 G(2t + 2n + 1)
+
Re ( z + i y )2 t +1

(2t + 1)!

=
G (2t + 2n + 1) 2 G(2t + 2n 1)
t =0

Re ( z + i y )2 t

(2t )!

Equation 3.384
138

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

oj = + 0

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

cosh 2 [0 h]

0 h + sinh [0 h] cosh [0 h]

0 2 t +1

Im ( z + i y )2 t +1

t = 0 (2t + 1)!

2
t

tanh [ h] 0 Im (z + i y )2 t
0

t = 0 (2t )!
cosh 2 [0 h]
oj = + 0

0 h + sinh [0 h] cosh [0 h]

0 2 t +1
Re ( z + i y )2 t +1

t = 0 (2t + 1)!

2t

tanh [ h] 0 Re ( z + i y )2 t
0

t = 0 (2t )!

(
)
(

Equation 3.385

)
)

nj = 0 2 (n 1) 0 2 2 0 j
nj = 0 2 (n 1

0j

Equation 3.386

3.3.4.4 Zero-Frequency Potential


Grim [1956, 1957] gives for the horizontal motions at zero frequency the complex potential:
( y + i z ) ( 2 n +1 ) +

+ i = An
(2 n +1 )
(2 n +1 )
+ ( y + i z i 2mh)
n= 0
( y + i z + i 2mh)

m =1

Equation 3.387
For Lewis forms this becomes:

139

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

i ( 2 n +1 )

p
p 2n + p
a e i 2 + b e i 4 +
( 1)
e

p =0
p

p 2 p + 2n + 1

+ i = An

( 1)

n =0
2 p +1

(2 n +1)


(i 2m H )

2
p
+
1
i 2
+i
m =1
p = 0 e
+ a e i + b e i 3

2
m

2n + p p p l l i (2 n + 2 p +2 l +1)
p
a b e
( 1)

+
p l

l = 0
p = 0

p +n
2 ( p + n +1 )
= An
( 1) (2m H )

n =0

2 p +1 l
2n + 2 p + 1 2 p + 1 l l k k i (2 p 2 l 2 k +1)
2

a b e

m =1 p = 0
2
p
+
1
l
l
=
0
k
=
0

Equation 3.388
These sums converge as long as:
e + i + a e i + b e i 3 e + i + a e i + b e i 3
=
<1
2m H
2 m HT (1 a + b )
Equation 3.389
Because m 1 , it follows the condition:
!
1 + a e i 2 + b e i 4
2 HT
1 a + b
Equation 3.390
The potential converges too when:
1+ a + b
B
2 HT
=
or
1 a + b 2T

B 4 h
Equation 3.391

3.3.4.5 Hydrodynamic Loads


The hydrodynamic force at sway oscillations in still water becomes:
FQ = FQr + j FQj
= U e j t

{A

n =0 S

nr

'

)}

nr Anj ' nj + j Anr ' nj + Anj ' nr dz


Equation 3.392

and at roll oscillations:

140

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

FR = FRr + j FRj
= 2 e j t

{A

n =0 S

)}

nr Anj ' nj + j Anr ' nj + Anj ' nr dz

'

nr

Equation 3.393
The hydrodynamic moment at sway oscillations in still water becomes:
M Q = M Qr + j M Qj
= U e j t

{A

n =0 S

'

nr

)}

nr Anj ' nj + j Anr ' nj + Anj ' nr ( y dy + z dz )


Equation 3.394

and at roll oscillations:


M R = M Rr + j M Rj
= 2 e j t

{A

n= 0 S

'

nr

)}

nr Anj ' nj + j Anr ' nj + Anj ' nr ( y dy + z dz )


Equation 3.395
'

'

Of course, the coefficients Anr and Anj of sway and roll will differ.
Fictive moment levers are defined by:
H Qr =

H Qj =

M Qj
U NQ

H Rr

H Rj =

N R B
2 F Rj

M Qr
U m"
I " 2
=
F Rr

Non-dimensional values for the sway motions are:


m"
F Qr
CH =
=
2

T
U T 2
2
2
AQ =
2

2
cosh 2 [0 h ]

F Qj
U 0 h + sinh [0 h] cosh[0 h ]

H Qr
M Qr
=
T
T F Qr
H Qj
M Qj
=
T
T F Qj
Equation 3.396
and for roll motions:
141

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

CR =

I"
M Rr
=

T 4 2 T 4
8
8

AR =
2

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

B2

4
H Rr
M Rr
=
T
T F Rr
H Rj
M Rj
=
T
T F Rj
2

cosh 2 [ 0 h ]
4 2

M Rj
2 B 2 0 h + sinh [ 0 h ] cosh[0 h]

Equation 3.397

3.3.4.6 Wave Loads


The wave loads are separated in contributions of the undisturbed wave and diffraction:
FE = F1 + F2 + j F3
= {W + S } dz
S

= e j t
j 0 x cos

(
)
(
)
cosh
[

z
]

tanh
[

h
]

sinh
[

z
]

sin

sin

dz
0
0
0
0
S

+ U Anr ' nr Anj ' nj + j Anr ' nj + Anj ' nr

n =0

)}

Equation 3.398
M E = M1 + M 2 + j M 3
= e j t
j 0 xcos

(
cosh
[

z
]

tanh
[

h
]

sinh
[

z
]
)

sin
(

sin

)
( y dy + z dz )
0
0
0
0
S

+ U Anr ' nr Anj ' nj + j Anr ' nj + Anj ' nr

n =0

)}

Equation 3.399
The separate parts are:

142

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

2 j ( t 0 xcos )
e

(cosh [0 z ] tanh [0 h] sinh [0 z ]) sin (0 y sin ) dz

F1 = +
S

F2 = U e j t Anr ' nr Anj ' nj dz


n =0 S

F3 = U e j t Anr ' nj + Anj ' nr dz


n =0 S

2 j ( t 0 xcos )
e

(cosh[0 z ] tanh [0 h] sinh [0 z ]) sin (0 y sin ) ( y dy + z dz )

M1 = +
S

M 2 = U e j t Anr ' nr Anj ' nj ( y dy + z dz )


n =0 S

M 3 = U e j t Anr ' nj + Anj ' nr ( y dy + z dz )


n =0 S

Dimensionless:
F1
g 0 Ax
tanh [ 0 h ]
=+

Ax

E1 =

(cosh [ z ] tanh [ h ] sinh [ z ]) sin (


0

y sin ) dz

E2 =

F2
g 0 Ax

E3 =

tanh [ 0 h]
'
'
Anr nr Anj nj dz
Ax
n= 0 S

F3
g 0 Ax

tanh [ 0 h]
Anr ' nj + Anj ' nr dz
Ax
n= 0 S

H Wr
M1 + M2
=
T
T F1 + F 2

H Wj
M3
=
T
T F3
Equation 3.3100

The Haskind-Newman relations see Newman [1962] - are valid too here:
143

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

E1 + E 2 =

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

{ }

Re F E
g 0 Ax

(
{ }

) {

) {

'
2
'
2 (n 1)
A0 r + 0 2 Anr 0

Ax
n =1

Im F E
E3 =
g 0 Ax

'
2
'
2 ( n 1 )
A0 j + 0 2 Anj 0

Ax
n =1

Equation 3.3101

3.3.4.7 Solution
To determine the unknowns An , an equal number of equations have to be formulated. Because
Lewis forms are used only here, a simple approach is possible.
All stream function parts and boundary conditions can be given as a Fourier series:

n = {c nm sin ((2m + 1) ) + d nm cos(2 m )}


m= 0

or with
cos (2m ) = 1 +

16
m2

sin ((2k + 1) )
k = 0 (2k + 2m + 1) (2 k 2m + 1) (2 k + 1)

in:

n = {a nm sin ((2 m + 1) )}
m= 0

'

The solution of the by equating coefficients generated equations provide the unknowns An .

3.3.5 Appendices
3.3.5.1 Appendix I: Undisturbed Wave Potential
The general expression of the complex potential of a shallow water wave, travelling in the
negative y -direction, is:
cos{0 ( y + i ( z h )) + t }

W + i W = c
with : c =
sinh [ 0 h]
0
=
=

cosh[0 (z h )] cos(0 y + t )

0 sinh [0 h] i sinh [ 0 ( z h )] sin ( 0 y + t )

cosh[0 (z h )] cos(0 y + t )

cosh[0 h] i sinh [ 0 ( z h )] sin ( 0 y + t )

Equation 3.3102

144

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

W = +


cosh [0 ( z h)] cos(0 y + t )
cosh[0 h]


e j t cosh[0 ( z h )] e j 0 y
cosh [0 h]

j t
e
{cosh[0 z ] tanh [0 h ] sinh [0 z ]} e j 0 y

W =

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003


sinh [0 ( z h)] sin (0 y + t )
cosh[0 h ]

= j


e j t sinh [0 ( z h )] e j 0 y
cosh[0 h]

= j

j t
e
{sinh [0 z ] tanh [0 h] cosh [0 z ]} e j 0 y

For the vertical motions is the in y -symmetrical part of the potential significant. For the
horizontal motions is the in y -point-symmetrical part (multiplied with j , so a phase shift of
900 ) important.
j t
e
{cosh[0 z ] tanh [0 h ] sinh [0 z ]} cos(0 y )

j t
=
e
{sinh [0 z ] tanh [0 h ] cosh [0 z ]} sin (0 y )

W V = +
W V

j t
e
{cosh [0 z ] tanh [0 h] sinh [0 z ]} sin (0 y )

j t
=
e
{sinh [0 z ] tanh [0 h ] cosh[0 z ]} cos(0 y )

W H =
W H

Equation 3.3103
When the wave travels in the x w -direction, the potential becomes:
W =

j ( t 0 xw )
e
{cosh [ 0 z ] tanh [ 0 h] sinh [ 0 z ]}

With:
x w = x cos y sin
y w = x sin + y cos
Equation 3.3104
the potential becomes:
j t j 0 ( y sin x cos )
W V =
e
e
{cosh[0 z ] tanh [0 h ] sinh [0 z ]}

Equation 3.3105
This results for the vertical motions in:

145

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

W V = +

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

j ( t 0 x cos )
e
{cosh[0 z ] tanh [0 h ] sinh [0 z ]} cos(0 y sin )

Equation 3.3106

and for the horizontal motions in:


j ( t 0 x cos )
W H =
e
{cosh [0 z ] tanh [0 h] sinh [0 z ]} sin (0 y sin )

Equation 3.3107

3.3.5.2 Appendix II: Series Expansions of Hyperbolic Functions


With:
z i y =

y + z e
2

y
i arctan
z

= r e i
the following series expansions can be found.
cosh [k z ] cos(k y ) = cosh [k z ] cosh[i k y ]
1
= {cosh[k (z + i y )] + cosh[k ( z i y )]}
2
1
= cosh k r e+ i + cosh k r e i
2
2t

1 (k r )
(k r )2t e i 2t
=
e + i 2t +

2 t = 0 (2t )!
t = 0 (2t )!

(k r )2 t
(2t )!
t =0

]}

cos(2t )

k 2t
2t
Re ( z + i y )
t =0 (2t )!

sinh [k z ] cos(k y ) = sinh [k z ] cosh [i k y ]


1
= {sinh [k ( z + i y )] + sinh [k ( z i y )]}
2
1
= sinh k r e +i + sinh k r e i
2
2 t+ 1

1 (k r )
(k r )2t +1 e i (2t +1)
=
e + i ( 2 t +1 ) +

2 t = 0 (2t + 1)!
t = 0 (2t + 1)!

{ [

]}

2 t +1
(
k r)
=
cos((2t + 1) )
t = 0 (2t + 1)!

k 2 t +1
2 t +1
Re ( z + i y )
t = 0 (2t + 1)!

146

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

sinh [k z ] sin (k y ) = i sinh [k z ] sinh [i k y ]


i
= {cosh [k ( z + i y )] cosh[k (z i y )]}
2
i
= cosh k r e + i cosh k r e i
2
2t
2t

i (k r )
(
k r)
+ i 2t
=
e

e i 2 t
2 t = 0 (2t )!
t = 0 (2t )!

]}

2t
(
k r)
=
sin (2t )
(2t )!
t =0

k 2t
2t
=
Im ( z + i y )
t = 0 (2t )!

cosh [k z ] sin (k y ) = i cosh[k z ] sinh [i k y ]


i
= {sinh [k ( z + i y )] sinh [k ( z i y )]}
2
i
= sinh k r e + i sinh k r e i
2
2 t +1
2 t +1

i (k r )
(
k r)
+ i (2 t +1 )
=
e

e i ( 2 t +1)
2 t = 0 (2t + 1)!
t = 0 (2t + 1)!

{ [

]}

2 t +1
(
k r)
=
sin ((2t + 1) )
t = 0 (2t + 1)!

k 2 t +1
2 t +1
=
Im (z + i y )
t = 0 (2t + 1)!

3.3.5.3 Appendix III: Treatment of Singular Points


The determination of 0 j and its terms - which can be added to 0 r in Equation 3.323 with
which the by 0 r + j 0 j described flow of the waves (travelling from both sides of the body
away) is given - is also possible in another way. This approach is based on work carried out by
Rayleigh and is given in the literature by Lamb [1932] for an infinite water depth.
In this approach, a viscous force w will be included in the Euler equations, is the
dynamic viscosity and w is the velocity. Because the fluid is assumed to be non-viscous, in a
later stage this dynamic viscosity will be set to zero.
From the Euler equation follows with this viscosity force the with time changing pressure
change:

p
2
= lim g

2
0
t
t
t
z
From this follows the approach as given in a subsection before for the two-dimensional
radiation potential:

147

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

0 r ( y, z , t ) + j 0 j ( y , z , t ) = e j t A0

cosh[k (z h )]

lim
cos(k y ) dk
0
0 j cosh [k h ] k sinh [k h ]

g
= e j t A0

lim
0

j
sinh [k z ] k cosh[k z ]
k h

g
e

cos(k y ) dk

j
k j cosh [k h ] k sinh [k h]

g
g

ek z
cos(k y ) dk +

j
k
g

= e j t A0 {(0 r + j 0 j ) + (0 rad + j 0 jad )}


The first integral leads to the potential in Equation 3.329 and the second integral can be
expanded as follows:
0 rad + j 0 jad

e k h

= lim
0
0 j k


j
sinh [k z ] k cosh [k z ]

cos (k y ) dk

j
cosh[k h] k sinh [k h ]

Re ( z + i y )2 t +1 Re (z + i y )2 t

g
(2t + 1)!
(2t )!

h
2
t
+
1
= lim

k
0
dk
t = 0
0 j k j cosh[k h] k sinh [k h]

g
g


Re ( z + i y )2 t +1 Re ( z + i y )2 t

j

= lim
g
(
2t + 1)!
(
2t )!

0
t =0

{G(2t + 1) + j H (2t + 1)}


The function:

148

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

e k h

k i

G(t ) + i H (t ) = lim

0
kt
0
dk


cosh [k h] k sinh [k h ]
i


will be normalised as done before:
G ' (t ) + i H ' (t ) = h t 1 (G(t ) + i H (t )) =

t
u

u e
= lim
du
0

h
0

h
cosh [u ] u sinh [u ]
h i

This is a complex integral and must be solved in the complex domain with w = u + i v .
The integrand has a singularity for:
h
w1 = h i
g
and w2 is the solution of the equation:

h
h i
cosh[w] w sinh [w] = 0
g

see Figure 3.35-a.

Figure 3.35: Treatment of singularities

149

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

e w wt

dw
=
lim
...du + ...dw + ...dw

0 (w w ) (w cosh[w ] w sinh [w ])
0
1
1
0
I
II

lim

= lim ...du +J I + J II
0
0

=0
Also:


t
u

u e

G ' (t ) + i H ' (t ) = lim
du
0


h
0

u h i

h
h i
cosh[u ] u sinh [u ]

lim

0 and R

{J I + J II }

Because:
lim J I = 0
R

follows:

wt e w
G' (t ) + i H ' (t ) = lim
dw
0

II ( w w1 ) (w1 cosh [w] w sinh [w])


The real part of this integral:

wt e w
G' (t ) = Re lim
dw
0 II (w w1 ) (w1 cosh [w] w sinh [w])

will be calculated as done before.


This integral has no singularity and the boundary 0 can be passed before integration; see
Figure 3.35-b.
The imaginary part of this integral:

wt e w
'
H (t ) = Im lim
dw
0 II (w w1 ) (w1 cosh [w] w sinh [w])

can be calculated numerically in a similar way.


It is also possible to solve this integral independently by using another integral path:

150

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

wt e w
dw
0 (w w ) (w cosh [w ] w sinh [w ])
1
1
= lim {J II + J III + J IV }
lim

= 2 i lim {Residue ( w1 ) + Residue ( w2 )}


0

J IV disappears for R .
It can be found that:
Re {J II } = Re{J III }

Then it follows:
H ' (t ) = Im lim J II
0

Im {J II } = + Im{J III }

and

= lim {Residue ( w1 ) + Residue (w2 )}


0

= ( 0 h )

t 1

cosh 2 [ 0 h ]

tanh t 1 [0 h]
0 h + sinh [0 h] cosh [0 h]

and the imaginary additional potential becomes:


2 t +1

Re ( z + i y )2 t

Re (z + i y )

0 jad = H (2t + 1)

(2t )!
(2t + 1)!
t =0

2t


0 cosh 2 [0 h]

2 t

[0 h] + sinh [0 h] cosh [0 h]

=

2t
2 t +1

t = 0 Re ( z + i y )
Re
(
z
+
i

y
)

(2t )!
(2t + 1)!

cosh 2 [0 h ]

[0 h] + sinh [0 h] cosh [0 h]

2 t +1

0 2 t
0
2t
2 t +1

(
)
[
]
Re ( z + i y )
t =0 (2t )! Re z + i y tanh 0 h
t = 0 (2t + 1)!

e z cos( y )

The same will be found as a difference between Equation 3.345 and Equation 3.329.

151

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

152

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

3.4 Potential Theory of Frank


As a consequence of conformal mapping of a cross section to the unit circle, the cross section
needs to have a certain breadth at the water surface. Fully submersed cross sections - such as
at the bulbous bow - cannot be mapped. Mapping problems can also appear for cross sections
with a very high or low area coefficient. These cases require another approach: the pulsating
source method of Frank or the so-called Frank Close-Fit Method.
For explaining this method as it has been used in the computer code SEAWAY, relevant parts
of the report of Frank [1967] have been copied to this Section, supplemented with some
numerical improvements.
Hydrodynamic research of horizontal cylinders oscillating in or below the free surface of a
deep fluid has increased in importance in the last decades and has been studied by a number of
investigators. The history of this subject began with Ursell [1949], who formulated and solved
the boundary-value problem for the semi-immersed heaving circular cylinder within the
framework of linearised free-surface theory. He represented the velocity potential as the sum
of an infinite set of multi-poles, each satisfying the linear free-surface condition and each
being multiplied by a coefficient determined by requiring the series to satisfy the kinematic
boundary condition at a number of points on the cylinder.
Grim [1953] used a variation of the Ursell method to solve the problem for two-parameter
Lewis form cylinders by conformal mapping onto a circle. Tasai [1959] and Porter [1960],
using the Ursell approach obtained the added mass and damping for oscillating contours
mappable onto a circle by the more general Theodorsen transformation. Ogilvie [1963]
calculated the hydrodynamic forces on completely submerged heaving circular cylinders.
Despite the success of the multi-pole expansion-mapping methods, Frank [1967] discussed the
problem from a different point of view. The velocity potential is represented by a distribution
of sources over the submerged cross section. The density of the sources is an unknown
function (of position along the contour) to be determined from integral equations found by
applying the kinematic boundary condition on the submerged part of the cylinder. The
hydrodynamic pressures are obtained from the velocity potential by means of the linearised
Bernoulli equation. Integration of these pressures over the immersed portion of the cylinder
yields the hydrodynamic forces or moments.

3.4.1 Notations of Frank


Franks notations have been maintained here as far as possible:
A( m )
B
C0
g
I ij

oscillation amplitude in the m -th mode


beam of cross section C0
submerged part of cross sectional contour in rest position
acceleration of gravity

(m )

influence coefficient in-phase with displacement on the i -th midpoint


due to the j -th segment in the m -th mode of oscillation

( m)

influence coefficient in-phase with velocity on the i -th midpoint due to


the j -th segment in the m -th mode of oscillation

J ij

153

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
M ( )

( m)

N
N ( )
ni

(m )

(m )

PV
(m)
pa
pv
Qj

(m )

(m )

Q j +N

(m )

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

added mass force or moment for the m -th mode of oscillation at


frequency
number of line segments defining submerged portion of half section in
rest position
damping force or moment for the m -th mode of oscillation at
frequency
direction cosine of the normal velocity at i -th midpoint for the m -th
mode of oscillation
Cauchy pricipal value of integral
hydrodynamic pressure in-phase with displacement for the m -th mode
of oscillation
hydrodynamic pressure in-phase with velocity for the m -th mode of
oscillation
source strength in-phase with displacement along the j -th segment for
the m -th mode of oscillation
source strength in-phase with velocity along the j -th segment for the
m -th mode of oscillation
length variable along C0

sj
T
t
(m )
vi

j -th line segment


draft of cross section
time
normal velocity component at the i -th midpoint for the m -th mode of
oscillation
x1
abscissa of the i -th midpoint
yi
ordinate of the i -th midpoint
y0
ordinate of the center of roll
z = x + i y complex field point in region of fluid domain
z i = xi + i y i complex midpoint of i -th segment
i
angle between i -th segment and positive x -axis

complex variable along C0


j

j -th complex input point along C0

ordinate of j -th input point

= 2 g
k
j

wave number
k -th irregular wave number for adjoint interior problem
abscissa of the j -th input point
density of fluid

(m )

velocity potential for th m -th mode of oscillation


radian frequency of oscillation
k -th irregular frequency for adjoint interior problem
( k -th eigen-frequency)

154

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

3.4.2 Formulation of the Problem


Consider a cylinder, whose cross section is a simply connected region, which is fully or
partially immersed horizontally in a previously undisturbed fluid of infinite depth. The body is
forced into simple harmonic motion and it is assumed that steady state conditions have been
attained.
The two-dimensional nature of the problem implies three degrees of freedom of motion.
Therefore, consider the following three types of oscillatory motions: vertical or heave,
horizontal or sway and rotational about a horizontal axis or roll.
To use linearised free-surface theory, the following assumptions are made:
1. the fluid is incompressible and inviscid,
2. the effects of surface tension are negligible,
3. the fluid is irrotational and
4. the motion amplitudes and velocities are small enough that all but the linear terms of the
free-surface condition, the kinematic boundary condition on the cylinder and the Bernoulli
equation may be neglected.
For complete discussions of linearised free-surface theory, Frank refers the reader to Stoker
[1957] and Wehausen and Laitone [1960].
Given the above conditions and assumptions, the problem reduces to the following boundaryvalue problem of potential theory. The cylinder is forced into simple harmonic motion
A(m ) cos ( t ) with a prescribed radian frequency of oscillation , where the superscript m
may take on the values 2, 3 and 4, denoting swaying, heaving and rolling motions,
respectively.
It is required to find a velocity potential:

( m ) ( x, y, t ) = Re (m ) (x , y ) e i t

Equation 3.41
satisfying the following conditions:
1. The Laplace equation:
2 ( m ) 2 (m )
2 (m) =
+
=0
x 2
y 2
Equation 3.42
in the fluid domain, i.e., for y < 0 and outside the cylinder.
2. The free surface condition:
2 (m )
( m )
+
g

=0
t 2
y
Equation 3.43
on the free surface y = 0 outside the cylinder, while g is the acceleration of gravity.
3. The seabed boundary condition for deep water:

155

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
lim ( m ) = lim

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

(m )
=0
y
Equation 3.44

4. The condition of the normal velocity component of the fluid at the surface of the
oscillating cylinder being equal to the normal component of the forced velocity of the
cylinder. i.e., if v n is the component of the forced velocity of the cylinder in the direction
of the outgoing unit normal vector n , then
n ( m ) = v n
Equation 3.45
This is the kinematic boundary condition on the oscillating body surface, being satisfied at
the mean (rest) position of the cylindrical surface.
5. The radiation condition that the disturbed surface of the fluid takes the form of regular
progressive outgoing gravity waves at large distances from the cylinder.
According to Wehausen and Laitone [1960], the complex potential at z of a pulsating point
source of unit strength at the point in the lower half plane is:
i k (z )

1
e
G* ( z, , t ) =
ln ( z ) ln z + 2 PV
dk cos( t )
2
k

0
e i ( z ) sin ( t )

Equation 3.46
so that the real point-source potential is:

H (x , y, ,, t ) = Re G* (z , , t )

Equation 3.47
where:
z = x +i y
Letting:
G( z , ) =

= + i

= i

= 2 g

i k ( z )

1
e
Re ln (z ) ln z + 2 PV
dk
2

0 k

i Re e i (z )

Equation 3.48
then:

H (x , y, ,, t ) = Re G (z , , t ) e i t

}
Equation 3.49

Equation 3.49 satisfies the radiation condition and also Equation 3.41 through Equation
3.44.
Another expression satisfying all these conditions is:
156

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

i t
H x, y, ,, t
= Re i G( z , ) e
2

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

}
Equation 3.410

Since the problem is linear, a superposition of Equation 3.49 and Equation 3.410 results in
the velocity potential:

( m ) ( x, y , t ) = Re Q( s ) G( z , ) e i t ds
C0

Equation 3.411
where C0 is the submerged contour of the cylindrical cross section at its mean (rest) position
and Q(s ) represents the complex source density as a function of the position along C0 .
Application of the kinematic boundary condition on the oscillating cylinder at z yields:

Re n Q(s ) G( z, ) ds = 0

C0

Im n Q(s ) G( z, ) ds = A( m ) n (m )

C0

( )
( )

Equation 3.412
where A( m ) denotes the amplitude of oscillation and n (m ) the direction cosine of the normal
velocity at z on the cylinder. Both A( m ) and n (m ) depend on the mode of motion of the
cylinder, as will be shown in the following section.
The fact that Q(s ) is complex implies that Equation 3.412 represent a set of two coupled
integral equations for the real functions Re {Q(s )} and Im{Q( s )} . The solution of these integral
equations and the evaluation of the kernel and potential integrals are described in the
following section and in Appendices II and III, respectively.

3.4.3 Solution of the Problem


Since ship sections are symmetrical, this investigation is confined to bodies with right and left
symmetry.
Take the x -axis to be coincident with the undisturbed free surface of a conventional twodimensional Cartesian co-ordinate system. Let the cross sectional contour C0 of the
submerged portion of the cylinder be in the lower half plane, the y -axis being the axis of
symmetry of C0 ; see Figure 3.41.

157

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Figure 3.41: Axes system and notations, as used by Frank [1967]


Select N + 1 points (i ,i ) of C0 to lie in the fourth quadrant so that (1 ,1 ) is located on the
negative y -axis. For partially immersed cylinders, (N +1 ,N +1 ) is on the positive x -axis. For
fully submerged bodies, N +1 = 1 and N +1 < 0 .
Connecting these N + 1 points by successive straight lines, N straight line segments are
obtained which, together with their reflected images in the third quadrant, yield an
approximation to the given contour as shown in Figure 3.41.
The co-ordinates, length and angle associated with the j -th segment are identified by the
subscript j , whereas the corresponding quantities for the reflected image in the third quadrant
are denoted by the subscript j , so that by symmetry j = + j and j = ++ j for
1 j N + 1.
Potentials and pressures are to be evaluated at the midpoint of each segment. The co-ordinates
of the midpoint of the i -th segment are:
+ i +1
+ i +1
xi = i
and
yi = i
for: 1 i N
2
2
Equation 3.413
The length of the i -th segment is:
si =

(i +1 i )2 + (i +1 i )2
Equation 3.414

while the angle made by the i -th segment with the positive x -axis is given by:
i

i = arctan i +1

i +1 i
Equation 3.415
The outgoing unit vector normal to the cross section at the i -th midpoint ( xi , yi ) is:
n i = i sin i j cos i
Equation 3.416
where i and j are unit vectors in the directions of increasing x and y , respectively.

158

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

The cylinder is forced into simple harmonic motion with radian frequency , according to the
displacement equation:
S ( m ) = A(m ) cos ( t )
Equation 3.417
for m = 2,3, 4 corresponding to sway, heave or roll, respectively.
The rolling oscillations are about an axis through a point (0, y0 ) in the symmetry plane of the
cylinder.
In the translation modes, any point on the cylinder moves with the velocity:
(2)

sway :

= i A( 2 ) sin ( t )
Equation 3.418

heave :

(3 )

= j A(3 ) sin ( t )
Equation 3.419

The rolling motion about (0, y 0 ) is illustrated in Figure 3.41.


Considering a point ( xi , yi ) on C0 , an inspection of this figure yields:

Ri = xi + ( yi y0 )
2

y y0

i = arctan i
x

y y0

= arcsin i
Ri

and

x
= arccos i
Ri
Therefore, by elementary two-dimensional kinematics, the unit vector in the direction of
increasing is:
i = i sin i + j cosi
y y0
x
= i
i + i j
Ri
Ri
so that:
roll :

(4 )

= Ri S (4 ) i

= A( 4 ) ( yi y0 ) i xi j sin ( t )
Equation 3.420
The normal components of the velocity vi
( xi , yi ) are:
sway :
heave :
roll :

( m)

= ni v

(m )

at the midpoint of the i -th segment

vi ( 2 ) = A(2 ) sin i sin ( t )

vi (3 ) = + A( 3 ) cos i sin ( t )
vi ( 4 ) = + A(4 ) {( yi y0 ) sin i + xi cosi } sin ( t )
Equation 3.421

Defining:
159

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

vi ( m )
A( m ) sin ( t )
then - consistent with the previously mentioned notation - the direction cosines for the three
modes of motion are:
sway : ni ( 2 ) = sin i
ni ( m ) =

heave :
roll :

ni (3 ) = + cosi
ni ( 4 ) = +( yi y0 ) sin i + xi cos i
Equation 3.422

Equation 3.422 illustrates that heaving is symmetrical, i.e., n i


( 2)

(2 )

(3)

(3 )

= n+ i . Swaying and
( 4)

(4 )

rolling, however, are anti-symmetrical modes, i.e., n i = n+ i and n i = n+ i .


Equation 3.412 is applied at the midpoints of each of the N segments and it is assumed that
over an individual segment the complex source strength Q(s ) remains constant, although it
varies from segment to segment. With these stipulations, the set of coupled integral equations
(Equation 3.412) becomes a set of 2 N linear algebraic equations in the unknowns:
(m)
(m)
Re Q (m ) (s j ) = Qj
and
Im Q( m ) (s j ) = QN + j

Thus, for i = 1,2,..., N :


N

+ Qj
j =1
N

(m )

I ij

(m)

}+ {Q
N

N+ j

j =1

(m )

J ij

(m )

}= 0

Q j ( m ) J ij ( m ) + QN + j (m ) I ij (m ) = A( m ) ni ( m )
j =1

j =1

Equation 3.423
where the superscript

(m )

denotes the mode of motion.

The ''influence coefficients'' I ij and J ij and the potential ( m ) ( xi , yi , t ) are evaluated in


Appendix II. The resulting velocity potential consists of a term in-phase with the displacement
and a term in-phase with the velocity.
Note: Most authors refer to this first term as a component in phase with the acceleration.
However due to the displacement Equation 3.417, Frank deemed it more appropriate
to refer to this term as being 180 degrees out-of-phase with the acceleration or inphase with the displacement.
(m)

( m)

The hydrodynamic pressure at ( xi , yi ) along the cylinder is obtained from the velocity
potential by means of the linearized Bernoulli equation:
(m )
p ( m ) ( xi , yi ,, t ) =
( xi , yi , , t )
t
Equation 3.424
as:

p ( m ) ( xi , yi , , t ) = p a

( m)

( xi , yi , ) cos ( t ) + pv (m ) ( xi , yi ,) sin ( t )
Equation 3.425
160

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
(m)

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

(m )

where p a and pv are the hydrodynamic pressures in-phase with the displacement and inphase with the velocity, respectively and denotes the density of the fluid.
As indicated by the notation of Equation 3.424 and Equation 3.425, the pressure as well as
the potential is a function of the oscillation frequency .
The hydrodynamic force or moment (when m = 4 ) per unit length along the cylinder,
necessary to sustain the oscillations, is the integral of p ( m ) n (m ) over the submerged contour
of the cross section C0 . It is assumed that the pressure at the i -th midpoint is the mean
pressure for the i -th segment, so that the integration reduces to a summation, whence:
N

M (m ) () = 2 p a ( m ) ( xi , yi , ) ni ( m ) s i
i =1
N

N (m ) () = 2 p v ( m ) ( xi , yi , ) ni ( m ) s i
i =1

Equation 3.426
for the added mass and damping forces or moments, respectively.
The velocity potentials for very small and very large frequencies are derived and discussed in
the next section.

3.4.4 Low and High Frequencies


For very small frequencies, i.e., as 0 , the free-surface condition in Equation 3.43 of the
section formulating the problem degenerates into the wall-boundary condition:

=0
y
Equation 3.427
on the surface of the fluid outside the cylinder, whereas for extremely large frequencies, i.e.,
when , the free-surface condition becomes the ''impulsive'' surface condition:
=0
Equation 3.428
on y = 0 and outside the cylinder.
Equation 3.42, Equation 3.44 and Equation 3.45 remain valid for both asymptotic cases.
The radiation condition is replaced by a condition of boundedness at infinity.
Therefore, there is a Neumann problem for the case 0 and a mixed problem when
. The appropriate complex potentials for a source of unit strength at a point in the
lower half plane are:
1
G0 ( z , ) =
ln ( z ) ln z + K0
2

)}

Equation 3.429
and:
G (z , ) =

)}

1
ln ( z ) ln z + K
2
Equation 3.430
161

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

for the Neuman and mixed problems, respectively, where K0 and K are not yet specified
constants.
Let:
a ( x, y ,,) = Re{Ga ( z , )}
so that the velocity potentials for the m -th mode of motion are:
(m )
( m)
a ( x, y ) = Qa (s ) a (x , y, ,) ds
C0

Equation 3.431
(m )

for a = 0 , and a = , where Qa is the expression for the source strength as a function of
position along the submerged contour of the cross section C0 .
An analysis similar to the one in the section on formulating the problem leads to the integral
equation:
( m)
n Qa (s ) a (x , y, ,) ds = A( m ) n (m )

( )

C0

Equation 3.432
which - after application at the N segmental midpoint - yields a set of N linear algebraic
equations in the N unknown source strengths Q j .
It remains to be shown whether these two problems are, in the language of potential theory,
well posed, i.e., whether the solutions to these problems lead to unique forces or moments.
The mixed problem raises no difficulty, since as z , G (z , ) 0 . In fact K = 0 , which
can be inferred from the pulsating source-potential Equation 3.48 by letting .
Considering the Neumann problem, note that the constant K0 in the Green's function equation
(Equation 3.429) yields by integration an additive constant K to the potential. However, for
a completely submerged cylinder the cross sectional contour C0 is a simply closed curve, so
that the contribution of K in integrating the product of the pressure with the direction cosine
of the body-surface velocity vanishes. For partially submerged bodies C0 is no longer closed.
But since n i

( m)

K n

= n+ i

(m )

(m )

for m being even,

ds = 0

C0

so that the swaying force and rolling moment are unique.


The heaving force on a partially submerged cylinder is not unique for, in this case,
(3)
(3)
n i = n+ i , so that:

K n

(3 )

ds 0

C0

The constant K0 may be obtained by letting 0 in the pulsating source-potential Equation


3.48.

3.4.5 Irregular Frequencies


John [1950] proved the existence and uniqueness of the solutions to the three- and twodimensional potential problems pertaining to oscillations of rigid bodies in a free surface. The

162

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

solutions were subject to the provisions that no point of the immersed surface of the body
would be outside a cylinder drawn vertically downward from the intersection of the body with
the free surface and that the free surface would be intersected orthogonally by the body in its
mean or rest position.
John [1950] also showed that for a set of discrete ''irregular'' frequencies the Green's functionintegral equation method failed to give a solution. He demonstrated that the irregular
frequencies occurred when the following adjoint interior-potential problem had eigenfrequencies.
Let (x, y ) be such that:
1.

2.

2 2
+
= 0 inside the cylinder in the region bounded by the immersed surface of the
x 2 y 2
body and the extension of the free surface inside the cylinder.

k = 0 on the extension of the free surface inside the cylinder, k being the wave
y
number corresponding to the irregular frequency k , k = 1,2,3,etc.

3. = 0 on the surface of the cylinder below the free surface.


For a rectangular cylinder with beam B and draft T , the irregular wave numbers may be
easily obtained by separation of variables in the Laplace equation. Separating variables gives
the eigen-functions:
k x
k y
k = Bk sin
for: k = 1,2,3,etc.
sinh
B
B
where Bk are Fourier coefficients to be determined from an appropriate boundary condition.
Applying the free surface condition (Equation 3.42) on y = T for 0 < x < B , the eigen-wave
numbers (or irregular wave numbers):
k
k T
k =
coth
B
B
Equation 3.433
are obtained for k = 1, 2, 3, ..., etc.
In particular, the lowest such irregular wave number is given by:

T
1 = coth
B
B
Equation 3.434
Keeping T fixed in Equation 3.434 but letting B vary and setting b = B , then from the
Taylor expansion:
3
1

b T (b T )
b coth[b T ] = b
+

+ ......
3
45
b T

it is seen that as b 0 , which is equivalent to B , 1 1 T .


Therefore, for rectangular cylinders of draft T ,
163

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

1 1 T
Equation 3.435
is a relation that John proved for general shapes complying with the restrictions previously
outlined.
For a beam-to-draft ratio of B T = 2.5 : 1 = 1.48 , while for B T = 2.0 : 1 = 1.71 .
At an irregular frequency the matrix of influence coefficients of Equation 3.423 becomes
singular as the number of defining points per cross section increases without limit, i,e., as
N . In practice, with finite N , the determinant of this matrix becomes very small, not
only at the irregular frequency but also at an interval about this frequency. This interval can be
reduced by increasing the number of defining points N for the cross section.
Most surface vessels have nearly constant draft over the length of the ship and the maximum
beam occurs at or near amidships, where the cross section is usually almost rectangular, so
that for most surface ships the first irregular frequency 1 is less for the midsection than for
any other cross section.
As an example, for a ship with a 7:1 length-to-beam and a 5:2 beam-to-draft, the first irregular
wave encounter frequency - in non-dimensional form with L denoting the ship length occurs at 1 L g 5.09 , which is beyond the range of practical interest for ship-motion
analysis.
Therefore, for slender surface vessels, the phenomenon of the first irregular frequency of
wave encounter is not too important.
Increasing the number of contour line elements (or panels in 3-D) does not remove the
irregular frequency, but tends to restrict the effects to a narrower band around it; see for
instance Huijsmans [1996]. It should be mentioned too that irregular frequencies appear for
free surface piercing bodies only; fully submerged bodies do not display these characteristics.
An effective method to reduce the effects of irregular frequencies is ''closing'' the body by
means of a discretisation of the free surface inside the body, i.e. putting a ''lid'' on the free
surface inside the body.
See here the computed added mass and damping of a hemisphere in Figure 3.42. The solid
line in this figure results from including the ''lid''.
20 00

1 25 0

su rge /sw a y

1 00 0

Damping (ton/s)

Mass (ton)

15 00

h ea ve
10 00

75 0

h ea ve
50 0

su rge /sw a y

5 00

25 0

0
0

F re qu e ncy (ra d/ s)

F re qu en cy (ra d /s)

Figure 3.42: Effect of use of ''Lid-Method'' on irregular frequencies


164

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

3.4.6 Appendices
3.4.6.1 Appendix I: Evaluation of Principle Value Integrals
The real and imaginary parts of the principle value integral:
i k (z )
e
PV
dk
k
0
are used in evaluating some of the kernel and potential integrals.
The residue of the integrand at k = is e i ( z ) , so that:
i k (z )
i k ( z )
e
e
PV
dk =
dk i e i (z )
0 k
0 k
Equation 3.436
where the path of integration is the positive real axis indented into the upper half plane about
k = .
Notice hereby that:
= 2 g > 0
Im {z} < 0
Im { } 0

The transformation = i (k ) z converts the contour integral on the right hand side
of Equation 3.436 to:
i k ( z )

e
ew
i
(z )

dk
=

dw
0 k

w
i (z )
x > 0
i 2
= e i (z ) E1 i z +
for :

x < 0
0
+ ln i z +

i 2
x > 0

= e i ( z ) ( 1)n i z n +
for :
0
x

<
0


n n!

n =1
where = 0.57722 is the well-known Euler-Mascheroni constant.
The definition of E1 has been given by Abramovitz and Stegun [1964].
Setting:
Im i z
+
r = i z
and
= arctan
Re i z
the following expression is obtained for Equation 3.436:

))

)}
( )}

{
{

165

(
(

)}
)}

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

PV
0

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

e i k (z )
dk = e ( y + ) {cos ( ( x )) i sin ( ( x ))}
k

r n cos (n )

+
ln
(
r
)
+

n n!
n =1

x > 0 r n sin (n )
i

2 for : x < 0 +
n n!
n =1

Equation 3.437
Separating Equation 3.437 into its real and imaginary parts yields:
k( y+ )
e
cos(k ( x ))
C (r , ) cos( ( x ))
PV
dk = e ( y + )

k
+ S (r , ) sin ( ( x ))
0
C (r , ) sin ( ( x ))
e k ( y + ) sin (k ( x ))
dk = e ( y + )

k
S (r , ) cos( ( x ))
0

PV

Equation 3.438
provided that:

r n cos(n )
C (r , ) = + ln (r ) +

n n!
n =1

x > 0
r sin (n )
S (r , ) = +
for :

+
n n!
x < 0
n =1
2

3.4.6.2 Appendix II: Evaluation of Kernel Integrals


The influence coefficients of Equation 3.423 are:

1


ln ( z ) ln z +

2
ds ( 1)m
i k (z )
1

e
s + j PV

dk


0
(m )

I ij = Re n i

1 ln z + ln ( z + ) +

2

ds



i k (z + )

s j 1 PV e

dk

k
0


z = zi

{(

)}

Equation 3.439
and:
J ij

(m )

= Re ni

i (z )

m
i ( z + )

e
ds ( 1) e
ds
s

s j
+j
z = zi
Equation 3.440
166

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Notice that in the complex plane with z i on si :

dF ( z )

Re n i F (z ) z = z i = Re i ei i

dz z = z i

{(

Considering the term containing ln ( z ) , it is evident that the kernel integral is singular
when i = j , so that the indicated differentiation cannot be performed under the integral sign.
However, in that case one may proceed as follows.
Since:
= + i
and
d = d + i d
= ds cos j + i ds sin j
i

= e j ds
for along the j -th segment.
Therefore:
ds = e i j d
and:

Re n i

i e i j


ln ( z ) ds = Re d j+1 i j

s

dz e d ln ( z )
j
z= z j
z = z j
j
i

j+ 1

= Re d
ln (z ) d
dz

z = z j
j

Setting ' = z , the last integral becomes:

z j

d

'
'
Re i
ln d
= arg (z j j ) arg (z j j + 1 )

dz z j +1

z =z j

( )

Equation 3.441
If i j , differentiation under the integral sign may be performed, so that:

( L1 ) = Re ni

ln ( z ) ds
s

j
z= zi

(x ) + ( y
(
)
= sin ln
(x ) + ( y

j +1

j )

j +1 )

y j
y j + 1
arctan i

+ cos(i + j ) arctan i

xi j +1

xi j

167

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003
Equation 3.442

For the integral containing the ln z term, ds = e i j d , so that:

( L2 ) = Re ni

ln z ds
s

j
z = zi

(x )2 + ( y + )2
i
j
i
j

= sin (i + j ) ln
2
2
(xi j +1 ) + ( yi + j +1 )

y + j
y + j +1
arctan i

+ cos (i + j ) arctan i

j
j +1
i
i

Equation 3.443
The kernel integral, containing the principal value integrals, is:

( L5 ) = Re n i

i k (z )

ds PV
dk
s

k
0
j
z= zi

j
i k ( z i )

d
e
i ( i + j )
= Re i e
d
PV
dk
k
d

j +1
k ( yi + j )

e
cos (k (xi j ))
+ PV
dk
k

0
= sin (i + j )

(
y
+

e i j+1 cos(k (xi j +1 ))

dk
PV
k
0

k ( yi + j )

e
sin (k (x i j ))
dk
+ PV
k

0
cos(i + j )

(
y
+

e i j +1 sin (k (xi j +1 ))

dk
PV
k
0

Equation 3.444
The first integral on the right hand side of Equation 3.440 becomes:

168

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

( L7 ) = Re n i

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003


i (z )

e
ds
s

j
z = zi

+ e ( yi + j ) cos ( (xi j ))
= sin (i + j ) ( y + )

e i j +1 cos ( (xi j +1 ))
+ e ( y i + j ) sin ( (xi j ))
+ cos(i + j ) ( y + )

e i j +1 sin ( (xi j + 1 ))
Equation 3.445

The kernel integrals over the image segments are obtained from Equation 3.443 through
Equation 3.445 by replacing j , j +1 and j with j = j , ( j +1) = j +1 and j = j ,
respectively.
3.4.6.3 Appendix III: Potential Integrals
The velocity potential of the m -th mode of oscillation at the i -th midpoint ( xi , yi ) is:
( m ) ( xi , yi , t ) =

i k (z i )

e
dk ds
ln ( zi ) ln zi + 2 PV
k
s j
0

1
m
Q j Re ( 1)

2 j =1

i k ( z i + )

ln z + ln (z + ) + 2 PV e
i
i
0 k dk ds
s
j

cos( t )
m
m QN + j Re e i (z i ) ds ( 1) e i ( z i + ) ds
j =1
s j
sin ( t )
sj

Equation 3.446
The integration of the ln ( zi ) term is straight forward, yielding:

169

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Re ln ( z i ) ds = + cos j
s j

+ (x ) ln (x )2 + ( y )2 + ( )

i
j
i
j
i
j
j
j +1

2
2

(
)
(
)
(
)

ln

+
y

i
j +1
i
j +1
i
j +1

yi j
y i j +1
+ ( y i j +1 ) arctan

( y i j ) arctan

xi j +1
x

i
j

+ sin j

+ (y ) ln (x )2 + ( y )2 + ( )

i
j
i
j
i
j
j
j +1

2
2

(
y

ln
(
x

)
+
(
y

i
j +1
i
j +1
i
j +1

y i j
y j +1
(xi j +1 ) arctan i

+ (xi j ) arctan

x i j +1
x

i
j

Equation 3.447

In the integration of the ln z term, note that j and j +1 are replaced by j and j +1 ,
respectively.
To evaluate the potential integral containing the principal value integral, proceed in the
following manner.
For an arbitrary z in the fluid domain:
j +1
j +1
i k ( z )

e
dk
i j
i k (z )
d
ds PV 0 k dk = e PV 0 k e

=e

i j

e i k z
PV
dk

k
0

j +1

i k

i k

e i k z e j +1 ei k j

dk

k
k
0
where the change of integration is permissible since only one integral requires a principle
value interpretation.
i j

= e

PV

After dividing by and multiplying by k + k under the integral sign, the last expression
becomes:
i k
i

i k (z j+1 )
i k (z j )

i e j i k z e j+1 ei k j
e
e

dk + PV
dk PV
dk

k
k
k
0

0
0
Equation 3.448
Regarding the first integral in Equation 3.448 as a function of z :
170

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

F(z ) = e

i k z

i k

j+1

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

e i k j
dk
k
Equation 3.449

Differentiating Equation 3.449 with respect to z gives:

i k ( z j +1 )

i k ( z j )
F ' ( z ) = i e
dk e
dk
0
0

1
1
=

z 1 z j +1
So:
F ( z ) = ln z j ln z j +1 + K

) (

Equation 3.450
where K is a constant of integration to be determined presently. Since F (z ) is defined and
analytic for all z in the lower half plane and since by Equation 3.449, lim {F ( z )} = 0 , it
z

follows from Equation 3.450 that K = 0 .


Therefore:
i k (z i )

( K5 ) = Re ds PV e
dk
k
s j

ln z i j ln z i j +1

i e i j

(
z

(
z

i
i
= Re

j +1
j
e
e
+ PV
dk PV
dk

0
0

+ sin j

(xi j )2 + ( yi + j )2

ln
2
2

(xi j +1 ) + ( yi + j +1 )


k ( yi + j )
e k ( yi + j+1 ) cos (k (x i j +1 ))

e
cos(k (xi j ))
PV
dk PV
dk
1
k
k

0
0
=

+ cos j

y i + j
y i + j +1

arctan

+ arctan

xi j +1
x

i
j

k ( yi + j )
k ( yi + j +1 )
e

sin
(
k

(
x

)
)
e

sin
(
k

(
x

)
)

i
j
i
j
+
1
PV
dk PV
dk

k
k
0
0

) (

Equation 3.451
The integration of the potential component in-phase with the velocity over s j gives:

171

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

( K7 ) = Re e i (z ) ds
i

s j

( y i + j )
sin ( (xi j ) j )
1 + e
= ( y + )

e i j +1 sin ( (xi j + 1 ) j )

Equation 3.452

172

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

3.5 Comparisons between Calculated Potential Data


Figure 3.51 compares the calculated coefficients for an amidships cross section of a
container vessel by the three previous methods:
1. Ursell-Tasai's method with 2-parameter Lewis conformal mapping.
2. Ursell-Tasai's method with 10-parameter close-fit conformal mapping.
3. Frank's pulsating source method.
300

500

H eave

S wa y

Mass Coefficient

22

R oll

M 33

400

4250

'

M 44

4 000

4000

200
300

3 000

3750

200

2 000

3500

1 000

3250

M id sh i p s e cti o n
o f a c o n ta i n e r sh ip

100
100
0

0
0

20 0

0 .5 1 .0 1 .5 2 .0 2.5

S way

0
0

150

'

Damping Coefficient

5 000

'

'

0 .5 1 .0 1 .5 2 .0 2 .5

He ave

3000
0 .5 1 .0 1 .5 2 .0 2 .5
0

3 00

20 0

N 33

'

Fra nk

15 0

100

0 .5 1 .0 1 .5 2 .0 2 .5

Ro ll

'

N 22

S way - Ro ll
Roll - Sway
'
'
M 2 4 = M 42

N 44

C lo se-fit

2 00

15 0

10 0

10 0

50

1 00

50

L ew is

50

Sw ay - Ro ll
Roll - S way
'

'

N 24 = N 42
0

0
0 0 . 5 1 .0 1 .5 2 .0 2 .5

f requ ency (ra d/s)

0
0 0 .5 1 .0 1.5 2.0 2. 5
f re qu ency (rad/ s)

0
0

0 .5 1.0 1 .5 2.0 2 .5
f req ue ncy (ra d/ s)

0 0 .5 1.0 1.5 2. 0 2 .5
f requ en cy (rad /s)

Figure 3.51: Comparison of various calculated potential coefficients


With the exception of the roll motions, the three results are very close. The roll motion
deviation, predicted with the Lewis conformal mapping method, is caused by a too much
rounded description of the ''bilge'' by the simple Lewis transformation.
A disadvantage of Frank's method could be the relatively large computing time, when
compared with Ursell-Tasai's method. However - because of the significantly increased
computing speed of nowadays computers - this should not be a problem anymore.
Generally, it is advised to use the very robust Ursell-Tasai's method with 10 parameter closefit conformal mapping.
For submerged sections, bulbous sections and sections with an area coefficient s less than
0.4 however, Frank's pulsating source method should be used.

173

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

174

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

3.6 Estimated Potential Surge Coefficients


An equivalent longitudinal section, being constant over the ship's breadth B , is defined by:
sectional breadth Bx
=
ship length L
sectional draught d x
=
amidships draught d
sectional area coefficient CMx =
block coefficient CB
By using a Lewis transformation of this equivalent longitudinal section to the unit circle, the
two-dimensional potential mass M 11* and damping N11* can be calculated in a similar manner
as has been described for the two-dimensional potential mass and damping of sway, M 22 ' and
N 22' .
With these two-dimensional values, the total potential mass and damping of surge are defined
by:
*
M 11 = B M 11
N11 = B N11*
Equation 3.61
in which B is the breadth of the ship.
These frequency-dependent hydrodynamic coefficients do not include three-dimensional
effects. Only the hydrodynamic mass coefficient - of which a large three-dimensional effect is
expected - will be adapted here empirically.
According to Tasai [1961], the zero-frequency potential mass for sway can be expressed in
Lewis-coefficients:
2


dx
(1 a1 )2 + 3 a3 2
M 22 ( 0) =
2 1 a1 + a3
'

}
Equation 3.62

When using this formula for surge, the total potential mass of surge is defined by:
M 11 ( 0) = B M 11* ( 0)
Equation 3.63
A frequency-independent total hydrodynamic mass coefficient is estimated empirically by
Sargent and Kaplan [1974] as a proportion of the total mass of the ship :
a
M 11 (S & K ) =

2a
with:
a=

1 b2
b3

1 + b

ln
2 b
1 b

B
b = 1
L

where

Equation 3.64

175

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Figure 3.61: Hydrodynamic mass for surge


With this hydrodynamic mass value, a correction factor for three-dimensional effects has
been determined:
M (S & K )
= 11
M 11 ( = 0)
Equation 3.65
The three-dimensional effects for the potential damping of surge are ignored.
So, the potential mass and damping of surge are defined by:
*
M 11 = B M 11
N11 = B N11*
Equation 3.66
To obtain a uniform approach during all ship motions calculations, the cross sectional twodimensional values of the hydrodynamic mass and damping have to be obtained.
Based on results of numerical 3-D studies with a Wigley hull form by Adegeest [1994], a
proportionality of both the two-dimensional hydrodynamic mass and damping with the
absolute values of the derivatives of the cross sectional areas Ax in the xb -direction has been
found:
dAx
dAx
dxb
dxb
M 11' =
M 11
and
N11' =
N11
dAx
dAx
L dxb dxb
L dxb dxb
Equation 3.67

176

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Viscous Damping

The strip theory is based on the potential flow theory. This holds that viscous effects are
neglected, which can deliver serious problems when predicting roll motions at resonance
frequencies. In practice, viscous roll damping effects can be accounted for by empirical
formulas. For surge and roll, additional damping coefficients have to be introduced. Because
of these additional contributions to the damping are from a viscous origin mainly, it is not
possible to calculate the total damping in a pure theoretical way.

177

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

4.1 Surge Damping


The total damping for surge B11t = B11 + B11v consists of a potential part, B11 , and an
additional viscous part, B11v . At forward ship speed V , the total damping coefficient, B11t ,
can be determined simply from the resistance-speed curve of the ship in still water, Rsw (V ) :
d {Rsw (V )}
B11t = B11 + B11v =
dV
Equation 4.11

4.1.1 Total Surge Damping


For a rough estimation of the still water resistance use can be made of a somewhat modified
empirical formula of Troost [1955], in principle valid at the ship's service speed for hull forms
with a block coefficient CB between about 0.60 and 0.80:
0.0152
Rsw = Ct 2 3 V 2
with: Ct 0.0036 +
log 10 {L} + 0.60
Equation 4.12
in which:

L
V

volume of displacement of the ship in m3 ,


length of the ship in m,
forward ship speed in m/s.

This total resistance coefficient Ct is given in Figure 4.11 as a function of the ship length.

Figure 4.11: Total Still Water Resistance Coefficient of Troost


Then the total surge damping coefficient at forward ship speed V becomes:
B11t = 2 Ct 2 3 V

178

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

4.1.2 Viscous Surge Damping


This total damping coefficient includes a viscous part, which can be derived from the
frictional part of the ship's resistance, defined by the 1957 ITTC-line:
1
0.075
V L
R f (V ) = V 2 S
with: Rn =
2
2

{ln ( Rn ) 2}
Equation 4.13
in which:

S
Rn

kinematic viscosity of seawater


wetted surface of the hull of the ship
Reynolds number

From this empirical formula follows the pure viscous part of the additional damping
coefficient at forward ship speed V :
d {R f (V )}
B11v =
dV
Equation 4.14
which can be obtained numerically.

179

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

4.2 Roll Damping


In case of pure free rolling in still water (free decay test), the uncoupled linear equation of the
roll motion about the centre of gravity G is given by:
( I xx + A44 ) && + ( B44 + B44v ) & + C44 = 0
with:
2

A44 = a 44 + OG a42 + OG a24 + OG a22


2

B44 = b44 + OG b42 + OG b24 + OG b22


B44 v = b44 v
C44 = g GM
Equation 4.21
For zero forward speed: a42 = a24 and b42 = b24 .
Equation 4.21 can be rewritten as:
2
&& + 2 & + 0 = 0
with:
B + B44 v
2 = 44
(quotient of damping and moment of inertia)
I xx + A44
C44
0 2 =
(natural roll frequency squared)
I xx + A44
Equation 4.22
The non-dimensional roll damping coefficient, , is given by:

=
0
=

B44 + B44 v
2 ( I xx + A44 ) C44
Equation 4.23

This damping coefficient is written as a fraction between the actual damping coefficient,
B44 + B44 v , and the critical damping coefficient, B44 cr = 2 (I xx + A44 ) C44 ; so for critical
damping: cr = 1 .
Herewith, the equation of motion can be re-written as:
2
&& + 2 0 & + 0 = 0
Equation 4.24
Suppose the vessel is deflected to an initial heel angle, a , in still water and then released. The
solution of the equation of motion of this decay becomes:

= a e t cos(0 t ) +
sin (0 t )
0

Equation 4.25
180

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Then, the logarithmic decrement of the motion is:


T = 0 T
(t )
= ln

(t + T )
Equation 4.26
Because = 0 2 for the natural frequency oscillation and the damping is small so that
2

2 << 0 , one can neglect 2 here and use 0 ; this leads to:
2

0 T T = 2
Equation 4.27
The non-dimensional total roll damping is given now by:
(t )
1
=
ln

2 (t + T )
0
= ( B44 + B44 v )
2 C44
Equation 4.28
The non-potential part of the total roll damping coefficient follows from the average value of
by:
2 C44
B44 v =
B44
0
Equation 4.29

4.2.1 Experimental Determination


The -values can easily been found when results of free rolling experiments with a model in
still water are available, see Figure 4.21.

Figure 4.21: Time History of a Roll Decay Test


The results of free decay tests can be presented in different ways:
181

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

1. Generally they are presented by plotting the non-dimensional damping coefficient,


obtained from two successive positive or negative maximum roll angles a i and a i+2 , by:
=


1
ln a i
2 a i+2

versus: a =

a i + a i+2
2
Equation 4.210

2. To avoid spreading in the successively determined -values, caused by a possible zeroshift of the measuring signal, double amplitudes can be used instead:
a i+1
a i a i+1 + a i+ 2 a i+3
1
=
ln a i
versus: a =

2 a i+2 a i +3
4

) (

Equation 4.211
3. Sometimes the results of free rolling tests are presented by:
a
versus: a
a
with the absolute value of the average of two successive positive or negative
maximum roll angles, given by:
a + a i+1
a = i
2
and the absolute value of the difference of the average of two successive positive or
negative maximum roll angles, given by:
a = a i a i+1
Then the total non-dimensional roll damping coefficient becomes:


2+ a

1
a

=
ln

2
a
2

a
Equation 4.212
The decay coefficient can therefore be estimated from the decaying oscillation by
determining the ratio between any pair of successive (double) amplitudes. When the damping
is very small and the oscillation decays very slowly, several estimates of the decay can be
obtained from a single record. It is obvious that for a linear system a constant -value should
be found in relation to a .
Note that these decay tests provide no information about the relation between the potential
coefficients and the frequency of oscillation. Indeed, this is impossible since decay tests are
carried out at only one frequency: the natural frequency. These experiments deliver no
information on the relation with the frequency of oscillation.
The method is not really practical when is much greater than about 0.2 and is in any case
strictly valid for small values of only. Luckily, this is generally the case.
Be aware that this damping coefficient is determined by assuming an uncoupled roll motion
(no other motions involved). Strictly, this damping coefficient is not valid for the actual
coupled motions of a ship that will be moving in all directions simultaneously.
182

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

The successively found values for , plotted on base of the average roll amplitude, will often
have a non-linear behaviour as illustrated in Figure 4.22.
0.04
Produc t c arrier, V = 0 knots
mean linear and cubic damping
mean linear and quadratic damping
second ex periment, negative angles
second ex periment, positiv e angles
first experiment, negative angles
first experiment, pos itive angles

roll damping coefficient (-)

0.03

0.02

0.01

0
0

mean roll amplitude (deg)

Figure 4.22: Roll Damping Coefficients


For a behaviour like this, it will be found:
= 1 + 2 a
Equation 4.213
while sometimes even a cubic roll damping coefficient, 3 a , has to be added to this
formula.
This non-linear behaviour holds that during frequency domain calculations, the damping term
is depending on the - so far unknown - solution for the transfer function of roll: a a . With a
known wave amplitude, a , this problem can be solved in an iterative manner. A less accurate
method is to use a fixed a .
2

4.2.2 Empirical Formula for Barges


From model experiments with rectangular barges - with its center of gravity, G , in the water
line - it has been found by Journee [1991]:
2
B
1 = 0.0013
= 1 + 2 a
with:
d
2 = 0.50
Equation 4.214
in which B is the breadth and d is the draft of the barge.

4.2.3 Empirical Method of Miller


183

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

According to Miller [1974], the non-dimensional total roll damping coefficient, , can be
obtained by:
= 1 + 2 a
with:
2
3
Fn
L
L Fn Fn
1 = CV 0.00085
+
+ 2
B GM Cb Cb
Cb

l bk
rb 3
2 = 19.25 Abk
+ 0.0024 L B
3
rb

L B d Cb
Equation 4.215
where:
Abk = lbk hbk
lbk
hbk
rb
L
B
d
Cb
GM
Fn
a
CV

one sided area of bilge keel (m2 )


length of bilge keel (m)
height of bilge keel (m)
distance center line of water plane to turn of bilge (m)
(first point at which turn of bilge starts, relative to water plane)
length of ship (m)
breadth of ship (m)
draft of ship (m)
block coefficient (-)
initial metacentric height (m)
Froude number (-)
amplitude of roll (rad)
correction factor on 1 for speed effect (-)
(in the original formulation of Miller: CV = 1.0 )

Generally CV = 1.0 , but (according to an experienced user of computer code SEAWAY) for
slender ships, like frigates, a suitable value for CV seems to be:
CV = 4.85 3.00 GM
Equation 4.216

4.2.4 Semi-Empirical Method of Ikeda


Because the viscous part of the roll damping acts upon the viscosity of the fluid significantly,
it is not possible to calculate the total roll damping coefficient in a pure theoretical way.
Besides this, also experiments showed a non-linear behaviour of viscous parts of the roll
damping.
Sometimes, for applications in frequency domain, an equivalent linear roll damping
(1 )
coefficient, B44v , has to be determined. This coefficient can be obtained by stipulating that

184

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

an equivalent linear roll damping dissipates an identical amount of energy as the non-linear
(2 )
roll damping. This results for a linearised quadratic roll damping coefficient, B44v , into:
B44 v

(1 )

& & dt =B44v ( 2 ) & & & dt

or with some algebra:


8
B44 v (1 ) =
a B44 v ( 2 )
3

Equation 4.217
For the estimation of the non-potential parts of the roll damping, use has been made of work
published by Ikeda, Himeno and Tanaka [1978]. A few sub-ordinate parts have been modified
and this empirical method is called here the ''Ikeda method''.
This Ikeda method estimates the following linear components of the roll damping coefficient
of a ship:
B44 S a correction on the potential roll damping coefficient due to forward speed,
B44 F the frictional roll damping coefficient,
B44 E the eddy making roll damping coefficient,
B44 L the lift roll damp ing coefficient and
B44 K the bilge keel roll damping coefficient.
So, the additional - mainly viscous - roll damping coefficient B44V is given by:
B44V = B44 S + B44 F + B44 E + B44 L + B44 K
Equation 4.218
Ikeda, Himeno and Tanaka [1978] claim fairly good agreements between their prediction
method and experimental results. They conclude that the method can be used safely for
ordinary ship forms, which conclusion has been confirmed by the author too. But for unusual
ship forms, for very full ship forms and for ships with a very large breadth to draft ratio the
method is not always accurate sufficiently.
For numerical reasons three restrictions have to be made:
if, locally, s > 0.999 then: s = 0.999 .

if, locally, OG < Ds s then: OG = Ds s .


if a calculated component of the viscous roll damping coefficient becomes less than zero,
this component has to be set to zero.

4.2.4.1 Notations of Ikeda et.al.


In this description of the Ikeda method, the notation of the authors (Ikeda, Himeno and
Tanaka) is maintained as far as could be possible here:

density of water

kinematic viscosity of water


g
acceleration of gravity
V
forward ship speed
Rn
Reynolds number

circular roll frequency


185

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

a
L
B
D
CM
CB
SL L D
Sf

roll amplitude
length of the ship
breadth
amidships draught
amidships section coefficient
block coefficient
lateral area
wetted hull surface area

OG

distance of centre of gravity above still water level, positive upwards


(this sign convention deviates from that in the paper of Ikeda)
sectional breadth water line
sectional draft
sectional area
sectional area coefficient
sectional half breadth to draft ratio
sectional Lewis coefficient
sectional Lewis coefficient
sectional Lewis scale factor
average distance between roll axis and hull surface

Bs
Ds
As
s
H0
a1
a3
Ms
rf
LO

hk
Lk
rk
fk

distance point of taking representative angle of attack to roll axis,


approximated by LO = 0.3 D
distance of centre of action of lift force in roll motion to roll axis,
approximated by LR = 0.5 D
height of the bilge keels
length of the bilge keels
distance between roll axis and bilge keel
correction for increase of flow velocity at the bilge

Cp

pressure coefficient

lm
rb

lever of the moment


local radius of the bilge circle

LR

4.2.4.2 Effect of Forward Speed, B44 S


Ikeda obtained an empirical formula for the three-dimensional forward speed correction on
the zero speed potential damping by making use of the general characteristics of a doublet
flow model. Two doublets have represented the rolling ship: one at the stern and one at the
bow of the ship.
With this, semi-theoretically the forward speed effect on the linear potential damping
coefficient has been approximated as a fraction of the potential damping coefficient by:

186

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

A2 + 1 + ( A2 1) tanh [20 ( 0.3)]


1.0
B44 S = B44 0.5
2
150 ( 0 .25 )

+ (2 A1 A2 1) e

Equation 4.219
with:
B44
= V g
D = 2 D g

potential roll damping coefficient of the ship (about G )


non-dimensional circular roll frequency
non-dimensional circular roll frequency squared

A1 = 1.0 + D 1 .2 e 2 D
A2 = 0.5 + D

1 .0

2 D

maximum value of B44 at = 0.25


minimum value of B44 at large

4.2.4.3 Frictional Roll Damping, B44 F


Kato deduced semi-empirical formulas for the frictional roll damping from experimental
results of circular cylinders, wholly immersed in the fluid. An effective Reynolds number of
the roll motion was defined by:
2

r
0.512 f
a
Rn =

Equation 4.220
In here, for ship forms the average distance between the roll axis and the hull surface can be
approximated by:
S
(0.887 + 0.145 CB ) f + 2 OG
L
rf =

Equation 4.221
with a wetted hull surface area S f , approximated by:
S f = L (1.7 D + CB B)

Equation 4.222
The relation between the density, kinematic viscosity and temperture of fresh water and sea
water are given in Figure 4.23.

187

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

1030

2.0

Sea Water

D ensity (kg/m )

Kinematic Viscosity (m s)

1020

1010

1.5
Sea Water

Fresh Water
1.0

1000
Fresh Water

990

0.5
0

10

20

30

10

20

30

Temperature ( C)

T emperature ( C)

Figure 4.23: Relation between density, kinematic viscosity and temperature of water
When eliminating the temperature of water, the following relation can express the kinematic
viscosity into the density of water in the kg-m-s system:
fresh wate r : 10 6 = 1.442 + 0.3924 ( 1000 ) + 0.07424 ( 1000)2
sea water : 106 = 1.063 + 0.1039 ( 1025) + 0.02602 ( 1025)2

Equation 4.223
as given in Figure 4.24.
Salt Water

20

20

Kinematic Viscosity *10 (m s)


0
Temperature ( C )

25

Kinematic Viscosity *10 (m s)


0
Temperature ( C )

Fresh Water
25

15

10

15

10

5
Viscosity Actual
Viscosity Polynomial
Temperature

0
997

998

Viscosity Actual
Viscosity Polynomial
T emperature

999

1000
3

0
1023

1024

1025

1026

1027

1028

Density Fresh Water (kg/m )

Density Salt Water (kg/m )

Figure 4.24: Kinematic viscosity as a function of density


Kato expressed the skin friction coefficient as:
C f = 1.328 Rn 0 .5 + 0.014 Rn 0. 114
Equation 4.224
The first part in this expression represents the laminar flow case. The second part has been
ignored by Ikeda, but has been included here.
Using this, the quadratic roll damping coefficient due to skin friction at zero forward ship
speed is expressed as:
188

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
B44 F 0 ( 2 ) =

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

1
rf 3 S f C f
2
Equation 4.225

This frictional roll damping component increases slightly with forward speed.
Semi-theoretically, Tamiya deduced a modification coefficient for the effect of forward speed
on the friction component. Accurate enough from a practical point of view, this results into the
following formula for the speed dependent frictional damping coefficient:
1
V
B44 F (2 ) = r f 3 S f C f 1.0 + 4.1

2
L

Equation 4.226
Then, the equivalent linear roll damping coefficient due to skin friction is expressed as:
8
1
V
B44 F = a rf 3 S f C f 1.0 + 4.1

L
3
2

Equation 4.227
Ikeda confirmed the use of his formula for the three-dimensional turbulent boundary layer
over the hull of an oscillating ellipsoid in roll motion.
4.2.4.4 Eddy Making Damping, B44 E
At zero forward speed the eddy making roll damping for the naked hull is mainly caused by
vortices, generated by a two-dimensional separation. From a number of experiments with twodimensional cylinders it was found that for a naked hull this component of the roll moment is
proportional to the roll frequency squared and the roll amplitude squared. This means that the
corresponding quadratic roll damping coefficient does not depend on the
period parameter but on the hull form only.
When using a simple form for the pressure distribution on the hull surface it appears that the
pressure coefficient C p is a function of the ratio of the maximum relative velocity U max to
the mean velocity U mean on the hull surface:
U
= max
U mean
Equation 4.228
The C p relation was obtained from experimental roll damping data of two-dimensional
models. These experimental results are fitted by:
C p = 0.35 e 2.0 e0 .187 + 1.50
Equation 4.229
The value of around a cross section is approximated by the potential flow theory for a
rotating Lewis form cylinder in an infinite fluid.
An estimation of the local maximum distance between the roll axis and the hull surface, rmax ,
has to be made.
Values of rmax () have to be calculated for:
189

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
= 1 = 0.0

= 2 =

and

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

0.5
a (1 + a3 )

cos 1
4 a3
Equation 4.230

The values of rmax () follow from:


((1 + a1 ) sin () a 3 sin (3 ))2 +
rmax () = M s

((1 a1 ) cos () + a3 cos(3 ))2


Equation 4.231
With these two results a value rmax and a value follow from the conditions:
For rmax (1 ) > rmax (2 ) : rmax = rmax (1 ) and = 1
For rmax (1 ) < rmax (2 ) : rmax = rmax (2 ) and = 2
Equation 4.232
The relative velocity ratio on a cross section is obtained by:
=

f3

rmax +

OG

2 Ds H 0 s +
D
s

2 Ms
a 2 + b 2
H

with:
Bs
2 Ds
As
s =
Bs D s
Bs
Ds
Ms =
=
2 (1 + a1 + a3 ) 1 a1 + a3
H0 =

H = 1 + a1 + 9 a3 + 2 a1 (1 3 a3 ) cos(2 ) 6 a3 cos(4 )
a = 2 a3 cos(5 ) + a1 (1 a3 ) cos(3 ) +
2

{(6 3 a ) a + (a

{(6 + 3 a ) a + (a

3 a1 a3 + a1 cos()
b = 2 a3 sin (5 ) + a1 (1 a3 ) sin (3 ) +
2

+ 3 a1 a3 + a1 sin ()

f 3 = 1 + 4 e 1 .6510 (1 s )
5

Equation 4.233
With this a quadratic sectional eddy making damping coefficient for zero forward speed
follows from:

190

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

B44 E 0

(2 )'

1
4 r
= Ds max
2
Ds

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

C p

f 1 rb OG f1 rb
f1 rb
1 +
+ f H

1
Ds
Ds
Ds 2 0
Ds

with:

f1 = 0.5 {1 + tanh [20 s 14]}

f 2 = 0.5 (1 cos ( s )) 1.5 1 e 5 5 s sin 2 ( s )


Equation 4.234
The approximations of the local radius of the bilge circle rb are given as:
Bs
:
2
for H 0 > 1 and rb > Ds :
for rb < Ds and rb <

for H 0 < 1 and rb > H 0 Ds :

rb = 2 Ds

H 0 (s 1)
4

rb = Ds
B
rb = s
2
Equation 4.235

For three-dimensional ship forms the zero forward speed eddy making quadratic roll damping
coefficient is found by an integration over the ship length:
(2 )
(2 )'
B44 E 0 = B44 E 0 dxb
L

Equation 4.236
This eddy making roll damping decreases rapidly with the forward speed to a non-linear
correction for the lift force on a ship with a small angle of attack. Ikeda has analysed this
forward speed effect by experiments and the result has been given in an empirical formula.
With this the equivalent linear eddy making damping coefficient at forward speed is given by:
V
8
1
B44 E =
a B44 E 0 ( 2 )
with: K =
2
0.04 L
1+ K
3

Equation 4.237

4.2.4.5 Lift Damping, B44 L


The roll damping coefficient due to the lift force is described by a modified formula of
Yumuro:
2

1
OG
OG

B44 L = S L V k N LO LR 1.0 + 1.4


+ 0.7

2
LR
LO LR

Equation 4.238
The slope of the lift curve CL is defined by:

191

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

CL

2 D
B
=
+ 4.1 0.045
L
L

kN =

Equation 4.239
in which the coefficient is given by Ikeda in relation to the amidships section coefficient
CM :
CM < 0.92 :
= 0.00
0.92 < CM < 0.97 :
= 0.10
0.97 < CM < 0.99 :
= 0.30
Equation 4.240
These data are fitted here by:
= 106 (CM 0.91)2 700 (CM 0.91)3
with the restrictions:
if CM < 0.91 then = 0.00
if CM > 1.00 then = 0.35
Equation 4.241

4.2.4.6 Bilge Keel Damping, B44 K


The quadratic bilge keel roll damping coefficient has been into two components:
(2)
a component B44 K N due to the normal force on the bilge keels

a component B44 K S

(2)

due to the pressure on the hull surface, created by the bilge keels.

The coefficient of the normal force component B44 K N

(2)

of the bilge keel damping can be

deduced from experimental results of oscillating flat plates. The drag coefficient CD depends
on the period parameter or the Keulegan-Carpenter number. Ikeda measured this non-linear
drag also by carrying out free rolling experiments with an ellipsoid with and without bilge
keels. This resulted in a quadratic sectional damping coefficient:
hk
CD = 22.5
+ 2.40
( 2 )'
3
2
rk a f k
B44 K N = rk hk f k CD
with:
f k = 1.0 + 0.3 e 160 (1 .0 s )

Equation 4.242
The approximation of the local distance between the roll axis and the bilge keel rk is given as:
2

r
OG
r
rk = Ds H 0 0.293 b + 1.0 +
0.293 b
Ds
Ds
Ds

Equation 4.243

192

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

The approximation of the local radius of the bilge circle rb in here is given before.
Assuming a pressure distribution on the hull caused by the bilge keels, a quadratic sectional
roll damping coefficient can be defined:
B44 K S

(2 )'

k
1
2
2
= rk f k C p lm dh
2
0

Equation 4.244
Ikeda carried out experiments to measure the pressure on the hull surface created by bilge
+
keels. He found that the coefficient C p the pressure on the front face of the bilge keel does

not depend on the period parameter, while the coefficient C p of the pressure on the back face
of the bilge keel and the length of the negative pressure region depend on the period
parameter.
Ikeda defines an equivalent length of a constant negative pressure region S0 over the height of
the bilge keels, which is fitted to the following empirical formula:
S0 = 0.3 f k rk a + 1.95 hk
Equation 4.245
+

The pressure coefficients on the front face of the bilge keel, C p , and on the back face of the

bilge keel, C p , are given by:


+

C p = 1.20

C p = 22.5

and

hk
1.20
f k rk a
Equation 4.246

and the sectional pressure moment is given by:


hk

l m dh = Ds A C p + B C p
2

with:

193

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

A = (m3 + m4 ) m8 m7 2
B=
m1 =

m43
(1 m1 )2 (2 m3 m2 ) + m (m m + m m )
+
1
3
5
4
6
3 ( H0 0.215 m1 )
6 (1 0.215 m1 )
rb
Ds

OG
Ds
m3 = 1.0 m1 m2

m2 =

m4 = H 0 m1

0.414 H0 + 0.0651 m12 (0.382 H 0 + 0.0106 ) m1


m5 =
( H0 0.215 m1 ) (1 0.215 m1 )
m6 =

0.414 H0 + 0.0651 m12 (0.382 + 0.0106 H 0 ) m1


( H0 0.215 m1 ) (1 0.215 m1 )

S0
0.25 m1
Ds
= 0.0

m7 =

for : S 0 > 0.25 rb


for : S 0 < 0.25 rb

m8 = m7 + 0.414 m1

for : S0 > 0.25 rb

S
= m7 + 1.414 m1 1 cos 0
rb

for : S 0 < 0.25 rb


Equation 4.247

The equivalent linear total bilge keel damping coefficient can be obtained now by integrating
the two sectional roll damping coefficients over the length of the bilge keels and linearizing
the result:
8
B44 K =
a B44 K N ' + B44 K S ' dxb
3
Lk

Equation 4.248
Experiments of Ikeda have shown that the effect of forward ship speed on this roll damping
coefficient can be ignored.
4.2.4.7 Calculated Roll Damping Components
In Figure 4.25 an example is given of the several roll damping components, as derived with
Ikeda's method, for the S-175 container ship design.

194

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Figure 4.25: Roll damping coefficients of Ikeda, Himeno and Tanaka


It may be noted that for full-scale ships, because of the higher Reynolds number, the frictional
part of the roll damping is expected to be smaller than showed above.

195

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

196

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Hydromechanical Loads

With the approach as mentioned before, a description will be given here of the determination
of the hydromechanical forces and moments for all six modes of motions.
In the ''Ordinary Strip Theory'', as published by Korvin-Kroukovsky and Jacobs [1957] and
others, the uncoupled two-dimensional potential hydromechanical loads in the direction j are
defined by:
D
X hj ' =
M jj ' &hj * + N jj ' &hj * + X RSj '
(Ordinary Strip Theory, OST)
Dt

In the ''Modified Strip Theory'', as has been published later by for instance Tasai [1969] and
others, these loads become:

D
i
'
X hj ' =
N jj ' &hj * + X RSj '
(Modified Strip Theory, MST)
M jj
Dt
e

*
In these definitions of the two-dimensional hydromechanical load, &hj is the harmonic
'

'

oscillatory motion, M jj and N jj are the two-dimensional potential mass and damping and
'

the non-diffraction part X RSj is the two-dimensional quasi-static restoring spring term.

At all following pages, the hydromechanical load has been calculated in the G( xb , yb , zb ) axes
system with the centre of gravity G in the still water level, so OG = 0 .
Some of the terms in the hydromechanical loads have been outlined there:
the ''Modified Strip Theory'' (OST) includes these outlined terms, but
when ignoring these outlined terms, the ''Ordinary Strip Theory'' (MST) has been
presented.

197

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

5.1 Hydromechanical Forces for Surge


The hydromechanical forces for surge are found by integration over the ship length of the
two-dimensional values:
'
X h 1 = X h1 dxb
L

Equation 5.11
When assuming that the cross sectional hydromechanical force hold at a plane through the
local centroid of the cross section, b , parallel to ( xb , yb ) , equivalent longitudinal motions of
the water particles, relative to the cross section of an oscillating ship in still water, are defined
by:
h 1* = x + bG
bG
&h 1* = x& + bG & V

xb
x& + bG &
bG &
2 bG
&&h 1* = x&& + bG && 2 V
+V 2

xb
xb 2
&x& + bG &&
Equation 5.12
In here, bG is the vertical distance of the centre of gravity of the ship G above the centroid
b of the local submerged sectional area.
According to the ''Ordinary Strip Theory'' the two-dimensional potential hydromechanical
force on a surging cross section in still water is defined by:
D
X h 1' =
M 11' &h 1* + N11' &h1*
Dt

dM 11' & *
h1
= M 11' &&h1* + N11' V
dxb

Equation 5.13
According to the ''Modified Strip Theory'' this hydromechanical force becomes:

D
i
'
X h 1' =
N11 ' &h1*
M 11
Dt
e

'
'

'
V dN
dM 11 & *
'
*
= M 11 + 2 11 &&h 1 + N11 V
h1
dx
dx

b
b

Equation 5.14

198

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

This results into the following coupled surge equation:


&x& X h 1 = + ( + a11 ) &x& + b11 x& + c11 x
+ a13 &z& + b13 z& + c13 z
+ a15 && + b15 & + c15 =

X w1
Equation 5.15

with:
'

V
dN
a11 = + M 11 dxb + 2 11 dxb
e L dxb
L
'

' dM 11 '
dxb + b11V
b11 = + N11

dx
b
L
c11 = 0
a13 = 0
b13 = 0
c13 = 0

a15 = M
L

V dN
bG dxb + 2 11 bG dxb
e L dxb
'

'
11

'

dM 11
b15 = N11 ' V
bG dxb b11V BG
dxb
L
c15 = 0

Equation 5.16
The ''Modified Strip Theory'' includes the outlined terms. When ignoring these outlined terms
the ''Ordinary Strip Theory'' is presented.
A small viscous surge damping coefficient b11V , derived from the still water resistance
approximation of Troost [1955], has been added here.

199

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

After simplification (see the end-terms in Section 2-5-3), the expressions for the total
hydromechanical coefficients in the coupled surge equation become:
a11 = + M 11 ' dxb
L

b11 = + N11 ' dxb + b11V


L

c11 = 0
a13 = 0
b13 = 0
c13 = 0

a15 = M 11' bG dxb +


L

V dN11

bG dxb
2
e L dxb
'

'
'
dM 11

b15 = N11 V
bG dxb b11V BG
dxb
L
c15 = 0

200

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

5.2 Hydromechanical Forces for Sway


The hydromechanical forces for sway are found by integration over the ship length of the twodimensional values:
'
X h 2 = X h 2 dxb
L

Equation 5.21
The lateral and roll motions of the water particles, relative to the cross section of an oscillating
ship in still water, are defined by:
h 2 * = y xb OG
h 4* =
&h 2 * = y& xb & + V OG &
&h 4* = &
&& + 2 V & OG &&
&&h 2 * = y&& xb

&&h 4* = &&
Equation 5.22

According to the ''Ordinary Strip Theory'' the two-dimensional potential hydromechanical


force on a swaying cross section in still water is defined by:
D
D
X h 2' =
M 22' &h 2* + N 22 ' &h 2 * +
M ' & * + N24 ' &h 4 *
Dt
Dt 24 h 4

dM 22 ' & *
dM 24 ' & *
h 2 + M 24 ' &&h 4 * + N 24 ' V
h 4
= M 22 ' &&h 2 * + N 22 ' V

dx
dx
b
b

Equation 5.23
According to the ''Modified Strip Theory'' this hydromechanical force becomes:
D
i
D
i
'
'
'
*
'
'
*
Xh2 =
N 22 &h 2 +
N 22 &h 2
M 22
M 22
Dt
e
e

Dt

'
'

V dN
dM 22 & *
= M 22 ' + 2 22 &&h 2 * + N 22 ' V
h 2
dxb
dxb
e

V dN '
dM 24 ' & *
+ M 24 ' + 2 24 &&h 4 * + N24 ' V

dxb
dxb h 4
e

Equation 5.24

201

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

This results into the following coupled sway equation:


&y& X h 2

= + ( + a22 ) &y& + b22 y& + c22 y


&& + b24 & + c24
+ a24
&& + b26 & + c26 =
+ a26

X w2

with:
a 22 = + M 22

'

V
dN 22 '
dxb + 2
dxb
e L dxb

dM 22 '
b22 = + N 22 ' V
dxb
dxb
L
c 22 = 0
a 24 = + M 24 ' dxb + OG M 22 ' dxb
L

dN
dN
V
V
+ 2 24 dxb + 2 OG 22 dxb
dxb
e L dxb
e
L
'

'

dM 24 '
dM 22 '
'
'

b24 = + N 24 V
dxb + OG N 22 V dx dxb
dx
b
b
L
L
c 24 = 0
a 26 = + M 22
L

'

'

V
dM 22
'

xb dxb + 2 N 22 V
dx
dx b b
e L
'

V
V
dN
'
N 22 dxb + 2 22 xb dx b
2
e L
e L dxb

dM 22 '
'
xb dxb 2 V M 22 ' dxb
b26 = + N 22 V
dxb
L
L
V 2 dN 22
+ 2
dxb
e L dxb
'

c 26 = 0
Equation 5.25
The ''Modified Strip Theory'' includes the outlined terms. When ignoring these terms the
''Ordinary Strip Theory'' is presented.

202

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

After simplification (see the end-terms in Section 2-5-3), the expressions for the total
hydromechanical coefficients in the coupled sway equation become:
a 22 = + M 22 dxb
'

b22 = + N 22 ' dxb


L

c 22 = 0
a 24 = + M 24 dxb + OG M 22 dxb
'

'

b24 = + N 24 dxb + OG N 22 ' dxb


'

c 24 = 0
a 26 = + M 22 ' x b dxb +
L

V
N 22 ' dxb
2
e L

b26 = + N 22 ' x b dxb V M 22 ' dxb


L

c 26 = 0
Equation 5.26
So no terms have been added for the ''Modified Strip Theory''.

203

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

5.3 Hydromechanical Forces for Heave


The hydromechanical forces for heave are found by integration over the ship length of the
two-dimensional values:
'
X h 3 = X h 3 dxb
L

Equation 5.31
The vertical motions of the water particles, relative to the cross section of an oscillating ship
in still water, are defined by:
h 3 * = z + xb
&h 3 * = z& + xb & V
&&h 3 * = &z& + xb && 2 V &
Equation 5.32
According to the ''Ordinary Strip Theory'' the two-dimensional potential hydromechanical
force on a heaving cross section in still water is defined by:
D
X h3' =
M 33' &h 3 * + N33' &h 3 * + 2 g yw h 3*
Dt

= M 33

'

'
dM 33 ' & *
*
&
&
h 3 + 2 g yw h 3*
h 3 + N 33 V
dxb

Equation 5.33

According to the ''Modified Strip Theory'' this hydromechanical force becomes:

D
i
'
X h3' =
N33' &h 3* + 2 g y w h 3 *
M 33
Dt
e

'
'

V dN33 && * '


dM 33 & *
'
*

= M 33 + 2
h 3 + N 33 V
h 3 + 2 g yw h 3

dxb
dxb
e

Equation 5.34

204

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

This results into the following coupled heave equation:


&z& X h 3

+ a31 &x& + b31 x& + c31 x


+ ( + a33 ) &z& + b33 z& + c33 z
+ a35 && + b35 & + c35 =

X w3
Equation 5.35

with:
a31 = 0
b31 = 0
c31 = 0

a33 = + M 33 ' dxb +


L

V
dN 33 '

dxb
e 2 L dxb

dM 33 '
b33 = + N 33 ' V
dxb
dxb
L
c33 = +2 g y w dxb
L

a 35 = M 33
L

'

'

V
dM 33
'

x b dxb 2 N33
dx
dxb b
e L

V
V dN
N 33 ' dxb + 2 33 xb dxb
2
e L
e L dxb
'

'

dM
'
33
xb dxb + 2 V M 33 ' dxb
b35 = N 33 V
dxb
L
L
'

V2
dN
+ 2 33 dxb
e L dx b
c 35 = 2 g y w xb dxb
L

Equation 5.36
The ''Modified Strip Theory Method'' includes the outlined terms. When ignoring these terms
the ''Ordinary Strip Theory'' is presented.

205

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

After simplification (see the end-terms in Section 2-5-3), the expressions for the total
hydromechanical coefficients in the coupled heave equation become:
a31 = 0
b31 = 0
c31 = 0
a33 = + M 33 ' dxb
L

b33 = + N 33 ' dxb


L

c33 = +2 g y w dxb
L

a 35 = M 33 ' xb dxb
L

V
N 33 ' dxb
2
e L

b35 = N33 ' xb dxb + V M 33 ' dxb


L

c 35 = 2 g y w xb dxb
L

Equation 5.37
So no terms have been added for the ''Modified Strip Theory''.

206

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

5.4 Hydromechanical Moments for Roll


The hydromechanical moments for roll are found by integration over the ship length of the
two-dimensional values:
'
X h 4 = X h 4 dxb
L

Equation 5.41
The roll and lateral motions of the water particles, relative to the cross section of an oscillating
ship in still water, are defined by:
h 4* =
h 2 * = y xb OG
&h 4* = &
&h 2 * = y& xb & + V OG &
&&h 4* = &&

&& + 2 V & OG &&


&&h 2 * = &y& xb
Equation 5.42

According to the ''Ordinary Strip Theory'' the two-dimensional potential hydromechanical


moment on a rolling cross section in still water is defined by:
y w 3 As

D
'
' & *
' & *
X h2 =
M 44 h 4 + N 44 h 4 + 2 g
bG h 4 *
Dt
2
3

D
M 42 ' & h 2 * + N 42 ' &h 2 *
Dt

y w 3 As

dM 44 ' & *

h 4 *
= M 44 ' &&h 4 * + N 44 ' V

+
2

bG
h
4

dx
2
b

dM 42 ' & *
+ M 42 ' &&h 2 * + N42 ' V
h 2
dx
b

Equation 5.43
According to the ''Modified Strip Theory'' this hydromechanical moment becomes:
y w 3 As

D
i
'
'
' & *
X h2 =
N 44 h 4 + 2 g
bG h 4 *
M 44
Dt
e
2

D
i
'
'
*
+
N 42 & h 2
M 42
Dt
e

'

V dN
dM 44 ' & *
= M 44 ' + 2 44 &&h 4 * + N 44 ' V
h4
dx
dx

b
b

3
y

A
+ 2 g w s bG h 4 * +
2
3

'
'

V dN 42 && *
dM 42 & *
'
'

+ M 42 + 2
+ N V

dxb h 2 42
dxb h 2
e

Equation 5.44

207

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

This results into the following coupled roll equation:


&& X h 4 =
I xx && I xz
+ a42 &y& + b42 y&
+ (+ I xx + a44 ) && + b44 &

+ c42 y
+ c44
&& + b46 & + c46 =
+ ( I xz + a46 )

X w4
Equation 5.45

with:
a 42 = + M 42

'

V
dN 24 '
dxb + OG a 22 + 2
dxb
e L dxb

dM 42 '
b42 = + N 42 ' V
dxb + OG b22
dx
b
L
c 42 = 0 + OG c22
a 44 = + M 44 ' dxb + OG M 42 ' dx b + OG a24
L

'

'

V
dN
V
dN
+ 2 44 dxb + 2 OG 42 dxb
dxb
e L dxb
e
L
'
'

dM 44
dM 42
'
'

b44 = + N 44 V

dx
+
OG

dx + b + OG b24
L 42
dxb b
dxb b 44V
L
y 3 A

c 44 = +2 g w + s bG dxb + OG c24
3
2
L

= + g GM

a 46 = + M 42 xb dx b +
'

'

V
dM 42
'

dx + OG a 26
42
dxb b
e 2 L
'

V
V
dN
'
+ 2 N 42 dxb + 2 42 xb dxb
e L
e L dxb
'

dM 42
'
'
b46 = + N 42 V
xb dxb 2 V M 42 dx b + OG b26

dxb
L
L
'

V 2 dN 42

dxb
e 2 L dxb

c 46 = 0 + OG c26
Equation 5.46
The ''Modified Strip Theory'' includes the outlined terms. When ignoring these terms the
''Ordinary Strip Theory Method'' is presented.
208

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

A viscous roll damping coefficient b44V , derived for instance with the empirical method of
Ikeda [1978], has been added here.
After simplification (see the end-terms in Section 2-5-3), the expressions for the total
hydromechanical coefficients in the coupled roll equation become:
a42 = + M 42 ' dxb + OG a22
L

b42 = + N 42 ' dxb + OG b22


L

c24 = 0
a44 = + M 44 dxb + M 42 dxb + OG a24
'

'

b44 = + N 44 dxb + OG N42 ' dxb + b44V + OG b24


'

c44 = + g GM
a46 = + M 42 ' xb dxb +
L

V
N42 ' dxb + OG a26
2
e L

b46 = + N 42 xb dxb V M 42 dxb + OG b26


'

'

c46 = 0
Equation 5.47
So no terms have been added for the ''Modified Strip Theory''.

209

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

5.5 Hydromechanical Moments for Pitch


The hydromechanical moments for pitch are found by integration over the ship length of the
two-dimensional contributions of surge and heave into the pitch moment:
'
'
'
'
X h 5 = X h 5 dxb
with: X h 5 = X h1 bG X h 3 xb
L

Equation 5.51
According to the ''Ordinary Strip Theory'' the two-dimensional potential hydromechanical
moment on a pitching cross section in still water is defined by surge and heave contributions:
'
'

dM
'
'
*
11
&
&
bG &h1*
X h 5 = M 11 bG h1 N11 V
dxb

'
dM 33 '
*
&
&
xb &h 3 * 2 g y w xb h 3*
M 33 xb h 3 N 33 V
dxb

'

Equation 5.52
According to the ''Modified Strip Theory'' this hydromechanical moment becomes:
'
'

'
V dN
dM 11
'
'
*
*
X h 5 = M 11 + 2 11 bG &&h1 N11 V
bG &h1

dxb
dxb
e

'

V dN 33'
&& * N ' V dM 33 x & *
M 33 ' + 2

dxb b h 3 33
dxb b h 3
e

2 g yw xb h 3 *
Equation 5.53

210

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

This results into the following coupled pitch equation:


I yy && X h 5

+ a51 &x& + b51 x& + c51 x


+ a53 &z& + b53 z& + c53 z
+ (I yy + a55 ) && + b55 & + c55 =

X w5
Equation 5.54

with:
a51 = M 11' bG dxb +
L

V dN11'

bG dxb
e 2 L dxb

'
'

dM
11
bG dxb b11V BG
b51 = N11 V
dxb
L
c51 = 0

a53 = M 33

'

V dN 33'
xb dxb + 2
xb dxb
e L dxb

'
dM 33'

b53 = N33 V
xb dxb
dxb
L
c53 = 2 g yw xb dxb
L

'

2
V
dN
a55 = + M 11 bG dxb + 2 11 bG dxb
e L dxb
L
2

'

+ M 33' xb 2 dxb +
L

' dM 33 '
V
N33
xb dxb

2
dxb
e L

V
V
dN 33'
'
2

dx
+

xb dxb
b
b
2 33
2
dx
e L
e L b

'
'

2
2
dM
11
bG dxb +b11V BG
b55 = + N11 V

dxb
L

dM 33 ' 2
'
+ N33 ' V
xb dxb 2 V M 33 xb dxb
dx
L
b
L

V 2 dN 33'
+

xb dxb
e 2 L dxb
c55 = +2 g yw xb 2 dxb
L

211

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003
Equation 5.55

The ''Modified Strip Theory'' includes the outlined terms. When ignoring the outlined terms
the ''Ordinary Strip Theory'' is presented.
After simplification (see the end-terms in Section 2-5-3), the expressions for the total
hydromechanical coefficients in the coupled pitch equation become:
V dN11'
a51 = M bG dxb + 2
bG dxb
e L dxb
L
'
11

'
dM 11'
bG dxb b11V bG
b51 = N11 V

dx
b
L

c51 = 0

a53 = M 33 ' xb dxb +


L

V
N33 ' dxb
2
e L

b53 = N33 ' xb dxb V M 33' dxb


L

c53 = 2 g yw xb dxb
L

a55 = + M 11 ' bG dxb +


2

+ M 33' xb 2 dxb +
L

2
V
dN11'

bG
dxb
e 2 L dxb

V
V
N 33' xb dxb + 2 M 33 ' dxb
2
e L
e L

V
N33 ' xb dxb
2
e L

'
2
2
dM 11'

b55 = + N11 V

bG

dx
+
b

BG
b
11
V
dxb
L
+ N 33 xb dxb +
'

V2
'
N33 dxb
2
e L

c55 = +2 g yw xb 2 dxb
L

Equation 5.56

212

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

5.6 Hydromechanical Moments for Yaw


The hydromechanical moments for yaw are found by integration over the ship length of the
two-dimensional contributions of sway into the yaw moment:
'
'
'
X h 6 = X h 6 dxb
with: X h 6 = + X h 2 xb
L

Equation 5.61
According to the ''Ordinary Strip Theory'' the two-dimensional potential hydromechanical
force on a yawing cross section in still water is defined by sway contributions:
'
'

dM
'
'
*
22
&
&
xb &h 2 *
X h 2 = M 22 xb h 2 + N22 V
dxb

+ M 24

'

'
dM 24 '
*
&
&
xb &h 4 *
xb h 4 + N 24 V
dxb

Equation 5.62

According to the ''Modified Strip Theory'' this hydromechanical force becomes:


'
'

V dN 22
'
'
&& * + N ' V dM 22 x & *
X h 2 = M 22 + 2

dxb b h 2 22
dxb b h 2
e

V dN '
dM 24 '
xb &h 4 *
+ M 24 ' + 2 24 xb &&h 4 * + N 24' V
e
dxb
dxb

Equation 5.63

213

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

This results into the following coupled yaw equation:


&& I zx && X h 6
I zz

+ a62 &y& + b62 y& + c 62 y


+ ( I zx + a64 ) && + b64 & + c64
&& + b66 & + c 66 =
+ (+ I zz + a 66 )

X w6
Equation 5.64

with:
a 62 = + M 22 ' x b dxb +
L

'

V
dN 22

xb dxb
2
e L dxb

'

dM
'
22
x dxb
b62 = + N22 V
dxb b
L
c 62 = 0

a 64 = + M 24 ' x b dxb + OG M 22 ' x b dxb


L

dN
dN
V
V
+ 2 24 xb dxb + 2 OG 22 xb dxb
dxb
e L dxb
e
L
'

'

dM 24 '
dM 22 '
'
xb dxb + OG N 22 ' V
x dxb
b64 = + N24 V

dxb
dxb b
L
L
c 64 = 0
a 66 = + M 22 ' x b 2 dxb +
L

'

V
dM 22
'

x dxb
22
2
dxb b
e L
'

V
V
dN
'
2
N 22 xb dx b + 2 22 xb dxb
2
e L
e L dxb

'

dM 22 2
'
'

b66 = + N22 V
xb dx b 2 V M 22 xb dx b

dxb
L
L
'

V 2 dN 22

xb dxb
e 2 L dxb

c 66 = 0
Equation 5.65
The ''Modified Strip Theory'' includes the outlined terms. When ignoring the outlined terms
the ''Ordinary Strip Theory'' is presented.

214

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

After simplification (see the end-terms in Section 2-5-3), the expressions for the total
hydromechanical coefficients in the coupled yaw equation become:
a 62 = + M 22 x b dxb +
'

V
'
N 22 dx b
2
e L

b62 = + N 22 x b dxb + V M 22 dx b
'

'

c 62 = 0
a 64 = + M 24 ' x b dxb + OG M 22 ' xb dxb
L

V
V
'
'
N24 dxb + 2 OG N 22 dxb
2
e L
e
L

b64 = + N 24 x b dxb + V M 24 dx b
'

'

+ OG N 22 x b dxb + V OG M 22 ' dx b
'

c 64 = 0
a 66 = + M 22 ' x b 2 dxb +
L

V
V2
'

dx
+
M 22 ' dxb
22
b
b
2
2
e L
e L

V
N22 ' xb dxb
2
e L

b66 = + N 22
L

'

V 2
x b dxb +
N 22 ' dxb
2
e L
2

c 66 = 0
Equation 5.66

215

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

216

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Exciting Wave Loads

6.1 Wave Potential


The first order wave potential in a fluid - with any arbitrary water depth h - is given by:
g cosh [k (h + z b )]
w =

a sin (e t k xb cos k y b sin )

cosh [k h]
Equation 6.11
in an axes system with the centre of gravity in the waterline.
The velocities and accelerations in the direction j of the water particles have to be defined.
The local relative orbital velocities of the water particles in a certain direction follow from the
derivative in that direction of the wave potential. The orbital accelerations of the water
particles can be obtained from these velocities by:
D & '
D

&&wj ' =
wj
with:
= V
for: j = 1,2,3, 4

Dt
Dt t
xb

{ }

Equation 6.12
With this, the relative velocities and accelerations in the different directions can be found:

Surge direction:
w
&w1 ' =
xb
+ k g cos cosh[k (h + zb )]
=

a cos (e t k xb cos k yb sin )

cosh[k h]
cosh[k (h + zb )]
'
&&w1 = k g cos
a sin (e t k xb cos k yb sin )
cosh [k h ]
Equation 6.13

Sway direction:
w
'
&w 2 =
y b

+ k g sin cosh [k (h + z b )]

a cos (e t k x b cos k y b sin )

cosh [k h ]
cosh [k (h + z b )]
= k g sin
a sin (e t k xb cos k y b sin )
cosh [k h ]
=

&&w 2 '

Equation 6.14

Heave direction:

217

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

w
&w 3 ' =
z b
k g sinh [k (h + z b )]
=

a sin (e t k xb cos k yb sin )

cosh[k h]
sinh [k (h + zb )]
'
&&w 3 = k g
a cos (e t k xb cos k yb sin )
cosh [k h]
Equation 6.15

Roll direction:
& ' & '
&w 4 ' = w 2 w 3 = 0
zb
yb
&& ' = 0
w4

Equation 6.16
These zero solutions are obvious, because the potential fluid is free of rotation.
The pressure in the fluid follows from the linearised equation of Bernoulli:
cosh [k (h + z b )]
p = g zb + g
a cos (e t k xb cos k yb sin )
cosh [k h ]
p
p
p
= p0 +
dxb +
dyb +
dzb
xb
yb
zb
Equation 6.17
with the following expressions for the pressure gradients:
p
cosh [k (h + z b )]
= + g k cos
a sin (e t k xb cos k yb sin )
xb
cosh [k h ]
p
cosh[k (h + zb )]
= + g k sin
a sin (e t k xb cos k yb sin )
yb
cosh[k h ]
p
cosh [k (h + zb )]
= g + g k
a cos(e t k xb cos k yb sin )
zb
cosh [k h]
Equation 6.18
These pressure gradients can be expressed in the orbital accelerations too:
p
= &&w1 '
xb
p
= + &&w 2 '
yb
p
= g + &&w3 '
zb

Equation 6.19

218

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

6.2 Classical Approach


First the classical approach to obtain the wave loads - according to the relative motion
principle - is given here.

6.2.1 Exciting Wave Forces for Surge


The exciting wave forces for surge on a ship are found by integration over the ship length of
the two-dimensional values:
'
X w1 = X w1 dxb
L

Equation 6.21
According to the ''Ordinary Strip Theory'' the exciting wave forces for surge on a restrained
cross section of a ship in waves are defined by:
D
X w1 ' =
M ' & * + N11' &w1* + X FK 1'
Dt 11 w1

dM 11' & *
w1 + X FK1 '
= M 11 ' &&w1* + N11' V
dxb

Equation 6.22
According to the ''Modified Strip Theory'' these forces become:
D
i
'
'
'
*
'
X w1 =
N11 &w1 + X FK 1
M 11 +
Dt
e

'
'

&& * '
& *
V
dN
dM
'
11
11
w1 + N11 V
w1 + X FK 1'
= M 11 + 2

dxb
dxb
e

Equation 6.23

Figure 6.21: Wave pressure distribution on a cross section for surge


The Froude-Krilov force in the surge direction - so the longitudinal force due to the pressure
in the undisturbed fluid, see Figure 6.21 - is given by:
219

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

+ yb

p
dyb dzb
xb
T yb

X FK1 =

+ yb

&&

'
w1

dyb dz b

T y b

Equation 6.24
After neglecting the second order terms, the Froude-Krilov force can be written as:
X FK1 = Ach ( k g cos ) a sin (e t k xb cos )
with:
0
sin ( k yb sin ) cosh [k (h + z b )]
Ach = 2

yb dz b
k yb sin
cosh [k h ]
T
Equation 6.25
When expanding the Froude-Krilov force in deep water with >> 2 yw and >> 2 T
in series, it is found:
1
X FK1 = A + k S y + k 2 I y + ... ( k g cos ) a sin (e t k xb cos )
2

with:
0

A = 2 yb dzb
T

S y = 2 yb z b dzb
T

I y = 2 yb z b 2 dzb
T

Equation 6.26
The acceleration term k g cos a in here is the amplitude of the longitudinal component
of the relative orbital acceleration in deep water at z b = 0 .
The dominating first term in this series consists of a mass and this acceleration. The mass
term A is used to obtain from the total Froude-Krilov force an equivalent longitudinal
component of the orbital acceleration of the water particles:
*
X FK1 = A &&w1
Equation 6.27
This holds that the equivalent longitudinal components of the orbital acceleration and velocity
*
are equal to the values at z b = 0 in a wave with reduced amplitude a 1 :
&& * = k g cos * sin ( t k x cos )
w1

a1

+ k g cos
&w1* =
a 1* cos (e t k xb cos )

with:
a 1* =

Ach

A a
Equation 6.28

This equivalent acceleration and velocity will be used in the diffraction part of the wave force
for surge.
From the foregoing follows the total wave loads for surge:
220

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

X w1 = + M &&w1* dxb +
'
11

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

V
dN11' && *

w1 dxb
e L dxb


dM 11 ' & *
+
N11' V
w1 dxb
e
dxb
L
+ X FK1 ' dxb
L

Equation 6.29
The ''Modified Strip Theory'' includes the outlined terms. When ignoring the outlined terms
the ''Ordinary Strip Theory'' is presented.

6.2.2 Exciting Wave Forces for Sway


The exciting wave forces for sway on a ship are found by integration over the ship length of
the two-dimensional values:
'
X w 2 = X w 2 dxb
L

Equation 6.210
According to the ''Ordinary Strip Theory'' the exciting wave forces for sway on a restrained
cross section of a ship in waves are defined by:
D
X w 2' =
M 22 ' & w2 * + N22 ' &w 2 * + X FK 2 '
Dt
'
dM 22 ' & *
' && *

w2 + X FK 2 '
= M 22 w 2 + N22 V
dxb

Equation 6.211
According to the ''Modified Strip Theory'' these forces become:
D
i
'
'
'
*
'
Xw2 =
N 22 &w 2 + X FK 2
M 22 +
Dt
e

'
'

V dN 22 && * '
dM 22 & *
'
'

= M 22 + 2
w2 + N22 V
w2 + X FK 2

dxb
dxb
e

Equation 6.212

221

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Figure 6.22: Wave pressure distribution on a cross section for sway


The Froude-Krilov force in the sway direction - so the lateral force due to the pressure in the
undisturbed fluid - is given by:
+ yb
p
X FK 2 =
dyb dzb

y
b
T yb
=

+ yb

&&

w2

'

dyb dzb

T y b

Equation 6.213
After neglecting the second order terms, the Froude-Krilov force can be written as:
X FK 2 = Ach ( k g sin ) a sin (e t k xb cos )
with:
0
sin ( k yb sin ) cosh [k (h + z b )]
Ach = 2

yb dz b
k yb sin
cosh [k h ]
T
Equation 6.214
When expanding the Froude-Krilov force in deep water with >> 2 yw and >> 2 T
in series, it is found:
1
X FK 2 = A + k S y + k 2 I y + ... ( k g sin ) a sin (e t k xb cos )
2

with:
0

A = 2 yb dzb
T

S y = 2 yb z b dzb
T

I y = 2 yb z b 2 dzb
T

Equation 6.215
The acceleration term k g sin a in here is the amplitude of the lateral component of the
relative orbital acceleration in deep water at z b = 0 .
The dominating first term in this series consists of a mass and this acceleration.
This mass term A is used to obtain from the total Froude-Krilov force an equivalent lateral
component of the orbital acceleration of the water particles:
*
X FK 2 = A &&w 2

222

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

This holds that the equivalent lateral components of the orbital acceleration and velocity are
*
equal to the values at z b = 0 in a wave with reduced amplitude a 2 :
&& * = k g sin * sin ( t k x cos )
w2

&w1*

a2

+ k g sin
=
a 2 * cos (e t k xb cos )

with:
a 2 * =

Ach

A a
Equation 6.216

This equivalent acceleration and velocity will be used in the diffraction part of the wave force
for sway.
From the foregoing follows the total wave loads for sway:
X w 2 = + M 22

'

&&w 2 * dxb +

V
dN 22 ' && *

w 2 dxb
e L dxb

dM 22 ' & *
'

+
N 22 V
w 2 dxb
e
dxb
L
+ X FK 2 ' dxb
L

Equation 6.217
The ''Modified Strip Theory'' includes the outlined terms. When ignoring the outlined terms
the ''Ordinary Strip Theory'' is presented.

6.2.3 Exciting Wave Forces for Heave


The exciting wave forces for heave on a ship are found by integration over the ship length of
the two-dimensional values:
'
X w 3 = X w3 dxb
L

Equation 6.218
According to the ''Ordinary Strip Theory'' the exciting wave forces for heave on a restrained
cross section of a ship in waves are defined by:
D
X w 3' =
M 33 ' &w 3* + N33 ' &w3 * + X FK 3 '
Dt
'
dM 33' & *
' && *

w3 + X FK 3 '
= M 33 w3 + N33 V
dxb

Equation 6.219
According to the ''Modified Strip Theory'' these forces become:

223

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

Xw3 =
'

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

D
i
'
'
*
'
N33 &w 3 + X FK 3
M 33 +
Dt
e

'
'

V dN 33 && *
dM 33 & *
'
'
'

= M 33 + 2
w3 + N 22 V
w3 + X FK 3

dxb
dxb
e

Equation 6.220

Figure 6.23: Wave pressure distribution on a cross section for heave


The Froude-Krilov force in the heave direction - so the vertical force due to the pressure in the
undisturbed fluid - is given by:
+ yb
p
X FK 3 =
dyb dz b

z
b
T y b
=

(g + && ) dy

+ yb

'

w3

dzb

T yb

Equation 6.221
After neglecting the second order terms, the Froude-Krilov force can be written as:
2 yw sin ( k yb sin )

X FK 3 =

+ Ash ( k g ) a cos(e t k xb cos )


k yb sin
k

with:
0
sin ( k yb sin ) sinh [k (h + zb )]
Ash = 2

yb dzb
k yb sin
cosh [k h]
T
Equation 6.222
When expanding the Froude-Krilov force in deep water with >> 2 yw and >> 2 T
in series, it is found:
2 yw
1

X FK 3 =
+ A + k S y + k 2 I y + ... ( k g ) a cos (e t k xb cos )
2
k

with:

224

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
0

A = 2 yb dzb
T

S y = 2 yb z b dzb
T

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003
0

I y = 2 yb z b 2 dzb
T

Equation 6.223
??????
*
T3 can be considered as the draft at which the pressure in the vertical direction is equal to the
average vertical pressure on the cross section in the fluid and can be obtained by.
*
T3 = ???
This holds that the equivalent vertical components of the orbital acceleration and velocity are
*
equal to the values at zb = T3 :
???
When expanding the Froude-Krilov force in shallow water with k h 0 and in long waves
with ??? in series, it is found:
C3 = ???
with:
???
*
So in shallow water, T3 can be obtained by.
T3 = ???
This holds that the equivalent vertical components of the orbital acceleration and velocity are
*
equal to the values at zb = T3 :
???
*
It may be noted that this shallow water definition for T3 is valid in deep water too, because:
???
These equivalent accelerations and velocities will be used to determine the diffraction part of
the wave forces for heave.
*

From the foregoing follows the total wave loads for heave:
X w 3 = + M 33' &&w 3* dxb +
L

V
dN '
33 &&w 3* dxb
e L dxb


dM 33 ' & *
+
N33 ' V
w 3 dxb
e
dxb
L
+ X FK 3 ' dxb
L

Equation 6.224
The ''Modified Strip Theory'' includes the outlined terms. When ignoring the outlined terms
the ''Ordinary Strip Theory'' is presented.

6.2.4 Exciting Wave Moments for Roll


The exciting wave moments for roll on a ship are found by integration over the ship length of
two-dimensional values:
225

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

X w 4 = X w 4 dxb
'

Equation 6.225
According to the ''Ordinary Strip Theory'' the exciting wave moments for roll on a restrained
cross section of a ship in waves are defined by:
D
X w 4' =
M ' & * + N 42' &w 2 * + X FK 4 ' + OG X w 2 '
Dt 42 w2

dM 42 ' & *
w 2 + X FK 4 ' + OG X w2 '
= M 42 ' &&w 2* + N42 ' V
dxb

Equation 6.226
According to the ''Modified Strip Theory'' these moments become:
D
i
'
'
'
*
'
'
Xw4 =
N 42 &w 2 + X FK 4 + OG X w 2
M 42 +
Dt
e

'
'

'
V dN
dM 42 & *
'
*
'
'
= M 42 + 2 42 &&w2 + N24 V
w2 + X FK 4 + OG X w2

dxb
dxb
e

Equation 6.227

Figure 6.24: Wave pressure distribution on a cross section for roll


The Froude-Krilov moment in the roll direction - so the roll moment due to the pressure in the
undisturbed fluid - is given by:
+ yb
p

p
X FK 4 =
zb +
yb dyb dzb
yb
z b

T yb

{ &&
+ yb

w2

'

) }

'
z b + g + &&w 3 yb dyb dz b

T y b

Equation 6.228
After neglecting the second order terms, the Froude-Krylov moment can be written as:
S
C

X FK 4 = yw + ych + I zsh k 2 g sin a sin (e t k xb cos )


k
k

226

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
with:

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

sin ( k yw sin )
cos ( k y w sin )
k y w sin
= 2
yw 3
2
( k yb sin )

C yw

sin ( k yb sin ) cosh[k (h + zb )]

yb zb dzb
k yb sin
cosh[k h]
T
0

S ych = 2

sin ( k yb sin )
cos( k yb sin )
k yb sin
cosh [k (h + zb )] 3
I zsh = 2

yb dzb
2
cosh[k h]
( k yb sin )
T
0

Equation 6.229
For deep water, the cosine-hyperbolic expressions in here reduce to exponential expressions.
From the foregoing follows the total wave loads for roll:
X w 4 = + M 42

'

*
&&w 2 dxb +

V
dN 42 ' && *

w 2 dxb
e L dxb

'

dM 42 & *
+
N 42 ' V
w 2 dxb

dxb
L e

+ X FK 4 dxb + OG X w 2
'

Equation 6.230
The ''Modified Strip Theory'' includes the outlined terms. When ignoring the outlined terms
the ''Ordinary Strip Theory'' is presented.

6.2.5 Exciting Wave Moments for Pitch


The exciting wave moments for pitch are found by integration over the ship length of the twodimensional contributions of surge and heave into the pitch moment:
'
X w 5 = X w 5 dxb
L

with:
X w 5 = X w1 bG X w 3 xb
'

'

'

Equation 6.231
In here, bG is the vertical distance of the centre of gravity of the ship G above the centroid
b of the local submerged sectional area.
From this follows the total wave loads for pitch:

227

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

V
dN11'
*
&
&
= M bG w1 dxb +

bG &&w1* dxb
e L dxb
L

Xw5

'
11

'

dM 11
'
*

N11 V
bG &w1 dxb
e
dxb
L

X FK1 ' bG dxb


L

'
33

V
dN33 '
*
&
&
xb w3 dxb +

xb &&w 3* dxb
e L dxb


dM 33 '

N 33' V
xb &w3 * dxb
e
dxb
L
X FK 3 xb dxb
'

Equation 6.232
The ''Modified Strip Theory'' includes the outlined terms. When ignoring the outlined terms
the ''Ordinary Strip Theory'' is presented.

6.2.6 Exciting Wave Moments for Yaw


The exciting wave moments for yaw are found by integration over the ship length of the twodimensional contributions of sway into the yaw moment:
'
X w 6 = X w6 dxb
L

with:
X w 6 = + X w 2 xb
'

'

Equation 6.233
From this follows the total wave loads for yaw:
X w 6 = + M 22

'

xb &&w 2* dxb +

V
dN 22 '

xb &&w2 * dxb
e L dxb

dM 22 '
+
N 22' V
xb & w2 * dxb
e
dxb
L
+ X FK 2 ' xb dxb
L

Equation 6.234
The ''Modified Strip Theory'' includes the outlined terms. When ignoring the outlined terms
the ''Ordinary Strip Theory'' is presented.

228

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

6.3 Approximating 2-D Diffraction Approach


In the classic relative motion theory, the average (or equivalent) motions of the water particles
around the cross section are calculated from the pressure distribution in the undisturbed waves
on this cross section. An alternative approach - based on diffraction of waves - to determine
the equivalent accelerations and velocities of the water particles around the cross section, as
given by Journee and van t Veer [1995], is described now.

6.3.1 Hydromechanical Loads


Suppose an infinite long cylinder in the still water surface of a fluid. The cylinder is forced to
carry out a simple harmonic oscillation about its initial position with frequency of oscillation
and small amplitude of displacement x ja :
x j = x ja cos ( t )

for: j = 2,3,4
Equation 6.31
'

The 2-D hydrodynamic loads X hi in the sway, heave and roll directions i , exercised by the
fluid on a cross section of the cylinder, can be obtained from the 2-D velocity potentials and
the linearised equations of Bernoulli. The velocity potentials have been obtained by using the
work of Ursell [1949] and N -parameter conformal mapping. These hydrodynamic loads are:
g ja
'
X hi = 2 g ywl
Aij cos t + x j + Bij sin t + x j

)}

Equation 6.32
in where j is the mode of oscillation and i is the direction of the load. The phase lag x j is
defined as the phase lag between the velocity potential of the fluid and the forced motion
x j . The radiated damping waves have an amplitude ja and ywl is half the breadth of the
cross section at the waterline. The potential coefficients Aij and Bij and the phase lags x j ,
expressed in terms of conformal mapping coefficients, are given in a foregoing chapter.
'

These loads X hi can be expressed in terms of in-phase and out-phase components with the
harmonic oscillations:
2
a g ja
X hi ' = 2 ij

x ja

{( A

ij

Q0 j + Bij P0 j ) cos ( t ) + ( Aij P0 j Bij Q0 j ) sin ( t )}

with:

229

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

a22 = 2
a24 = 4 y wl
a33 = 2
a42 = 4 ywl
a44 = 2
x ja
2
P0 j =

y wl sin x j
ja
g
Q0 j = +

x ja
2

y wl cos x j
ja
g
Equation 6.33

The phase lag x j between he velocity potentials and the forced motion is incorporated in the
coefficients P0 j and Q0 j and can be obtained by using:
P
x j = arctan 0 j
+ Q0 j

Equation 6.34
This equation will be used further on for obtaining wave load phases.
Generally, these hydrodynamic loads are expressed in terms of potential mass and damping
coefficients:
'
X hi = M ij &x& j N ij x& j
= M ij 2 x ja cos ( t ) + N ij x ja sin ( t )
with:
M ij = bij
Nij = bij
b22 = 2 y wl

Aij Qoj + Bij Poj


P0 j 2 + Q0 j 2
Aij Qoj Bij Poj
P0 j 2 + Q0 j 2

b24 = ywl 3
b33 = 2 y wl 2
b42 = 2 y wl 3
b44 = 2 y wl 4
Equation 6.35
Note that the phase lag information x j is vanished here.
Tasai [1965] has used the following potential damping coupling coefficients in his formulation
of the hydrodynamic loads for roll:
N 44 '
'
'
'
'
N 42 = '
and
N 24 = N22 l w
lw
230

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003
Equation 6.36

'

in which lw is the lever of the rolling moment.


Because N 42 ' = N 24 ' , one may write for the roll damping coefficient:
N 44 ' =

(N ) = (N )
' 2

' 2

24

42

N 22 '

N 22 '

Equation 6.37
This relation - which has been confirmed by numerical calculations with SEAWAY - will be
used further on for obtaining the wave loads for roll from those for sway.

6.3.2 Energy Considerations


The wave velocity, cwave , and the group velocity, c group , of regular waves are defined by:

c
2 k h
cwave =
and
c group = wave =
k
2
sinh [2 k h]
Equation 6.38
Consider a cross section which is harmonic oscillating with a frequency = 2 T and an
'

amplitude x ja in the direction j in previously still water by an oscillatory force X hj in the


same direction j :
x j = x ja cos ( t )

X hj ' = X hja ' cos t + hj '

for: j = 2,3,4

= X hja ' cos hj ' cos( t ) X hja ' sin hj ' sin ( t )
Equation 6.39
The energy required for this oscillation should be equal to the energy radiated by the damping
waves:
1 T
1 T '
'
X hj x& j dt = N jj x& j x& j dt
T 0
T 0
1
2
= 2 g a cgroup
2
or:
1
1
'
'
'
2
X hja x ja sin hj = N jj 2 x ja
2
2
= g a 2 cgroup
Equation 6.310
From the first part of Equation 6.310 follows:
X hja' sin hj '
x
'
= N jj ja
a
a
Equation 6.311
231

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

From the second part of Equation 6.310 follows the amplitude ratio of the oscillatory
motions and the radiated waves:
x ja 1
2 g c group
=
a
N jj '
Equation 6.312
Combining these last two equations provides for the out-phase part - so the damping part - of
the oscillatory force:
X hja' sin hj '
'
= 2 g c group N jj
for: j = 2,3,4
a
In here, X hja sin hj is the in-phase with the velocity part of the exciting force or moment.
'

'

6.3.3 Wave Loads


Consider now the opposite case: the cross section is restrained and is subject to regular
incoming beam waves with amplitude a . Let xwj represent the equivalent (or average)
oscillation of the water particles with respect to the restrained cross section. The resulting
'
wave force, X wj , is caused by these motions, which will be in phase with its velocity
(damping waves). Then the energy consumed by this oscillation is equal to the energy
supplied by the incoming waves.
xwj = x wja cos t + wj '
for: j = 2,3,4
X wj = X wja; cos t + wj '

Equation 6.313
in which wj is the phase lag with respect to the wave surface elevation at the center of the
cross section.
This leads for the amplitude of the exciting wave force to:
X wja'
'
= 2 g c group N jj for: j = 2,3,4
a
'

Equation 6.314
which is in principle the same equation as the previous one for the out-phase part of the
oscillatory force in still water.
'
However, for the phase lag of the wave force, wj , an approximation has to be found.

232

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Figure 6.31 Vector diagrams of wave components for sway and heave
6.3.3.1 Heave Mode
The vertical wave force on a restrained cross section in waves is:
X w 3 ' = X w 3 a ' cos t + w3 '

= X w 3 a ' cos w3 ' cos( t ) X w 3 a ' sin w 3 ' sin ( t )


Equation 6.315
of which the amplitude is equal to:
X w 3 a ' = a 2 g c group N 33'
Equation 6.316
For the phase lag of this wave force, w3 , an approximation has to be found.
'

The phase lag of a radiated wave, wR 3 , at the intersection of the ship's hull with the waterline,
'

yb = y wl , is wR 3 = k ywl . The phase lag of the wave force, w3 , has been approximated by
this phase:
'
'
w 3 = wR 3 = k y wl
'

'

Equation 6.317
Then, the in-phase and out-phase parts of the wave loads are:

233

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

X FK 3 ' + X w 31' = + X w3 a ' cos w 3'


= + a 2 g cgroup N33 ' cos w 3 '

X w 32 ' = X w 3 a ' sin w3 '


= a 2 g cgroup N33 ' sin w3 '

Equation 6.318
'

'

from which the diffraction terms, X w 31 and X w 32 follow.


These diffraction terms can also be written as:
X w 31' = M 33 ' a3 '
X w 32 ' = N33 ' v 3 '
Equation 6.319
'

'

in which a 3 and v 3 are the equivalent amplitudes of the acceleration and the velocity of the
water particles around the cross section.
Herewith, the equivalent acceleration and velocity amplitudes of the water particles are:
X '
a 3 ' = w31'
M 33
v 3' =

X w32 '
N33 '
Equation 6.320

6.3.3.2 Sway Mode


The horizontal wave force on a restrained cross section in beam waves is:
X w 2 ' = X w 2 a ' cos t + w 2 '

= X w 2 a ' cos w 2 ' cos ( t ) X w2 a ' sin w 2 ' sin ( t )


Equation 6.321
of which the amplitude is equal to:
X w 2 a ' = a 2 g c group N22 '
Equation 6.322
For the phase lag of this wave force, w 2 , an approximation has to be found.
'

The phase lag of an incoming undisturbed wave, wI 2 , at the intersection of the ship's hull
with the waterline, yb = y wl , is:
'

wI 2 ' = k y wl sin
if sin < 0 then : wI 2 ' = wI 2 ' +
Equation 6.323

234

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

In very short waves - so at high wave frequencies - the ship's hull behaves like a
'
vertical wall and all waves will be diffracted. Then, the phase lag of the wave force, w 2 , is
equal to:
'
'
w 2 ( ) = wI 2
Equation 6.324
The acceleration and velocity amplitudes of the water particles in the undisturbed surface of
the incoming waves are:
a2 ' stillwater surface = k g sin

( )
(v )

a2 k g sin
=
=

'

'

2 still water surface

Equation 6.325
In very long waves - so at low wave frequencies 0 - the wave force is dominated by the
Froude-Krylov force and the amplitudes of the water particle motions do not change very
'
much over the draft of the section. Apparently, the phase lag of the wave force, w 2 , can be
approximated by:

'
'

X
+ M 22 ( k g sin )
'
w 2 ( 0) = arctan FK 2

' k g sin

N 22

Equation 6.326
When plotted against , the two curves w 2 ( 0 ) and w 2 ( ) will intersect each
'

'

other. The phase lag of the wave force, w 2 , can now be approximated by the lowest of these
two values:
w2 ' = w 2 ' ( )
'

if w 2 ' ( 0) > w 2 ' ( ) then : w 2 ' = w 2 ' ( 0)


Equation 6.327
Because w 2 ( ) goes to zero in the low frequency region and w 2 ( 0 ) can have
values between 0 and 2 , one simple precaution has to be taken:
'
'
'
if w 2 ( 0) > 2 then : w 2 ( ) = w 2 ( 0 ) 2
'

'

Equation 6.328
Now the in-phase and out-phase terms of the wave force in beam waves are:
X FK 2 ' + X w 21' = X w 2 a ' sin w 2 '
= a 2 g cgroup N 22 ' sin w 2 '

X w 22 ' = + X w2 a ' sin w2 '


= + a 2 g c group N 22 ' cos w 2 '

Equation 6.329
235

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

'

'

from which the diffraction terms, X w 21 and X w 22 follow.


These terms can also be written as:
X w 21' = M 22 ' a 2 '
X w 22 ' = N 22 ' v 2 '
Equation 6.330
'

'

in which a 2 and v 2 are the equivalent amplitudes of the acceleration and the velocity of the
water particles around the cross section.
Then - when using an approximation for the influence of the wave direction - the equivalent
acceleration and velocity amplitudes of the water particles are:
X '
a 2 ' = w 21' sin
M 22
v 2' =

X w 22 '
sin
N 22 '
Equation 6.331

6.3.3.3 Roll Mode


The fluid is free of rotation; so the wave moment for roll consists of sway contributions only.
However, the equivalent amplitudes of the acceleration and the velocity of the water particles
will differ from those of sway.
From a study on potential coefficients, the following relation between sway and roll damping
coefficients has been found:

(N ) = (N )
=
' 2

N 44

'

' 2

24

42

N 22 '
N 22 '
The horizontal wave moment on a restrained cross section in beam waves is:
'
'
'
X w 4 = X w 4 a cos t + w4

Equation 6.332
of which the amplitude is equal to:
X w 4a = a

2 g c group N 44

'

'

(N )

' 2

= a

2 g c group

= a

2 g c group N 22

24

N 22
'

= X w 2a
'

'

N 24 '
N 22 '

N 24 '
N 22 '
Equation 6.333

The in-phase and out-phase parts of the wave moment in beam waves are:

236

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

X FK 4 + X
'

'
w 41

= X FK 2 + X
'

X w 42 = X w 22
'

'

N24

'
w 21

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

N 24 '

) N

'
22

'

N22 '
Equation 6.334
'

'

from which the diffraction terms, X w 41 and X w 42 follow.


These terms can also be written as:
X w 41' = M 24 ' a 24 '
X w 42 ' = N 24 ' v 24 '
Equation 6.335
'

'

in which a 24 and v 24 are the equivalent amplitudes of the acceleration and the velocity of the
water particles around the cross section.
Then - when using an approximation for the influence of the wave direction - the equivalent
acceleration and velocity amplitudes of the water particles are:
X w 41'
'
a 24 =
sin
M 24 '
v 24 ' =

X w42 '
sin
N 24 '
Equation 6.336

6.3.3.4 Surge Mode


The equivalent acceleration and velocity amplitudes of the water particles around the cross
section for surge have been found from:
a2 '
a1 ' =
tan
v1 ' =

a1'

Equation 6.337

237

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

6.4 Numerical Comparisons


Figure 6.41 and Figure 6.42 give a comparison between these sway, heave and roll wave
loads on a crude oil carrier in oblique waves - obtained by the classic approach and the simple
diffraction approach, respectively - with the 3-D zero speed ship motions program DELFRAC
of Pinkster; see Dimitrieva [1017].

Figure 6.41: Comparison of classic wave loads with DELFRAC data

Figure 6.42: Comparison of simple diffraction wave loads with DELFRAC data

238

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Transfer Functions of Motions

After dividing the left and right hand terms by the wave amplitude a , two sets of six coupled
equations of motion are available.
The 6 variables in the coupled equations for the vertical plane motions are:
xa
xa
Surge :
cos x and
sin x
a
a
z
za
Heave : a cos z and
sin z
a
a
a
a
Pitch :
cos and
sin
a
a
The 6 variables in the coupled equations for the horizontal plane motions are:
ya
ya
Sway :
cos y and
sin y
a
a
a
a
Roll :
cos and
sin
a
a
a
a
Yaw :
cos and
sin
a
a
These sets of motions have to be solved by a numerical method. A method that provides
continuous good results, given by de Zwaan [1977], has been used in the strip theory program
SEAWAY.

239

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

7.1 Centre of Gravity Motions


From the solutions of these in and out of
motions (or Reponse Amplitude Operators,
amplitude ratio:
xa
ya
za
a
a
a
a
a
a
a

phase terms follow the transfer functions of the


RAOs), which is the motion amplitude to wave
a
a

The associated phase shifts of these motions relative to the wave elevation are:
x
y
z

The transfer functions of the translations are non-dimensional. The transfer functions of the
rotations can be made non-dimensional by dividing the amplitude of the rotations by the
amplitude of the wave slope k a in lieu of the wave amplitude a :
xa
ya
za
a
a
a
a
a
a
k a k a k a
Some examples of calculated transfer functions of a crude oil carrier and a containership are
given in Figure 7.11, Figure 7.12 and Figure 7.13.
1 .5

1 .5
C ru de O il C a rrie r
V = 0 kn
P it ch

RAO Pitc h (-)

RAO Heave (-)

C ru de O il C arrier
V = 0 kn
H e a ve
1 .0
= 90
= 180

0 .5

1 .0
= 18 0

0 .5
= 90

0
0

0 .25

0 .5 0

0 .7 5

1 .0 0

W ave F re qu e ncy (ra d/ s)

0 .2 5

0. 50

0 .7 5

1. 00

W a ve F req u en cy (rad /s )

-90

-90

= 90 0

-180
-270
-360

= 180

-450

= 1800

-180

Phase

Phase z (deg)

-270

-450

-540

-540

-630

-630

-720

= 90

-360

-720
0

0.25

0.50

0.75

1.00

Wave Frequenc y (rad/s )

0.25

0.50

0.75

1.00

Wave F requency (rad/s )

Figure 7.11: Heave and Pitch Motions of a Crude Oil Carrier, V = 0 kn

240

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

1 .5

1 .5
C ru de O il C a rrie r
V = 1 6 kn
P it ch

RAO Pitc h (-)

RAO Heave (-)

C ru de O il C arrier
V = 1 6 kn
H e a ve
1 .0
= 90
= 18 0

0 .5

1 .0
= 1 80

0 .5

= 90
0

0
0

0 .25

0 .5 0

0 .7 5

1 .0 0

0 .2 5

W ave F re qu e ncy (ra d/ s)

0. 50

0 .7 5

1. 00

W a ve F req u en cy (rad /s )

-90

= 90

-180
-270

= 180

-360

-90

= 180 0

-180

Phase

Phase z (deg)

-450

-270

-450

-540

-540

-630

-630

-720

= 90

-360

-720
0

0.25

0.50

0.75

1.00

0.25

Wave Frequenc y (rad/s )

0.50

0.75

1.00

Wave F requency (rad/s )

Figure 7.12: Heave and Pitch Motions of a Crude Oil Carrier, V = 16 kn

15

1.50

RAO of roll

RAO of pitch

V = 0 knots
Beam waves

Head waves
1.25

V = 10 k nots

10

Non-dim. RAO of pitch (-)

Non-dim. RAO of roll (-)

V = 20 k nots

V = 20 k nots

V = 10 knots
1.00
V = 0 knots
0.75

0.50

0.25
Containership
L pp = 175 metre
0

Containership
L pp = 175 metre

0
0

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1.0

wave frequency (rad/s)

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1.0

wave frequency (rad/s)

Figure 7.13: Roll and Pitch Motions of a Containership


Notice the different speed effects on the motions in these figures.
For motions with a spring term in the equation of motion, three frequency regions can be
distinguished:
the low frequency region (2 << c (m + a ) ), with motions dominated by the restoring
spring term,
241

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

the natural frequency region (2 c (m + a ) ), with motions dominated by the damping


term and
the high frequency region ( 2 >> c a ), with motions dominated by the mass term.

An example for heave motions is given in Figure 7.14.

Figure 7.14: Frequency Regions and Motional Behaviour

242

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

7.2 Local Absolute Displacements


Consider a point P( xb , yb , zb ) on the ship in the G( xb , yb , z b ) ship-bound axes system. The
harmonic displacements in the ship-bound xb , yb and zb directions - or in the earth bound x ,
y and z directions - in any point P( xb , yb , zb ) on the ship can be obtained from the six centre
of gravity motions as presented below.
The harmonic longitudinal displacement is given by:
xP = x yb + zb

= x Pa cos e t + xP

The harmonic lateral displacement is given by:


yP = y + xb z b

= yPa cos e t + yP

The harmonic vertical displacement is given by:


z P = z xb yb

= zPa cos e t + z P

With the six motions of the centre of gravity, the harmonic motions of any point P( xb , yb , zb )
on the ship in the ship-bound xb , yb and zb directions - or in the earth bound system in x , y
and z directions - can be calculated by using the previous equations.

243

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

7.3 Local Absolute Velocities


The harmonic velocities in the ship-bound xb , yb and zb directions - or in the earth bound x ,
y and z directions - in any point P( xb , yb , zb ) on the ship can be obtained by taking the
derivative of the three harmonic displacements.
The harmonic longitudinal velocity is given by:
x&P = x& yb & + zb &

= e xPa sin e t + x P

= e x Pa cos e t + x P 2

= x& Pa cos e t + &xP

The harmonic lateral velocity is given by:


y& P = y& + xb & z b &

= e y Pa sin e t + y P

= e yPa cos e t + y P 2

= y& Pa cos e t + &y P

The harmonic vertical velocity is given by:


z& P = z& xb & yb &

= e z Pa sin e t + z P

= e z Pa cos e t + z P 2

= z&Pa cos e t + z& P

244

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

7.4 Local Absolute Accelerations


In the earth-bound axes system, the harmonic accelerations on the ship are obtained by taking
the second derivative of the displacements. In the ship-bound axes system, a component of the
acceleration of gravity has to be added to the accelerations in the horizontal plane direction.

7.4.1 Accelerations in the Earth-Bound Axes System


In the earth-bound axes system, O( x, y , z ) , the harmonic accelerations in a point P( xb , yb , zb )
on the ship in the x , y and z directions can be obtained by taking the second derivative of
the three harmonic displacements.
Thus:

Longitudinal acceleration:
&x&P = &x& yb
&& + z b &&

= e xPa cos e t + x P
2

= e xPa cos e t + xP
2

= &x&Pa cos e t + &x&P

Lateral acceleration:
&& zb &&
&y&P = &y& + xb

= e yPa cos e t + y P
2

= e y Pa cos e t + y P

= &y&Pa cos e t + &y&P

Vertical acceleration:
&z&P = &z& xb && yb &&

= e z Pa cos e t + z P
2

= e z Pa cos e t + z P
2

= &z&Pa cos e t + &z&P

7.4.2 Accelerations in the Ship-Bound Axes System


In the ship-bound axes system, G( xb , yb , z b ) , a component of the acceleration of gravity g
has to be added to the accelerations in the longitudinal and lateral direction in the earth-bound
axes system. The vertical acceleration does not change.
These accelerations are the accelerations that will be ''felt'' by for instance the cargo or seafastenings on the ship.
Thus:
245

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

Longitudinal acceleration:
&x&P = &x& yb
&& + zb && g

= e 2 xPa cos e t + x P g a cos (e t + )

= &x&Pa cos e t + &x&P

Lateral acceleration:
&y&P = &y& + xb
&& zb && + g

= e 2 yPa cos e t + y P + g a cos(e t + )

= &y&Pa cos e t + &y&P

Vertical acceleration:
&z&P = &z& xb && yb &&

= e 2 z Pa cos e t + z P

= &z&Pa cos e t + &z&P

246

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

7.5 Local Vertical Relative Displacements


The harmonic vertical relative displacement with respect to the wave surface of a point
P( xb , yb , zb ) connected to the ship can be obtained too:
sP = P z + xb + yb

= s Pa cos e t + s P
with:

P = a cos (e t k xb cos k yb sin )

It may be noted that the sign of the relative motion is chosen here in such a way that a positive
relative displacement implies a decrease of the freeboard.
An oscillating ship will produce waves and these phenomena will change the relative motion.
A dynamical swell up should be taken into account, which is not included in the previous
formulation.
Notice the different behaviours of the absolute and relative vertical motions, as given in
Figure 7.51.
5

5
C on tai ne rs h ip
H ea d w av e s

RAO of vertical relative bow motions (m/m)

RAO of vertical absolute bow motions (m/m)

C o nta ine rs h ip
H e ad w av e s

4
V = 20 k no ts

3
V = 10 k no ts

V = 0 k n ots

1
R A O te nd s
to 1 .0

V = 2 0 k n o ts

V = 1 0 k n ots
3

V = 0 k n ots
2

R A O te nd s
to 1 .0

R A O te nd s
to 0 .0

R AO ten d s
to 0.0

0
0

0.5

1 .0

1 .5

w a v e fre qu en c y (ra d/s )

0 .5

1.0

1 .5

w a v e fre q ue nc y (r ad /s )

Figure 7.51: Absolute and Relative Vertical Motions at the Bow

247

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

7.6 Local Vertical Relative Velocities


The harmonic vertical relative velocity with respect to the wave surface of a certain point
P( xb , yb , zb ) , connected to the ship, can be obtained by:
D
s&P =
{ z + xb + yb }
Dt P
= &P z& + xb & V + yb &

= s&Pa cos e t + s& P

in which for the vertical velocity of the water surface itself:


&P = a sin (e t k xb cos k yb sin )

248

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Anti-Rolling Devices

Since the disappearance of sails on ocean-going ships, with their stabilising wind effect on the
rolling motions, naval architects have been concerned in reducing the rolling of ships among
waves. With bilge keels they performed a first successful attack on the problem of rolling, but
in several cases these bilge keels did not prove to be sufficient. Since 1880, numerous other
more or less successful ideas have been tested and used.
Four types of anti-rolling devices and its contribution to the equations of motion are described
here:
bilge keels
passive free-surface tanks
active fin stabilisers
active rudder stabilisers.
The active fin and rudder stabilisers are not built into the program SEAWAY yet.

249

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

8.1 Bilge Keels


Bilge keels can deliver an important contribution to an increase the damping of the rolling
motions of ships. A reliable method to determine this contribution is given by Ikeda, Himeno
and Tanaka [1978], as described before.
Ikeda divides the two-dimensional quadratic bilge keel roll damping into a component due to
the normal force on the bilge keels and a component due to the pressure on the hull surface,
created by the bilge keels.
The normal force component of the bilge keel damping has been deduced from experimental
results of oscillating flat plates. The drag coefficient C D depends on the period parameter or
the Keulegan-Carpenter number. Ikeda measured the quadratic two-dimensional drag by
carrying out free rolling experiments with an ellipsoid with and without bilge keels.
Assuming a pressure distribution on the hull caused by the bilge keels, a quadratic twodimensional roll damping can be defined. Ikeda carried out experiments to measure the
+
pressure on the hull surface created by bilge keels. He found that the coefficient C p of the
pressure on the front face of the bilge keel does not depend on the period parameter, while the

coefficient C p of the pressure on the back face of the bilge keel and the length of the
negative pressure region depend on the period parameter. Ikeda defines an equivalent length
of a constant negative pressure region S 0 over the height of the bilge keels and a twodimensional roll-damping component can be found.
The total bilge keel damping has been obtained by integrating these two two-dimensional rolldamping components over the length of the bilge keels.
Experiments of Ikeda showed that the effect of forward speed on the roll damping due to the
bilge keels could be ignored.
The equivalent linear total bilge keel damping has been obtained by linearising the result, as
has been shown in a separate Chapter.

250

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

8.2 Passive Free-Surface Tanks


The roll damping, caused by a passive free-surface tank, is essentially based on the existence
of a hydraulic jump or bore in the tank. Verhagen and van Wijngaarden [1965] give a
theoretical approach to determine the counteracting moments by free-surface anti-rolling
tanks. Van den Bosch and Vughts [1966] give extended quantitative information on these
moments.

8.2.1 Theoretical Approach


When a tank that contains a fluid with a free surface is forced to carry out roll oscillations,
resonance frequencies can be obtained with high wave amplitudes at lower water depths.
Under these circumstances a hydraulic jump or bore is formed, which travels periodically
back and forth between the walls of the tank. This hydraulic jump can be a strongly non-linear
phenomenon. A theory, based on gas-dynamics for the shock wave in a gas flow under similar
resonance circumstances, as given by Verhagen and van Wijngaarden [1965], has been
adapted and used to describe the motions of the fluid. For low and high frequencies and the
frequencies near to the natural frequency, different approaches have been used.
Observe a rectangular tank with a length l and a breadth b , which has been filled until a
water level h with a fluid with a mass density . The distance of the tank bottom above the
centre of gravity of the vessel is s . Figure 8.21 shows a 2-D sketch of this tank with the axis
system and notations.

Figure 8.21: Axes System and Notations of an Oscillating Tank


The natural frequency of the surface waves in a harmonic rolling tank appears as the wave
length in the tank equals twice the breadth b , so: 0 = 2 b .
With the wave number and the dispersion relation:
2
k=
and
= k g tanh [k h]

it follows for the natural frequency of surface waves in the tank:


251

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

0 =

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

g
h
tanh
b
b

Verhagen and van Wijngaarden [1965] have investigated the shallow water wave loads in a
rolling rectangular container, with the centre of rotation at the bottom of the container. Their
expressions for the internal wave loads are rewritten and modified to be useful for any
arbitrary vertical position of the centre of rotation by Journe [1997]. For low and high
frequencies and the frequencies close to the natural frequency, different approaches have been
used. A calculation routine has been made to connect these regions.
8.2.1.1 Low and High Frequencies
The harmonic roll motion of the tank is defined by:
= a sin ( t )
In the axis-system of Figure 8.21 and after linearisation, the vertical displacement of the tank
bottom is described by:
z = s + y
and the surface elevation of the fluid is described by:
z = s + h +
Relative to the bottom of the tank, the linearised surface elevation of the fluid is described by:
= h + y
Using the shallow water theory, the continuity and momentum equations are:

v
+v
+
=0
t
y
y
v
v

+v + g
+ g = 0
t
y
y
In these formulations, $v$ denotes the velocity of the fluid in the y -direction and the vertical
pressure distribution is assumed to be hydrostatic. Therefore, the acceleration in the z direction, introduced by the excitation, must be small with respect to the acceleration of
gravity g , so:
a 2 b << g
The boundary conditions for v have been determined by the velocity produced in the
horizontal direction by the excitation. Between the surface of the fluid and the bottom of the
tank, the velocity of the fluid v varies between vs and vs cosh [k h ] with a mean velocity:
vs (k h ) . However, in very shallow water v does not vary between the bottom and the
surface. When taking the value at the surface, it is required that:
b
v = (s + h ) &
at: y =
2

252

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

For small values of a , the continuity equation and the momentum equation can be given in a
linearised form:

+ h
=0
t
y
v

+g
+ g = 0
t
y
The solution of the surface elevation in these equations, satisfying the boundary values for
v , is:
(s + h ) 2

b 0 1 +
g

sin y
=h
b

cos

0
Now, the roll moment follows from the quasi-static moment of the mass of the frozen liquid
l b h and an integration of over the breadth of the tank:
M = g l b h s +

+b 2

h
+ g l y dy
2
b 2

This delivers the roll moment amplitude for low and high frequencies at small water depths:
h

M a = g l b h s + a +
2

3
2
0
(
s + h ) 2 0
3
g l b 1 +
tanh
a
2


2 0
For very low frequencies, so for the limit value 0 , this will result into the static moment:

h b3

M = g l b h s + + a
2 12

The phase lags between the roll moments and the roll motions have not been obtained here.
However, they can be set to zero for low frequencies and to for high frequencies:
M = 0
<< 0
for:
M =
>> 0
8.2.1.2 Natural Frequency Region
For frequencies near to the natural frequency 0 , the expression for the surface elevation of
the fluid goes to infinity. Experiments showed the appearance of a hydraulic jump or a bore
at these frequencies. Obviously, then the linearised equations are not valid anymore.
Verhagen and van Wijngaarden [1965] solved the problem by using the approach in gas
dynamics, when a column of gas has been oscillated at small amplitude, e.g. by a piston. At
253

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

frequencies near to the natural frequency at small water depths, they found a roll moment
amplitude, defined by:
4
2
l b3 4
2 a h 2 b ( 0 )
M a = g

1

12
3b
32 g a

The phase shifs between the roll moment and the roll motion at small water depths are given
by:
M = 2 +
<< 0
for:
M = 2
>> 0
with:
2 b ( )2
0
= 2 arcsin

24 g a

2 b ( 0 )2
arcsin

2
2
96 g a 3 b ( 0 )
Because that the arguments of the square roots in the expression for M have to be positive,
the limits for the frequency are at least:
0

24 g a
24 g a
< < 0 +
2
b
b 2

8.2.1.3 Comparison with Experimental Data


An example of the results of this theory with experimental data of an oscillating free-surface
tank by Verhagen and van Wijngaarden [1965] is given in Figure 8.22.

Figure 8.22: Comparison between Theoretical and Experimental Data

254

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

The roll moments have been calculated here for low and high frequencies and for frequencies
near to the natural frequency of the tank. A calculation routine connects these three regions.

8.2.2 Experimental Approach


Van den Bosch and Vugts [1966] have described the physical behaviour of passive freesurface tanks, used as an anti-rolling device. Extended quantitative information on the
counteracting moments, caused by the water transfer in the tank, has been provided.
With their symbols, the roll motions and the exciting moments of an oscillating rectangular
free-surface tank, are defined by:
= a cos ( t )
Kt = Kta cos( t + t )
and the dimensions of the rectangular free-surface tank are given by:
l
length of the tank
b
breadth of the tank
s
distance of tank bottom above rotation point
h
water depth in the tank at rest
mass density of the fluid in the tank
*
\end{tabular}
A non-dimensional frequency range is defined by:
b
0.00 <
< 1.60
g
In this frequency range, van den Bosch and Vugts have presented extended experimental data
of:
K
a = * ta 3
and
t
g lb
for:
a = 0.0333, 0.0667 and 0.1000 radians
s b = -0.40, -0.20, 0.00 and +0.20
h b = 0.02, 0.04, 0.06, 0.08 and 0.10
An example of a part of these experimental data has been shown for s b = 0.40 and
a = 0.1000 radians in Figure 8.23, taken from the report of van den Bosch and Vugts
[1966].

255

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Figure 8.23: Experimental Data on Anti-Rolling Free-Surface Tanks


When using these experimental data, the external roll moment due to an, with a frequency ,
oscillating free surface tank can be written as:
&& + b4 & + c4
Kt = a4
with:

a4 = 0
b4
c4

Kta
sin t
a
=

K
= ta cos t
a

It is obvious that for an anti-rolling free-surface tank, built into a ship, it holds:
a = a
and
e =
So it can be written:
= a cos ( t + )

Kt = Kta cos ( t + + t )

Then, an additional moment has to be added to the right-hand side of the equations of motion
for roll:
X 4 tank = a 44 tank && + b44 tank & + c44 tank
with:
256

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

a44 tank = 0
Kta
sin t
a
b44 tank =

Kta
c44 tank =
cos t
a
This holds that the anti-rolling coefficients a44 tank , b44 tank and c44 tank have to be subtracted
from the coefficients a 44 , b44 and c44 in the left-hand side of the equations of motion for roll.

8.2.3 Effect of Free-Surface Tanks


Figure 8.24 shows the significant reduction of the roll transfer functions and the significant
roll amplitude of a trawler, being obtained by a free-surface tank.
40

30

T ra w ler

T r aw l er

L = 2 3.9 0 m e tre

L = 2 3.9 0 m e tre
W itho ut ta nk

25

W i th ou t ta nk

Significant roll amplitude (deg)

Transfer function roll (deg/m)

30

20

W ith tan k

20

W ith tan k

15

10

10
5

0
0

0.5

1.0

1 .5

2 .0

2.5

c irc u lar w av e fre qu en c y (1 /s)

S ig nific a nt w a v e he ig ht (m )

Figure 8.24: Effect of a Free-Surface Tank on Roll Motions in Beam Waves

257

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

8.3 Active Fin Stabilisers


To determine the effect of active fin stabilisers on ship motions, use has been made here of
reports published by Schmitke [1978] and Lloyd [1989].
The oscillatory angle of the portside fin is given by:
= a cos( t + )
The exciting forces and moments, caused by an oscillating fin pair are given by:
&& + b2 & + c2
X 2 fin = a2
&& + b & + c
X = a
4 fin

&& + b6 & + c6
X 6 fin = a6
with:
a2 = 2 sin a
b2 = 2 sin b
c2 = 2 sin c

a4 = +2 ( yb fin cos + zb fin sin ) a


b4 = +2 ( yb fin cos + zb fin sin ) b
b4 = +2 ( yb fin cos + zb fin sin ) c
a6 = 2 xbfin sin a
b6 = 2 xbfin sin b
c6 = 2 xbfin sin c
and:
3

c
1
a = s fin fin
2
2

C
+ L C (k )

fin
1
C
c = V 2 Afin L C (k )
2
fin
In here:

angle of port fin


b =

c
1
V Afin fin
2
2

C L

fin
C (k )
c
k= e r
2 V
Afin

lift curve slope of fin


circulation delay function
reduced frequency
projected fin area

s fin

span of fin

c fin

mean chord of fin


258

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
xbfin
ybfin
zb fin

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

xb -co-ordinate of the centroid of fin forces


yb -co-ordinate of the centroid of fin forces
zb -co-ordinate of the centroid of fin forces

The nominal lift curve slope of a fin profile in a uniform flow is approximated by:
CL
1.80 ( ARE )
=
2

(
ARE )
1.80 + cos
+ 4.0
cos 4
with:

sweep angle of fin profile


(ARE )
effective aspect ratio of fin profile
Of normal fins, the sweep angle of the fin profile is zero, so = 0 or cos = 1 .
The fin acts in the boundary layer of the ship, which will reduce the lift. This effect is
translated into a reduced lift curve slope of the fin.
The velocity distribution in the hull boundary layer is estimated by the following two
equations:

V ( ) = V
with: < BL
BL
Vx
0 .2
BL = 0.377 x fin Rx
with: Rx =

in which:
V ( ) flow velocity inside boundary layer
V
forward ship speed

normal distance from hull


BL
thickness of boundary layer
x fin
distance aft of forward perpendicular of fin
Rx

local Reyno lds number


kinematic density of fluid

The kinematic viscosity of seawater can be found from the water temperature T in degrees
centigrade by:
1.78
106 =
m2 /s
2
1.0 + 0.0336 T + 0.000221 T
It is assumed here that the total lift of the fin can be found from:
s fin

1
1
CL V 2 ( ) c ( ) d = CLfin V 2 Afin
2
2
0
where c ( ) is the chord at span-wise location .
For rectangular fins, this is simply an assumption of a uniform loading.
Because:

c ( ) = crfin (crfin ctfin )


s fin
259

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
in which:
crfin
ctfin

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

root chord of fin


tip chord of fin

crfin + ctfin
mean chord of fin
2
the correction to the lift curve slope is:
2
2 crfin ctfin

BL
EBL = rfin 1

1 BL
c fin 9 s fin
2
8 s fin
c fin =

Then the corrected lift curve slope of the fin is:


1.80 ( ARE ) fin
C L

= EBL
fin
1.80 + ( ARE ) fin 2 + 4.0
Generally a fin is mounted close to the hull, so the effective aspect ratio is about twice the
geometric aspect ratio:
s
( ARE ) fin = 2 ( AR ) fin = 2 fin
c fin

260

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

8.4 Active Rudder Stabilisers


To determine the effect of rudder stabilisers on ship motions, use has been made of reports
published by Lloyd [1989] and Schmitke [1978].
The oscillatory rudder angle is given by:
= a cos (e t + )
with is positive in a counter-clockwise rotation of the rudder.
So, a positive results in a positive side force, a positive roll moment and a negative yaw
moment.
The exciting forces and moments, caused by this oscillating rudder are given by:
X 2 rud = a2 && + b2 & + c2
X 4 rud = a4 && + b4 & + c4
X 6 rud = a6 && + b6 & + c6
with:

a2 = + a
b2 = +b
c2 = +c
a4 = zb rud a
b4 = zb rud b
b4 = zb rud c
a6 = + xb rud a
b6 = + xb rud b
c6 = + xb rud c

and:
3

1
c
a = s rud rud
2
2

C
+ L C (k )
rud

1
C
c = V 2 Arud L C (k )
2
rud
b =

1
c
V Arud rud
2
2

In here:
Vrud 1.125 V
C L

rud
c
k = e rud
2 V
Arud
srud
crud

equivalent flow velocity at rudder


lift curve slope of rudder
circulation delay function
projected area of rudder
span of rudder
mean chord of rudder
261

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
xb rud
zb rud

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

xb -co-ordinate of centroid of rudder forces


zb -co-ordinate of centroid of rudder forces

The lift curve slope of the rudder is approximated by:


1.80 ( ARE )rud
C L

=
rud 1.80 + ( ARE ) 2 + 4.0
rud

Generally a rudder is not mounted close to the hull, so the effective aspect ratio is equal to the
geometric aspect ratio:
( ARE )rud = ( AR)rud = srud
crud

262

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

External Linear Springs

Suppose a linear spring connected to point P on the ship, see Figure 8.41.

Figure 8.41: Co-ordinate System of Springs


The harmonic longitudinal, lateral and vertical displacements of a certain point P on the ship
are given by:
x (P ) = x y p + z p
y (P ) = y + x p z p
z (P ) = z x p + y p

The linear spring coefficients in the three directions in a certain point P are defined by
(C px , C py , C pz ) . The units of these coefficients are N/m or kN/m.

9.1 External Loads


The external forces and moments, caused by these linear springs, acting on the ship are given
by:
X s 1 = C px (x y p + z p )
X s 2 = C py (y + x p z p )
X s 3 = C pz (z x p + y p )
X s 4 = X s2 z p + X s3 y p
X s5 = + X s1 z p X s3 x p
X s 6 = X s1 y p + X s 2 x p

263

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

9.2 Additional Coefficients


After a change of sign, this results into the following coefficients cij , which have to be
added to the restoring spring coefficients cij of the hydromechanical loads in the left-hand
side of the equations of motions:
c11 = +C px

Surge:

c12 = 0
c13 = 0
c14 = 0
c15 = + C px z p
c16 = C px y p
c21 = 0
c22 = +C py

Sway:

c23 = 0
c24 = C py z p
c25 = 0
c26 = +C py x p
c31 = 0
c32 = 0

Heave:

c33 = +C pz
c34 = +C pz y p
c35 = C pz x p
c36 = 0
c41 = 0
c42 = C py z p

Roll:

c43 = +C pz y p
c44 = +C py z p 2 + C pz y p 2
c45 = C pz x p y p
c46 = C py x p z p

264

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

c51 = +C px z p

Pitch:

c52 = 0
c53 = C pz x p
c54 = C pz x p y p
c55 = +C px z p + Cpz x p
2

c56 = C px y p z p
c61 = C px y p
c62 = +C py x p

Yaw:

c63 = 0
c64 = C py x p z p
c65 = C px y p z p
c66 = +C px y p 2 + C py x p 2

It is obvious that in case of several springs, a linear superposition of the coefficients can be
used.
When using linear springs, generally 12 sets of coupled equations with the in and out of phase
terms of the motions have to be solved. Because of these springs, the surge, heave and pitch
motions will be coupled then with the sway, roll and yaw motions.

265

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

9.3 Linearised Mooring Coefficients


Figure Figure 9.31 shows an example of results of static catenary line calculations, see for
instance Korkut and Hebert [1970], for an anchored platform.

Figure 9.31: Horizontal Forces on a Floating Structure as Function of Surge Displacements


Figure 9.31-a shows the platform anchored by two anchor lines of chain at 100 m water
depth. Figure 9.31-b shows the horizontal forces at the suspension points of both anchor
lines as a function of the horizontal displacement of the platform. Finally, Figure 9.31-c
shows the relation between the total horizontal force on the platform and its horizontal
displacement.
This figure shows clearly the non-linear relation between the horizontal force on the platform
and its horizontal displacement.
A linearised spring coefficient, to be used in frequency domain computations, can be obtained
from Figure 9.31-c by determining an average restoring spring coefficient, C px , in the surge
displacement region:
Total Force
C px = MEAN

Displaceme nt

266

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

10 Added Resistance due to Waves


A ship moving forward in a wave field will generate ''two sets of waves'': waves associated
with forward speed through still water and waves associated with its vertical relative motion
response to waves. Since both wave patterns dissipate energy, it is logical to conclude that a
ship moving through still water will dissipate less energy than one moving through waves.
The extra wave-induced loss of energy can be treated as an added propulsion resistance.
Figure 9.31 shows the resistance in regular waves as a function of the time: a constant part
due the calm water resistance and an oscillating part due to the motions of the ship, relative to
the incoming regular waves. The time-averaged part of the increase of resistance is called: the
added resistance due to waves, Raw .
2 50 0
S till wat er re sista n ce R SW
+
M e an a dd ed re sista nce R AW

Resistance (kN)

2 00 0

Re sist an ce

1 50 0
S till wat er re sista n ce R SW
1 00 0

50 0

0
0

10

20

30

T im e (s)

Figure 9.31: Increase of Resistance in Regular Waves


Two theoretical methods have been used for the estimation of the time-averaged added
resistance of a ship due to the waves and the resulting ship motions:

a radiated wave energy method, as introduced by Gerritsma and Beukelman [1972],


suitable for head to beam waves.

an integrated pressure method, as introduced by Boese [1970], suitable for all wave
directions.

Because of the added resistance of a ship due to the waves is proportional to the relative
motions squared, its inaccuracy will be gained strongly by inaccuracies in the predicted
motions.
The transfer function of the mean added resistance is presented as:
267

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
Raw" =

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Raw
a 2

In a non-dimensional way the transfer function of the mean added resistance is presented as:
Raw
Raw" =
g a 2 B 2 L
in which:
L
lengt h between perpendiculars
B
maximum breadth of the waterline
Both methods will be described here.

268

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

10.1 Radiated Energy Method


The wave energy - radiated during one period of oscillation of a ship in regular waves - has
been defined by Gerritsma and Beukelman [1972] as:
Te

P=

'

33

*2

Vz dxb dt

0 L

in which:
'
b33
Vz
Te

hydrodynamic damping coefficient of the vertical motion of the cross section


vertical average velocity of the water particles, relative to the cross sections
period of vertical oscillation of the cross section

The speed dependent hydrodynamic damping coefficient for the vertical motion of a cross
section is defined here as showed before:
dM 33 '
b33' = N33' V
dxb
The harmonic vertical relative velocity of a point on the ship with respect to the water
particles is defined by:
D
'
(z xb + yb )
Vz = &w3
Dt
= &w3 ' z& xb & + V + yb &

For a cross section of the ship, an equivalent harmonic vertical relative velocity has to be
found, defined here by:
Vz * = &w 3* z& xb & + V

= Vza cos e t + V *
*

With this the radiated energy during one period of oscillation is given by:
'
'
dM 33
*2
P=
N33 V

V
dxb
za
e L
dxb
To maintain a constant forward ship speed, this energy should be delivered by the ship's
propulsion plant. A mean added resistance Raw has to be gained.
The energy delivered to the surrounding water is given by:

c
P = Raw V
T
cos e

= Raw

2
k cos

From this the transfer function of the mean added resistance according to Gerritsma and
Beukelman can be found:

269

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Raw k cos '


dM 33 ' Vza *

dxb
=
N 33 V
a 2
2 e
dxb a
L
2

Equation 10.11
This method gives good results in head to beam waves. However, in following waves this
method could fail.
When the wave speed in following waves approaches the ship speed the frequency of
encounter in the denominator tends to zero, e 0 . At these low frequencies, the potential
sectional mass is very high and the potential sectional damping is almost zero. The damping
multiplied with the relative velocity squared in the nominator does not tend to zero, as fast as
the frequency of encounter. This is caused by the presence of a natural frequency for heave
and pitch at this low e , so a high motion peak can be expected. This results into an extreme
positive or negative added resistance.

270

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

10.2 Integrated Pressure Method


Boese [1970] calculates the added resistance by integrating the longitudinal components of
the oscillating pressures on the wetted surface of the hull. A second small contribution of the
longitudinal component of the vertical hydrodynamic and wave forces has been added.
The wave elevation is given by:
= a cos(e t k xb cos k yb sin )
The pressure in the undisturbed waves is given by:
cosh[k (h + zb )]
p = g z + g

cosh[k h ]
cosh[k (h + zb )]
= g z + g
a cos (e t k xb cos k yb sin )
cosh[k h ]
The horizontal force on an oscillating cross section is given by:

f (xb , t ) =

p dz

D s +z x

2 + ( Ds + z x )2

= g
+
( + Ds z x )
2
tanh [k h]

with: z x = z xb .
As the mean added resistance during one period will be calculated, the constant term and the
first harmonic term can be ignored. So:
2 + z x 2 ( z x )
*

f ( xb , t ) = g
+
2
tanh [k h ]

The vertical relative motion is defined by s = z x , so:


2 + zx2
s
f ( xb , t ) = g
+
2
tanh [k h]

The average horizontal force on a cross section follows from:


f * ( xb ) =

Te

f ( x , t ) dt
*

g a 2
z 2 2 sa cos ( k xb cos s )
1 + xa2 +

2
a
a tanh [k h]

The added resistance due to this force is:

271

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

dy w
Raw1 = 2 f * ( xb )
dxb
dxb
L
g a 2
z 2 2 sa cos( k xb cos s ) dy w
=
1 xa2
dx dxb
2
a tanh [k h]
a
b
L

where yw is the still water line.
For deep water, this part of the mean added resistance reduces to:
g
dy
Raw1 =
sa 2 w dxb
(as given by Boese for deep water)
2
dxb
L
The integrated vertical hydromechanical and wave forces in the ship-bounded system vary not
only in time but also in direction with the pitch angle.
From this follows a second contribution to the mean added resistance:
T

Raw 2

1 e
=
{Z (t ) + Z w (t )} (t ) dt
Te 0 h
T

1 e
=
&z&(t ) (t ) dt
Te 0
For this second contribution can be written:
1
Raw 2 = e 2 za a cos(z )
2
So the transfer function of the total mean added resistance according to Boese is given by:

Raw 1
z xa 2 2 sa cos ( k xb cos s ) dy w


dxb
=

L a 2
a 2 2
a tanh [k h ]
dxb
+

1
e 2 za a cos(z )
2
Equation 10.21

272

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

10.3 Comparison of Results


Figure 10.31 shows an example of a comparison between computed and experimental data.

Figure 10.31: Added Resistance of the S-175 Containership Design

273

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

274

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

11 Bending and Torsion Moments


The axes system (of which the hydrodynamic sign convention differs from that commonly
used in structural engineering) and the internal load definitions are given in Figure 10.31.

Figure 10.31: Axis System and Internal Load Definitions


To obtain the vertical and lateral shear forces and bending moments and the torsion moments
the following information over a length Lm on the solid mass distribution of the ship
including its cargo is required:
m' (xb )
distribution over the ship length of the solid mass of the ship per unit
length, see Figure 10.32
'
z m ( xb )
distribution over the ship length of the vertical z b -values of the centre
of gravity of the solid mass of the ship per unit length
'
k xx ( x b )
distribution over the ship length of the radius of inertia of the solid
mass of the ship per unit length, about a horizontal longitudinal axis
through the centre of gravity

Figure 10.32: Distribution of Solid Mass


275

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

The input values for the calculation of shear forces and bending and torsion moments are
often more or less inaccurate. Mostly small adaptations are necessary, for instance to avoid a
remaining calculated bending moment at the forward end of the ship.
The total mass of the ship is found by an integration of the mass per unit length:
m = m' ( xb ) dxb
Lm

It is obvious that this integrated mass should be equal to the mass of displacement, calculated
from the underwater hull form:
m =
Both terms will be calculated from independently derived data, so small deviations are
possible. A proportional correction of the masses per unit length m' (xb ) can be used, see
Figure 10.33.
Then m' (xb ) will be replaced by:

m ' (xb )
m

Figure 10.33: Mass Correction for Buoyancy


The longitudinal position of the centre of gravity is found from the distribution of the mass
per unit length:
1
xG = m' ( xb ) xb dxb
m Lm
An equal longitudinal position of the ship's centre of buoyancy x B is required, so:
xG = xB
Again, because of independently derived data, a small deviation is possible.
Then, for instance, m' (xb ) can be replaced by m' ( xb ) + c( xb ) , with:
c (xb ) = c1 ( xb xA 0 )
for: 0 < xb x A < Lm 4
c (xb ) = +c1 ( xb xA Lm 2 )
for: Lm 4 < xb x A < 3 Lm 4
c (xb ) = c1 (xb x A Lm )
for: 3 Lm 4 < xb x A < Lm
276

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
with:
c1 =

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

32 ( xB xG )
Lm 3

In here:
xA
Lm

xb -co-ordinate of hindmost part of mass distribution


total length of mass distribution

Figure 10.34: Mass Correction for Cent re of Buoyancy


For relative slender bodies, the longitudinal radius of inertia of the mass can be found from
the distribution of the mass per unit length:
1
k yy 2 = m' ( xb ) xb 2 dxb
m Lm
It can be desirable to change the mass distribution in such a way that a certain required
longitudinal radius of inertia k yy (new) or k zz (new) will be achieved, without changing the
total mass or the position of its centre of gravity.
Then, for instance, m' (xb ) can be replaced by m' ( xb ) + c( xb ) , see Figure 10.35, with:
c (xb ) = +c2 (xb x A 0 )
for: 0 < xb x A < Lm 8
c (xb ) = c 2 ( xb x A 2 Lm 8 )
for: Lm 8 < xb x A < 3 Lm 8
c (xb ) = +c2 ( xb x A 4 Lm 8)
for: 3 Lm 8 < xb x A < 4 Lm 8
c (xb ) = c 2 ( xb x A 4 Lm 8 )
for: 4 Lm 8 < xb x A < 5 Lm 8
c (xb ) = +c2 ( xb x A 6 Lm 8 )
for: 5 Lm 8 < xb xA < 7 Lm 8
c (xb ) = c2 ( xb x A Lm )
for: 7 Lm 8 < xb x A < Lm
with:
c2 =

3204 k yy 2 (new) k yy 2 (old )


9 Lm

In here:
xA
Lm

xb -co-ordinate of hindmost part of mass distribution


total length of mass distribution

277

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Figure 10.35: Mass Correction for Radius of Inertia


The position in height of the centre of gravity is found from the distribution of the heights of
the centre of gravity of the masses per unit length:
1
zG = m ' (xb ) zm ' ( xb ) dxb
m Lm
It is obvious that this value should be zero. If not so, this value has to be subtracted from
'
z m ( xb ) .
So, z m ( xb ) will be replaced by z m ( xb ) zG .
'

'

The transverse radius of inertia k xx is found from the distribution of the radii of inertia of the
masses per unit length:
2
1
k yy 2 = m' ( xb ) k xx ' dxb
m Lm
If this value of k xx differs from a required value k xx (new) of the radius of inertia, a
proportional correction of the longitudinal distribution of the radii of inertia can be used:
k xx ' (new)
'
'
k xx ( xb , new) = k xx ( xb , old ) '
k xx (old )
Consider a section of the ship with a length dxb to calculate the shear forces and the bending
and the torsion moments.

278

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Figure 10.36: Loads on a Cross Section


When a load q (xb ) loads the disk, this implies for the disk:
dQ(xb )
q ( xb ) dxb = dQ( xb )
so:
= q( xb )
dxb
dM (xb )
Q( xb ) dxb = +dM ( xb )
so:
= +Q( xb )
dxb
in which:
Q( xb )
shear force
M ( xb )
bending moment
The shear force and the bending moment in a cross section x1 follows from an integration of
the loads from the hindmost part of the ship x0 to this cross section x1 :
dQ( xb )
dxb
dxb
x0
x1

Q(x1 ) =
x1

M (x1 ) = Q( xb ) dxb
x0

xb dQ( x )

b
= +
dxb dxb

dxb
x0 x0

x1

So, the shear force Q( x1 ) and the bending moment M (x1 ) in a cross section can be expressed
in the load q (xb ) by the following integrals:

279

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

x1

Q(x1 ) = q( xb ) dxb
x0
x1

M (x1 ) = + q( xb ) ( x1 xb ) dxb
x0
x1

x1

x0

x0

= + q( xb ) xb dxb x1 q( xb ) dxb
For the torsion moment an approach similar to the approach for the shear force can be used.
The load q (xb ) consists of solid mass and hydromechanical terms. The ordinates of these
terms will differ generally, so numerical integrations of these two terms have to be carried out
separately.

280

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

11.1 Still Water Loads


Consider the forces acting on a section of the ship with a length dxb .

Figure 11.11: Still Water Loads on a Cross Section


According to Newton's second law of dynamics, the vertical forces on the unfastened disk of a
ship in still water are given by:
(m' dxb ) ( g ) = q3sw (xb ) dxb
with:
q3 sw = As g m' g
So, the vertical shear force Q3 sw ( x1 ) and the bending moment Q5 sw ( x1 ) in still water in a cross
section can be obtained from the vertical load q3 sw ( x1 ) by the following integrals:
x1

Q3 sw ( x1 ) = q3 sw (xb ) dxb
x0
x1

x1

x0

x0

Q5 sw ( x1 ) = + q3 sw ( xb ) xb dxb x1 q3 sw ( xb ) dxb
For obtaining the dynamic parts of the vertical shear forces and the vertical bending moments
in regular waves, reference is given to Fukuda [1962]. For the lateral mode and the roll mode
a similar procedure can be followed. This will be showed in the following Sections.

281

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

11.2 Dynamical Lateral Loads


Consider the forces acting on a section of the ship with a length dxb .

Figure 11.21: Lateral Loads on a Cross Section in Waves


According to Newton's second law of dynamics, the harmonic lateral dynamic load per unit
length on the unfastened disk is given by:
q2 (xb ) = + X h 2 ' ( xb ) + X w2 ' (xb )
&& z ' && + g
+ g A m' ( x ) &y& + x
s

The sectional hydromechanical loads for sway are given by:


'
'
'
'
X h 2 = a22 &y& b22 y& c22 y
'
'
'
a24 && b24 & c24
&& b26 ' & c26 '
a26 '
with:
a22 = +M
'

'
22

V dN 22 '
+ 2
e
dxb

b22 ' = + N 22' V

dM 22 '
dxb

c22 ' = 0
a24 ' = +M 24' + OG M 22 ' +
b24 = + N
'

'
24

V dN24 ' V
dN 22 '

OG

e 2 dxb
e 2
dxb

dM 24 '
dM 22 '
'

V
+ OG N 22 V
dxb
dxb

c24 = 0
'

a26 ' = +M 22' xb +


b26

'

V
e 2

dM 22 ' V
V dN 22 '
'
N22 ' V
+

N
+

xb
22
2
2
dx
dx

b
b

e
e

'
'
'
dM 22
V 2 dN22
'

= + N 22 V
x 2 V M 22 + 2
dxb b
dxb
e

c26 ' = 0
282

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

The sectional wave loads for sway are given by:


X w 2 = + M 22
'

'

&&w 2 * +

V
dN 22 ' && *

w2
e dxb

dM 22 ' & *
'

+
N 22 V

e
dxb w 2

'
+ X FK 2
The ''Modified Strip Theory'' includes the outlined terms. When ignoring the outlined terms
the ''Ordinary Strip Theory'' is presented.
Then the harmonic lateral shear forces Q2 ( x1 ) and the bending moments Q6 ( x1 ) in waves in
cross section x1 can be obtained from the horizontal load q 2 ( xb ) by the following integrals:
Q2 ( x1 ) = Q2 a cos e t + Q 2

x1

q2 (xb ) dxb
x0

Q6 ( x1 ) = Q6 a cos e t + Q 6

x1

x1

x0

x0

+ q2 ( xb ) xb dxb x1 q2 ( xb ) dxb

283

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

11.3 Dynamical Vertical Loads


Consider the forces acting on a section of the ship with a length dxb .

Figure 11.31: Vertical Loads on a Cross Section in Waves


According to Newton's second law of dynamics, the harmonic longitudinal and vertical
dynamic loads per unit length on the unfastened disk are given by:
q1 ( xb ) = + X h 1' ( xb ) + X w1' ( xb ) m' ( xb ) x&& bG &&
q ( x ) = + X ' (x ) + X ' ( x ) m' ( x ) z&& x &&
b

h3

w3

(
(

)
)

The sectional hydromechanical loads for surge are given by:


'
'
'
'
X h 1 = a11 &x& b11 x& c11 x
'
'
'
a13 &z& b13 z& c13 z
a15 ' && b15 ' & c15 '
with:
a11' = +M 11 ' +

V dN11'

e 2 dxb

b11 = + N11

dM 11
+ b11V
dxb

'

'

'

c11' = 0
a13' = 0
b13' = 0
c13' = 0
a15 ' = M 11' bG +

'

V dN11

bG
2
e dxb

'
'
dM 11

b15 = N11 V
bG b11V bG
dxb

'

c15 = 0
'

284

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

The sectional hydromechanical loads for heave are given by:


'
'
'
'
X h 3 = a31 &x& b31 x& c31 x
'
'
'
a33 &z& b33 z& c33 z
a35 ' && b35' & c35'
with:
a31' = 0
b31' = 0
c31 = 0
'

a33 = + M 33
'

'

V dN 33'
+ 2
dxb
e

b33 = + N33 V
'

'

dM 33 '
dxb

c33 = +2 g yw
'

a35 ' = M 33' xb

V
e 2

dM 33 ' V
V dN '
+ 2 N33 ' + 2 33 xb
N33 '
dxb e
e
dxb

dM 33'
V 2 dN33 '
'
b35 ' = N33 ' V

dx
+
2

dx
+

b
33
b
2

b
dx
dxb

b
L
L
e

c35 ' = 2 g yw xb
The sectional wave loads for surge and heave are given by:
X w1 ' = + M 11' &&w1* +

V
dN '
11 &&w1*
e dxb


dM 11 ' & *
+
N11' V

e
dxb w1

'
+ X FK1
'
'
*
X w 3 = + M 33 &&w 3 +

V
dN 33' && *

w 3
e dxb


dM 33 ' & *
'
+
N33 V

e
w3
dx
b

+ X FK 3 '
The ''Modified Strip Theory'' includes the outlined terms. When ignoring the outlined terms
the ''Ordinary Strip Theory'' is presented.

285

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Then the harmonic vertical shear forces Q3 ( x1 ) and the bending moments Q5 ( x1 ) in waves in
cross section x1 can be obtained from the longitudinal and vertical load q1 ( xb ) and q3 ( xb ) by
the following integrals:
Figure 11.32 shows a comparison between measured and calculated distributions of the
vertical wave bending moment amplitudes over the length of the ship.

Figure 11.32: Distribution of Vertical Bending Moment Amplitudes

286

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

11.4 Dynamical Torsion Loads


Consider the forces acting on a section of the ship with a length dxb .

Figure 11.41: Torsion Loads on a Cross Section in Waves


According to Newton's second law of dynamics, the harmonic torsion dynamic load per unit
length on the unfastened disk about a longitudinal axis at a distance z1 above the ship's centre
of gravity is given by:
q4 (xb , z1 ) = + X h 4 ' ( xb ) + X w 4 ' ( xb )

&& + g )
m' ( xb ) k xx ' && z m ' ( &y& + xb
+ z1 q2 ( xb )
2

The sectional hydromechanical load for roll is given by:


'
'
'
'
X h 4 = a42 &y& b42 y& c42 y
' &&
'
'
a44
b44 & c44
&& b46 ' & c46 '
a46 '
with:

287

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

a 42 ' = + M 42 ' + OG a 22 ' +

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

V dN 24 '

e 2 dxb

'

b42 = + N 42
'

dM 42
V
+ OG b22 '
dxb

'

c 24 ' = 0
a 44 ' = + M 44 ' + OG M 42 ' + OG a 24 ' +
b44 = + N 44
'

c 44

'

b46

'

dM 44 '
dM 42 '
'

V
+ OG N 42 V
dxb
dxb

'

+ b44V ' + OG b24 '

y w 3 As

= +2 g
+
bG
2
3

a 46 = + M 42
'

V dN 44 '
V
dN 42 '

OG

dx b
e 2 dxb
e 2

'

V
xb + 2
e

dM 42 '
V
V dN 42 '
'
'
'

N 42 V
+ OG a 26 + 2 N 42 + 2
xb
dxb
dx b
e
e

dM 42 '
'

= + N 42 V
dxb

'
2

xb 2 V M 42 ' + OG b26 ' + V 2 dN 42

dxb
e

c 46 ' = +OG c26 '


In here, bG is the vertical distance of the centre of gravity of the ship G above the centroid
b of the local submerged sectional area.
The sectional wave load for roll is given by:
'
'
*
X w 4 = + M 42 &&w 2 +

V
dN 42 ' && *

w2
e dxb

dM 42 ' & *
'
+
N 42 V

e
w2
dx
b

+ X FK 4 ' + OG X w2 '
The ''Modified Strip Theory'' includes the outlined terms. When ignoring the outlined terms
the ''Ordinary Strip Theory'' is presented.
Then the harmonic torsion moments Q4 ( x1 , z1 ) in waves in cross section x1 at a distance z1
above the centre of gravity can be obtained from the torsion load q4 (xb , z1 ) by the following
integral:
Q4 ( x1 , z1 ) = Q4 a cos e t + Q 4

x1

= q4 (xb , z1 ) dxb
x0

288

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

12 Statistics in Irregular Waves


To compare the calculated behaviour of different ship designs or to get an impression of the
behaviour of a specific ship design in a seaway, standard representations of the wave energy
distributions are necessary.
Three well-known types of normalised wave energy spectra are described here:
the Neumann wave spectrum, a somewhat wide wave spectrum, which is sometimes used
for open sea areas
the Bretschneider wave spectrum, an average wave spectrum, frequently used in open sea
areas
the Mean JONSWAP wave spectrum, a narrow wave spectrum, frequently used in North
Sea areas.
The mathematical formulations of these normalised uni-directional wave energy spectra are
based on two parameters:
the significant wave height H1 / 3
the average wave period T1 , based on the centroid of the spectral area curve.
To obtain the average zero-crossing period T2 or the spectral peak period T p , a fixed relation
with T1 can be used not-truncated spectra.
From these wave energy spectra and the transfer functions of the responses, the response
energy spectra can be obtained.
Generally the frequency ranges of the energy spectra of the waves and the responses of the
ship on these waves are not very wide. Then the Rayleigh distribution can be used to obtain a
probability density function of the maximum and minimum values of the waves and the
responses. With this function, the probabilities on exceeding threshold values by the ship
motions can be calculated.
Bow slamming phenomena are defined by a relative bow velocity criterion and a peak bottom
impact pressure criterion.

289

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

12.1 Normalised Wave Energy Spectra


Three mathematical definitions with two parameters of normalized spectra of irregular unidirectional waves have been described:
the Neumann wave spectrum, a somewhat wide spectrum
the Bretschneider wave spectrum, an average spectrum
the mean JONSWAP wave spectrum, a narrow spectrum
A comparison of the Neumann, the Bretschneider and the mean JONSWAP wave spectra is
given here for a sea state with a significant wave height of 4 meters and an average wave
period of 8 seconds.

Figure 12.11: Comparison of Three Spectral Formulations

12.1.1Neumann Wave Spectrum


In some cases in literature the Neumann definition of a wave spectrum for open sea areas is
used:
2
69.8

3832 H1 / 3
S () =
6 exp 2 2
5
T1
T1

12.1.2Bretschneider Wave Spectrum


A very well known two-parameter wave spectrum of open seas is defined by Bretschneider as:
2
691.2 4
172.8 H1 / 3
S () =
5 exp

4
2
T1
T1

290

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Another name of this wave spectrum is the Modified Two-Parameter Pierson-Moskowitz


Wave Spectrum.
This formulation is accepted by the 2nd International Ship Structures Congress in 1967 and
the 12th International Towing Tank Conference in 1969 as a standard for seakeeping
calculations and model experiments. This is reason why this spectrum is also called I.S.S.C.
or I.T.T.C. Wave Spectrum.
The original One-Parameter Pierson-Moskowitz Wave Spectrum for fully developed seas can
be obtained from this definition by using a fixed relation between the significant wave height
and the average wave period in this Bretschneider definition: T1 = 3.861 H1 / 3 .

12.1.3Mean JONSWAP Wave Spectrum


In 1968 and 1969 an extensive wave measurement program, known as the Joint North Sea
Wave Project (JONSWAP) was carried out along a line extending over 100 miles into the
North Sea from Sylt Island. From analysis of the measured spectra, a spectral formulation of
wind generated seas with a fetch limitation was found.
The following definition of a Mean JONSWAP wave spectrum is advised by the 15th ITTC in
1978 for fetch limited situations:
2
691.2 4
172.8 H1 / 3
S () =
5 exp
A B
4
2
T1
T1

with:
A = 0.658
2


1.0

p

B = exp

2

= 3.3
(peakedness factor)
2
p =
(circular frequency at spectral peak)
Tp
= a step function of :

if < p then: = 0.07


if > p then: = 0.09

The JONSWAP expression is equal to the Bretschneider definition multiplied by the


frequency function A B .
Sometimes, a third free parameter is introduced in the JONSWAP wave spectrum by varying
the peakedness factor .

12.1.4Definition of Parameters
The nth order spectral moments of the wave spectrum, defined as a function of the circular
wave frequency , are:
291

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

mn = S () n d
0

The breadth of a wave spectrum is defined by:


2

= 1

m2
m0 m4

The significant wave height is defined by:


H1 / 3 = 4 m0
The several definitions of the average wave period are:
Tp
peak or modal wave period, corresponding to peak of spectral
curve
m
T1 = 2 0
average wave period, corresponding to centroid of spectral
m1
curve
m0
T2 = 2
average zero-crossing wave period, corresponding to radius of
m2
inertia of spectral curve
For not-truncated mathematically defined spectra, the theoretical relations between the periods
are tabled below:
T1 = 1.086 T2
0.921 T1 =
T2
1.296 T1 = 1.407 T2
T1
0.932 T1
1.199 T1

= 1.073 T2
=
T2
= 1.287 T2

= 0.772 Tp

= 0.711 Tp for Bretschneider wave spectra


=
Tp
= 0.834 Tp

= 0.777 Tp for JONSWAP wave spectra


=
Tp

Truncation of wave spectra during numerical calculations can cause differences between input
and calculated wave periods. Generally, the wave heights will not differ much.
In Figure 12.12 and Table 12.11 - for ''Open Ocean Areas'' and ''North Sea Areas'' - an
indication is given of a possible average relation between the scale of Beaufort or the wind
velocity at 19.5 meters above the sea level and the significant wave height H1 / 3 and the
average wave periods T1 or T2 .
Notice that these data are an indication only. A generally applicable fixed relation between
wave heights and wave periods does not exist.

292

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Figure 12.12: Wave Spectra Parameter Indications

Table 12.11: Wave Spectra Parameter Indications

293

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Other open ocean definitions for the North Atlantic and the North Pacific, obtained from
Bales [1983] and adopted by the 17th ITTC (1984), are given in Table 12.12. The modal or
central periods in these tables correspond with the peak period T p . For not-truncated spectra,
the relations with T1 and T2 are defined before.

Table 12.12: Sea State Parameters

294

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

12.2 Response Spectra and Statistics


The energy spectrum of the responses r (t ) of a sailing ship in the irregular waves follows
from the transfer function of the response and the wave energy spectrum by:
2

r
S r () = a S ()
a

or

r
S r (e ) = a
a

S (e )

This has been visualized for a heave motion in Figure 12.21and Figure 12.22.

Figure 12.21: Principle of Transfer of Waves into Responses

295

Spectral density heave (m2s)

Transfer function heave (m/m)

Spectral density wave (m 2s)

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

W av e
s pe c tru m

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

H 1/3 = 5 .0 0 m

W av e
s p ec trum

T 2 = 8.00 s

H 1/3 = 5.00 m
T = 8 .0 0 s
2

0
0

2.0

0.5

1.0

2 .0

0
2 .0

T ra ns fer
fun c ti on
h eav e

1.5

1 .5

C onta ine rs hi p
L = 17 5 m e tre
H ead w av e s
V = 20 k no ts

1.0

0.5

1.0

T ran s fer
fu nc tio n
he av e

1 .5

1.5

2.0

C on tain ers h ip
L = 1 75 m etre
H ea d w av e s
V = 2 0 k n ots

1 .0

0.5

0 .5

0
0

0.5

1.0

2 .0

0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

H e av e
s p ec tru m

1 .5

a1 /3

= 1.92 m

z
6

T z = 7.74 s

a1/3

= 1 .92 m

T z = 7 .74 s

0
0

0.5

1.0

1 .5

2 .0

w a v e fre qu en cy (ra d/s )

0.5

1 .0

1.5

2 .0

fr eq ue nc y of en c ou nter ( rad /s )

Figure 12.22: Heave Spectra in the Wave and Encounter Frequency Domain
The moments of the response spectrum are given by:

mnr = Sr (e ) e de
n

with: n = 0,1, 2,...

From the spectral density function of a response the significant amplitude can be calculated.
The significant amplitude is defined to be the mean value of the highest one-third part of the
highest wave heights, so:
ra 1 / 3 = 2 m0 r
A mean period can be found from the centroid of the spectrum by:
m
T1 r = 2 0 r
m1 r
Another definition, which is equivalent to the average zero-crossing period, is found from the
spectral radius of inertia by:
m0 r
T2 r = 2
m2 r
The probability density function of the maximum and minimum values, in case of a spectrum
with a frequency range that is not too wide, is given by the Rayleigh distribution:

296

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest
f (ra ) =

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

r2
ra
exp a
m0 r
2 m0 r

This implies that the probability of exceeding a threshold value a by the response amplitude
ra becomes:
ra 2
ra
P{ra > a} =
exp
dra
m0 r
a
2 m0 r

a2
= exp

2 m0 r
The number of times per hour that this happens follows from:
3600
N hour =
P{ra > a}
T2 r
The spectral value of the waves S (e ) , based on e , is not equal to the spectral value
S () , based on . Because of the requirement of an equal amount of energy in the

frequency bands e and , it follows:


S (e ) de = S () d
From this the following relation is found:
S ()
S (e ) =
de d
The relation between the frequency of encounter and the wave frequency, of which an
example is illustrated in Figure 12.23, is given by:
e = k V cos

Figure 12.23: Example of Relation Between e and

297

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

From the relation between e and follows:


de
V cos
= 1.0
d
d dk
The derivative d dk follows from the relation between and k :
= k g tanh [k h]

So:
d
=
dk

kg
h cosh 2 [k h ]
2 k g tanh [k h]

g tanh [k h] +

As can be seen in Figure 12.23, in following waves the derivative de d can approach
from both sides, a positive or a negative side, to zero. As a result of this, around a wave speed
equal to twice the forward ship speed component in the direction of the wave propagation, the
transformed spectral values will range from plus infinite to minus infinite. This implies that
numerical problems will arise in the numerical integration routine.
This is the reason why the spectral moments have to be written in the following format:
m0r
m1r

=
=

S ( ) d
r

S ( ) d

S ( )

m2r

de

S () d
r

S () d
r

S ()
r

with:
2

r
S r () = a S ()
a
If Sr (e ) has to be known, for instance for a comparison of the calculated response spectra
with measured response spectra, these values can be obtained from this Sr () and the
derivative de d . So an integration of Sr (e ) over e has to be avoided.
Because of the linearities, the calculated significant values can be presented by:
ra 1 / 3
versus T1 or T2
H1 / 3
with:
H1 / 3 significant wave height
T1 ,T2 average wave periods

298

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

The mean added resistance in a seaway follows from:

R
RAW = 2 aw2 S () d
0 a
Because of the linearities of the motions, the calculated mean added resistance values can be
presented by:
RAW
versus T1 or T2
H1/ 32

299

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

12.3 Shipping Green Water


The effective dynamic freeboard will differ from the results obtained from the geometric
freeboard at zero forward speed in still water and the calculated vertical relative motions of a
sailing ship in waves.
When sailing in still water, sinkage, trim and the ship's wave system will effect the local
geometric freeboard. A static swell up should be taken into account.
An empirical formula, based on model experiments, for the static swell up at the forward
perpendicular is given by Tasaki [1963]:
L
f e = f 0.75 B
Fn 2
LE
with:
fe
effective freeboard at the forward perpendicular
f
geometric freeboard at the forward perpendicular
L
length of the ship
B
breadth of the ship
LE
length of entrance of the waterline
Fn
Froude number
An oscillating ship will produce waves and these dynamic phenomena will influence the
amplitude of the relative motion. A dynamic swell up should be taken into account.
Tasaki [1963] carried out forced oscillation tests with ship models in still water and obtained
an empirical formula for the dynamic swell-up at the forward perpendicular in head waves:
s a CB 0.45 e 2 L
=

sa
3
g
with the restrictions:
block coefficient:
Froude number:

0.60 < CB < 0.80


0.16 < Fn < 0.29

In this formula sa is the amplitude of the relative motion at the forward perpendicular as
obtained in head waves, calculated from the heave, the pitch and the wave motions.
Then the actual amplitude of the relative motions becomes:
*
sa = sa + s a
Then, shipping green water is defined by:
*
sa > f e at the forward perpendicular
The spectral density of the vertical relative motion at the forward perpendicular is given by:
s*
Ss * () = a S ()
a
2

The spectral moments are given by:

mns * = S s * () e d
n

with: n = 0,1, 2,...

300

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

When using the Rayleigh distribution the probability of shipping green water is given by:
f e 2
P sa * > f e = exp

2 m0 s *

The average zero-crossing period of the relative motion is found from the spectral radius of
inertia by:
m0 s *
T2 s * = 2
m2 s *
The number of times per hour that green water will be shipped follows from:
3600
*
N hour =
P s a > fe
T2 s *

301

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

12.4 Bow Slamming


Slamming is a two-node vibration of the ship caused by suddenly pushing the ship by the
waves. A complete prediction of slamming phenomena is a complex task, which is beyond the
scope of any existing theory.
Slamming impact pressures are affected by the local hull section shape, the relative velocity
between ship and waves at impact, the relative angle between the keel and the water surface,
the local flexibility of the ship's bottom plating and the overall flexibility of the ship's
structure.

12.4.1Criterium of Ochi
Ochi [1964] translated slamming phenomena into requirements for the vertical relative
motions of the ship.
He defined slamming by:
an emergence of the bow of the ship at 10 percentile of the length aft of the forward
perpendiculars
an exceeding of a certain critical value at the instance of impact by the vertical relative
velocity, without forward speed effect, between the wave surface and the bow of the ship
Ochi defines the vertical relative displacement and velocity of the water particles with respect
to the keel point of the ship by:
s = x b z + xb
s& = & z& + x &
xb

with:

xb = a cos(e t k xb cos )
& xb = e a sin (e t k xb cos )
So a forward speed effect (V -term) is not included in this vertical relative velocity. The
spectral moments of the vertical relative displacements and velocities are defined by m0 s and
m0 &s .
Emergence of the bow of the ship happens when the vertical relative displacement amplitude
sa at 0.90 L is larger than the ship's draft Ds at this location.
The probability of emergence of the bow follows from:
Ds 2
P{sa > Ds } = exp

2 m0 s
The second requirement states that the vertical relative velocity exceeds a threshold value.
According to Ochi, 12 feet per second can be taken as a threshold value for a ship with a
length of 520 feet.
Scaling results into:
s&cr = 0.0928 g L
The probability of exceeding this threshold value is:

302

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

s& 2
P{s&a > s&cr } = exp cr
2 m0 s&
Both occurrences, emergence of the bow and exceeding the threshold velocity, are statistically
independent. In case of slamming both occurrences have to appear at the same time.
So the probability on a slam is the product of the both independent probabilities:
P{slam} = P{s a > Ds } P{s&a > s&cr }
2
Ds2
s&cr
= exp
+

2 m0 s 2 m0 s&

12.4.2Criterium of Conolly
Conolly [1974] translated slamming phenomena into requirements for the peak impact
pressure of the ship.
He defined slamming by:
an emergence of the bow of the ship
an exceeding of a certain critical value by the peak impact pressure at this location.
The peak impact pressure is defined by:
1
p = C p s&cr 2
2
The coefficient C p has been taken from experimental data of slamming drop tests with
wedges and cones, as given in literature.
Some of these data, as for instance presented by Lloyd [1989] as a function of the deadrise
angle , are illustrated in Figure 12.41.

Figure 12.41: Peak Impact Pressure Coefficients


An equivalent deadrise angle is defined here by the determination of an equivalent wedge.
The contour of the cross section inside 10 percentile of the half breadth B 2 of the ship has
been used to define an equivalent wedge with a half breadth: b = 0.10 B 2 .
303

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

The accessory draught t of the wedge follows from the section contour. In the fore body of
the ship, this draught can be larger than 10 percentile of the amidships draught T . If so, the
section contour below 0.10 T has been used to define an equivalent wedge: t = 0.10 T . If
this draught is larger than the local draught, the local draught has been used.
The accessory half breadth b of the wedge follows from the section contour.

Figure 12.42: Definition of an Equivalent Wedge


Then the sectional area As below local draught t has to be calculated.
Now the equivalent deadrise angle follows from:
a
= arctan
b
2 (b t As )
a=
b

0 2

Critical peak impact pressures pcr have been taken from Conolly [1974]. He gives measured
impact pressures at a ship with a length of 112 meter over 30 per cent of the ship length from
forward. From this, a lower limit of pcr has been assumed. This lower limit is presented in
Figure 12.43.

Figure 12.43: Measured Impact Pressures of a 112 Meter Ship


These values have to be scaled to the actual ship size. Bow emergence and exceeding of this
limit is supposed to cause slamming.
304

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

This approach can be translated into local hull-shape-depending threshold values of the
vertical relative velocity too:
2 pcr
s&cr =
Cp
The vertical relative velocity, including a forward speed effect, of the water particles with
respect to the keel point of the ship is defined by:
D
s& =
z + xb
Dt xb
= & xb z& + xb & V
with:
xb = a cos(e t k xb cos )
& = sin ( t k x cos )

xb

Then:
2
Ds 2
s&cr
P{slam} = exp
+

2 m0 s 2 m0 s&

Notice that, because of including the forward speed effect, the spectral moment of the
velocities does not follow from the spectral density of the relative displacement as showed in
the definition of Ochi.
The average period of the relative displacement is found by:
m0s
m0 s
T2 s = 2
= 2
m2s
m0 s&
Then the number of times per hour that a slam will occur follows from:
3600
N hour =
P{slam}
T2 s

305

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

306

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

13 Twin-Hull Ships
When not taking into account the interaction effects between the two individual hulls, the
wave loads and motions of twin-hull ships can be calculated easily. Each individual hull has to
be symmetric with respect to its centre plane. The distance between the two centre planes of
the single hulls (2 yT ) should be constant. The co-ordinate system for the equations of
motion of a twin-hull ship is given in Figure 12.41.

Figure 12.41: Co-ordinate System of Twin-Hull Ships

13.1 Hydromechanical Coefficients


The hydromechanical coefficients aij , bij and cij in this section are those of one individual
hull, defined in the co-ordinate system of the single hull, as given and discussed before.

307

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

13.2 Equations of Motion


The equations of motion for six degrees of freedom of a twin-hull ship are defined by:
Surge :
Sway :
Heave
Roll :
Pitch :
Yaw :

T &x&
T &y&
T &z&
&&
ITxx && I Txz
ITyy &&
&&
&& I Tzx
ITzz

X Th 1
X Th 2
X Th 3
X Th 4
X Th 5
X Th 6

=
=
=
=
=
=

X Tw1
X Tw 2
X Tw 3
X Tw 4
X Tw 5
X Tw 6

in which:
T
I Tij

volume of displacement of the twin-hull ship


solid mass moment of inertia of the twin-hull ship

X Th1 , X Th 2 , X Th 3
X Th 4 , X Th 5 , X Th 6
X Tw1 , X Tw 2 , X Tw3
X Tw 4 , X Tw5 , X Tw 6

hydromechanical forces in the x -, y - and z -directions


hydromechanical moments about the x -, y - and z -axes
exciting wave forces in the x -, y - and z -directions
exciting wave moments about the x -, y - and z -axes

308

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

13.3 Hydromechanical Forces and Moments


The equations of motion for six degrees of freedom and the hydromechanical forces and
moments in here, are defined by:
X Th1

= + 2 a11 &x& + 2 b11 x& + 2 c11 x


+ 2 a13 &z& + 2 b13 z& + 2 c13 z
+ 2 a15 && + 2 b15 & + 2 c15

X Th 2

= + 2 a22 &y& + 2 b22 y& + 2 c22 y


+ 2 a24 && + 2 b24 & + 2 c24
&& + 2 b26 & + 2 c26
+ 2 a26

X Th 3

= + 2 a31 &x& + 2 b31 x& + 2 c31 x


+ 2 a33 &z& + 2 b33 z& + 2 c33 z
+ 2 a35 && + 2 b35 & + 2 c35

X Th 4

= + 2 a42 &y&
+ 2 a44 &&
+ 2 yT 2 a33 &&
&&
+ 2 a46

X Th 5

= + 2 a51 &x& + 2 b51 x& + 2 c51 x


+ 2 a53 &z& + 2 b53 z& + 2 c53 z
+ 2 a55 && + 2 b55 & + 2 c55

X Th 6

= + 2 a62 &y&
+ 2 a64 &&
&&
+ 2 a66

+ 2 b42 y&
+ 2 b44 &
+ 2 yT 2 b33 &
+ 2 b46 &

+ 2 c42 y
+ 2 c44
+ 2 yT 2 c33
+ 2 c46

+ 2 b62 y&
+ 2 b64 &
+ 2 b66 &

+ 2 c62 y
+ 2 c64
+ 2 c66
2
2
&& + 2 yT b11 & + 2 yT 2 c11
+ 2 yT a11

In here, yT is half the distance between the centre planes.

309

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

13.4 Exciting Wave Forces and Moments


The first order wave potential for an arbitrary water depth h is defined in the new co-ordinate
system by:
g cosh [k (h + z b )]
w =

a sin (e t k xb cos k y b sin )

cosh [k h]
This holds that for the port side ( ps ) and starboard (sb ) hulls the equivalent components of
the orbital accelerations and velocities in the surge, sway, heave and roll directions are equal
to:
*
*
&&w1 ( ps ) = k g cos a 1 sin (e t k xb cos k yT sin )
&&w1* (sb ) = k g cos a 1* sin (e t k xb cos + k yT sin )

+ k g cos
*
*
&w1 ( ps ) =
a 1 cos(e t k xb cos k yT sin )

+ k g cos
&w1* (sb ) =
a 1* cos(e t k xb cos + k yT sin )

*
*
&&w 2 ( ps ) = k g sin a 2 sin (e t k xb cos k yT sin )
&&w 2 * (sb ) = k g sin a 2 * sin (e t k xb cos + k yT sin )

+ k g sin
*
*
&w 2 ( ps ) =
a 2 cos (e t k xb cos k yT sin )

+ k g sin
&w 2 * (sb ) =
a 2 * cos (e t k xb cos + k yT sin )

*
*
&&w 3 ( ps ) = k g a 3 cos (e t k xb cos k yT sin )
&&w 3* (sb ) = k g a 3 * cos (e t k xb cos + k yT sin )

+kg
*
*
&w 3 ( ps ) =
a 3 sin (e t k xb cos k yT sin )

+
k
g
&w 3* (sb ) =
a 3* sin (e t k xb cos + k yT sin )

From this follows the total wave loads for the degrees of freedom. In these loads on the
following pages, the ''Modified Strip Theory'' includes the outlined terms. When ignoring
these outlined terms the ''Ordinary Strip Theory'' is presented.

310

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

The exciting wave forces for surge are:

'
*
*
X Tw1 = + M 11 &&w1 ( ps ) + &&w1 ( sb ) dxb
L

V
dN '
11 &&w1* ( ps ) + &&w1* (sb ) dxb
e L dxb

dM 11' & *
'

+
N11 V
w1 ( ps ) + &w1* (sb ) dxb
e
dxb
L

+ X FK 1' ( ps ) + X FK 1' ( sb ) dxb


L

The exciting wave forces for sway are:

'
*
*
X Tw 2 = + M 22 &&w 2 ( ps ) + &&w 2 ( sb ) dxb
L

V
dN 22 ' && *
+

w2 ( ps ) + &&w2 * (sb ) dxb


e L dxb

dM 22 ' & *
+
N22 ' V
w 2 ( ps ) + &w 2 * ( sb ) dxb
e
dxb
L

+ X FK 2 ' ( ps ) + X FK 2 ' (sb ) dxb


L

The exciting wave forces for heave are:

'
*
*
X Tw3 = + M 33 &&w3 ( ps ) + &&w 3 (sb ) dxb
L

V
dN '
33 &&w 3* ( ps ) + &&w3 * (sb ) dxb
e L dxb

dM 33' & *
+
N 33' V
w3 ( ps ) + &w 3* (sb ) dxb

e
dxb
L

+ X FK 3 ' ( ps ) + X FK 3 ' (sb ) dxb


L

311

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

The exciting wave moments for roll are:

X Tw 4 = + M 42 ' &&w 2 * ( ps ) + &&w 2 * (sb ) dxb


L

V
dN '
42 &&w2 * ( ps ) + &&w 2* (sb ) dxb
e L dxb

'

dM 42 & *
'
*

+
N42 V
w 2 ( ps ) + &w 2 (sb ) dxb
e
dxb
L

+ X FK 4 ' ( ps ) + X FK 4 ' (sb ) dxb


L

+ OG X Tw 2 + yT X Tw 3

The exciting wave moments for pitch are:

X w 5 = M 11' bG &&w1* ( ps ) + &&w1 * ( sb ) dxb


L

V
dN11'
*
*
+

bG &&w1 ( ps ) + &&w1 ( sb ) dxb


e L dxb

dM 11'
'

N11 V
bG &w1* ( ps ) + &w1* (sb ) dxb
e
dxb
L

X FK1 ( ps ) + X FK1 (sb ) bG dxb


'

'

M 33 ' xb &&w3 * ( ps ) + &&w 3* ( sb ) dxb


L

V
dN
*
*
33 xb &&w3 ( ps ) + &&w 3 (sb ) dxb
e L dxb
'


dM 33 '

N33 ' V
xb &w 3* ( ps ) + &w3 * (sb ) dxb

e
dxb
L

X FK 3 ( ps ) + X FK 3 ( sb ) xb dxb
'

'

312

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

The exciting wave moments for yaw are:

X Tw 6 = + M 22 ' xb &&w 2 * ( ps ) + &&w 2 * (sb ) dxb


L

V
dN '
22 xb &&w 2* ( ps ) + &&w 2* ( sb ) dxb
e L dxb


dM 22 '
'

+
N22 V
xb &w 2 * ( ps ) + &w 2 * (sb ) dxb
e
dxb
L

+ X FK 2 ' ( ps ) + X FK 2 ' ( sb ) xb dxb


L

+ yT X Tw1

313

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

13.5 Added Resistance due to Waves


The added resistance can be found easily from the definitions of the mono-hull ship by using
the wave elevation at each individual centre line and replacing the heave motion z by:
z ( ps ) = z + yT
and
z (sb ) = z yT

13.5.1Radiated Energy Method


The transfer function of the mean added resistance of twin-hull ships according to the method
of Gerritsma and Beukelman [1972] becomes:
2
2
'
*
*
Raw k cos '
dM 33 Vza ( ps ) Vza (sb )
=
N33 V
2

+
dxb
2 e
dx
a
b
a
a
L

with:
*
*
Vz ( ps ) = &w3 ( ps ) z& xb & + V yT &
Vz * (sb ) = &w3 * (sb ) z& xb & + V + yT &

(
(

)
)

+kg
*
*
&w 3 ( ps ) =
a 3 sin (e t k xb cos k yT sin )

+kg
&w 3* (sb ) =
a 3* sin (e t k xb cos + k yT sin )

13.5.2Integrated Pressure Method


The transfer function of the mean added resistance of twin-hull ships according to the method
of Boese [1970] becomes:

Raw 1
z xa 2 2 sa cos ( k xb cos s ) dyw

dxb
2
L a 2

2
a tanh [k h ]
a
ps dxb
2

2 s a cos( k xb cos s ) dy w
1
z xa


dxb
g 1 2

tanh
[
k

h
]

a
L
a
sb dxb

1
e 2 za a cos(z ) ps
2
1
+ e 2 za a cos(z )sb
2
+

with:

( ps ) = a cos(e t k xb cos k yT sin )

(sb ) = a cos(e t k xb cos + k yT sin )


z x ( ps ) = z xb + yT
z x (sb ) = z xb yT
s ( ps ) = ( ps ) z + xb yT
s (sb ) = (sb ) z + xb + yT

314

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

13.6 Bending and Torsion Moments


According to Newton's second law of dynamics, the harmonic lateral, vertical and torsion
dynamic loads per unit length on the unfastened disk of a twin-hull ship are given by:
qT 1 (xb ) = + X Th 1 ' (xb ) + X Tw1' ( xb )
m ' (x ) &x& bG &&
T

qT 2 (xb ) = + X Th 2 ( xb ) + X Tw 2 ( xb ) + 2 g As
&& + g
&& z m '
mT ' (xb ) &y& + xb
'

'

qT 3 (xb ) = + X Th 3 ( xb ) + X Tw 3 (xb )
mT ' (xb ) &z& xb &&
'

'

qT 4 ( xb , z1 ) = + X Th 4 ' ( xb ) + X Tw 4 ' ( xb )

&& z (&y& + x
&& + g )
mT (xb ) kTxx
m
b
+ z1 qT 2 (xb )
'

In here:
mT '
kTxx
As

'2

'

mass per unit length of the twin-hull ship


'

local sold mass radius of inertia for roll


sectional area of one hull

The calculation procedure of the forces and moments is similar to the procedure given before
for mono-hull ships.

315

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

316

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

14 Numerical Recipes
Some typical numerical recipes, as used in the strip theory program SEAWAY, are described
in more detail here.

14.1 Polynomials
Discrete points can be connected by a first degree or a second degree polynomial, see Figure
14.11-a,b.

Figure 14.11: First and Second Order Polynomials Through Discrete Points

14.1.1First Degree Polynomial


A first degree - or linear - polynomial, as given in Figure 14.11-a, is defined by:
f (x ) = a x + b
with in the interval xm < x < x0 the following coefficients:
f ( x0 ) f (xm )
a=
x0 xm
b = f ( x0 ) a x0

and in the interval x0 < x < x p the following coefficients:


f (x p ) f ( x0 )
a=
x p x0
b = f ( x0 ) a x0

Notice that only one interval is required for obtaining the coefficients in that interval.

317

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

14.1.2Second Degree Polynomial


A second-degree polynomial, as given in Figure 14.11-b, is defined by:
f (x ) = a x 2 + b x + c
with in the interval xm < x < x p the following coefficients:
f (x p ) f ( x0 ) f (x0 ) f ( xm )

x p x0
x0 xm
a=
x p xm
b=

f (x p ) f ( x0 )
a (x p + x0 )
x p x0

c = f ( x0 ) a x0 2 b x0
Notice that two intervals are required for obtaining these coefficients, valid in both intervals.

318

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

14.2 Integrations
Either the trapezoid rule or Simpsons general rule can carry out numerical integration.
SEAWAY uses Simpson's general rule as a standard. Then, the integration has to be carried
out over a number of sets of two intervals, see Figure 14.11-b. Numerical inaccuracies can
be expected when x0 xm << x p x0 or x p x0 << x0 xm . In those cases the trapezoid rule
has to be preferred, see Figure 14.11-a.
SEAWAY makes the choice between the use of the trapezoid rule and Simpson's rule
automatically, based on the following requirements:
x0 xm
x0 xm
Trapezoid rile, if:
< 0.2
or
> 5.0
x p xm
x p xm
x xm
Simpsons rule, if:
0.2 < 0
< 5.0
x p xm

14.2.1First Degree Integration


First-degree integration - carried out by the trapezoid rule, see Figure 14.11-a - means the
use of a linear function:
f (x ) = a x + b
The integral over the interval x p x0 becomes:
xp

xp

x0

x0

f (x ) dx = (a x + b ) dx
x

p
1
= a x2 + b x
2
x0

with:
a=

f (x p ) f ( x0 )
x p x0

b = f ( x0 ) a x0

Integration over two intervals results into:


xp
(x0 xm ) f ( xm ) + ( x p xm ) f (x0 ) + (x p x0 ) f (x p )
x f ( x ) dx =
2
m

14.2.2Second Degree Integration


Second-degree integration - carried out by Simpson's rule, see Figure 14.11-b has to be
carried out over a set of two intervals. At each of the two intervals, the integrand is described
by a second-degree polynomial:
f (x ) = a x 2 + b x + c
319

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Then the integral becomes:


xp

xp

f ( x ) dx = (a x

xm

+ b x + c dx

xm

p
1
1

3
2
= a x + b x + c x
2
3
xm

with:

f (x p ) f ( x0 ) f (x0 ) f ( xm )

x p x0
x0 xm
a=
x p xm
f (x p ) f ( x0 )
a (x p + x0 )
x p x0

b=

c = f ( x0 ) a x0 2 b x0
Some algebra leads for the integration over these two intervals to:
x p x0

x0 xm 2

f ( xm ) +

x0 x m

xp
2

x x
(
x p xm )

p
m
(
)
(
)
x f x dx = 2 ( x0 xm ) (x p x0 ) f x0 + 3

x xm
x p x0 0

f (xp )
x p x0

14.2.3Integration of Wave Loads


The total wave loads can be written as:
Fw = Fwa cos e t + F w

= Fwa cos F w cos (e t ) + Fwa sin F w sin (e t )

The in-phase and out-phase parts of the total wave loads have to be obtained from
longitudinal integration of sectional values. Direct numerical integration of
'
'
Fwa cos F ' dxb and Fwa sin F ' dxb over the ship length, L , require integration

intervals, xb , which are much smaller than the smallest wave length, xb min 10 . This
means that a large number of cross sections are required.
This can be avoided by writing the integrands in terms of f 1 ( x ) cos x dx and f 2 ( x ) sin x dx ,
in which the integrands f 1, 2 ( x ) vary much slower over short wave lengths as the harmonics
itself.
320

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

The functions f 1, 2 ( x ) can be approximated by a second degree polynomial:


f (x ) = a x 2 + b x + c

When making use of the general integral rules:


cos x dx = + sin x

x cos x dx = cos x + x sin x


x cos x dx = +2 x cos x + (x
2

2 sin x

and:

sin x dx = cos x
x sin x dx = sin x x cos x
x sin x dx = +2 x sin x (x
2

2 cos x

the following expressions can be obtained for the in-phase and out-phase parts of the wave
loads, integrated from xm through x p , so over the two intervals x0 xm and x p x0 :
xp

xp

xm

xm

F (x ) dx = f (x ) cos x dx
xp

(a x

+ b x + c cos x dx

xm

xp

xp

xp

xm

xm

= a x cos x dx + b x cos x dx + c cos x dx


2

xm

= [+ ( f ( x ) 2a ) sin x + (2 a x + b ) cos x ]xmp


x

xp

xp

xm

xm

F (x ) dx = f (x ) sin x dx
xp

(a x

+ b x + c sin x dx

xm

xp

xp

xp

xm

xm

= a x sin x dx + b x sin x dx + c sin x dx


2

xm

= [ ( f ( x ) 2a ) cos x + (2 a x + b ) sin x ]xx mp


with coefficients obtained by:

321

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

f (x p ) f ( x0 ) f (x0 ) f ( xm )

x p x0
x0 xm
a=
x p xm
b=

f (x p ) f ( x0 )
a (x p + x0 )
x p x0

c = f ( x0 ) a x0 2 b x0
With this approach, the wave loads on a barge, for instance, can be calculated by using two
section intervals only for any length of the barge.

322

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

14.3 Derivatives
First and second degree functions, of which the derivatives have to be determined, have been
given in Figure 14.31-a,b.

Figure 14.31: Determination of Longitudinal Derivatives

14.3.1First Degree Derivative


The two polynomials - each valid over two intervals below and above x = x0 - are given by:
for x < x0 :
f (x ) = am x + bm
for x > x0 :
f (x ) = a p x + b p
The derivative is given by:
df ( x )
for x < x0 :
= am
dx
df ( x )
for x > x0 :
= ap
dx
It is obvious that, generally, the derivative at the left-hand side of x0 - with index m (minus) and the derivative at the right-hand side of x0 - with index p (plus) - will differ:
df
df



dx x = x 0 m (minus or left of zero dx x = x0 p (plusor right of zero
A mean derivative df dx at x = x0 can be obtained by:

df
=

dx x = x0

+ (x x ) df


p
0
dx x = x0 m
dx x = x 0 p

( x0 xm ) df

x p xm

14.3.2Second Degree Derivative


323

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

The two polynomials - each valid over two intervals below and above x = x0 - are given by:
f (x ) = am x 2 + bm x + cm

for x < x0 :
for x > x0 :

f (x ) = a p x 2 + bp x + c p

A derivative of a second degree function:


f (x ) = a x 2 + b x + c
is given by:
df ( x )
= 2a x + b
dx
This leads for x < x0 to:

df

dx x = xm 2

2 (xm 1 xm 2 ) ( x0 xm1 ) { f ( xm 1 ) f ( xm 2 )}

2
( xm1 xm 2 ) { f (x0 ) f ( xm 1 )}

2
+ ( x0 xm1 ) { f ( xm1 ) f ( xm 2 )}

=
( xm1 xm2 ) ( x0 xm1 ) (x0 xm 2 )

df

dx x = x m1

+ ( xm1 xm 2 )2 { f ( x0 ) f (xm 1 )}

+ ( x0 xm1 )2 { f ( xm1 ) f ( xm 2 )}
=
( xm1 xm2 ) (x0 xm1 ) (x0 xm 2 )

df

dx x = x0

+ 2 ( xm1 xm 2 ) ( x0 xm 1 ) { f (x0 ) f ( xm 1 )}

2
+ ( xm1 xm 2 ) { f ( x0 ) f (xm 1 )}

2
( x0 xm1 ) { f ( xm1 ) f (xm 2 )}

=
(xm1 xm 2 ) ( x0 xm1 ) ( x0 xm2 )

and for x > x0 to:

324

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

df

dx x = xm 2

2 (x p 1 xm 2 ) (x p 2 x p 1 ) { f (x p 1 ) f (x0 )}

2
(
)
{
(
)
(
)
}

f
x

f
x

p1
0
p2
p1

2
+ (x p 2 x p 1 ) { f (x p1 ) f ( x0 )}

=
(x p1 x0 ) (x p 2 x p1 ) (x p2 x0 )

df

dx x = x m1

+ (x p 1 x0 )2 { f (x p 2 ) f (x p 1 )}

2
+ (x p 2 x p 1 ) { f (x p1 ) f ( x0 )}
=
(x p1 x0 ) ( x p2 x p1 ) (x p2 x0 )

df

dx x = x0

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

+ 2 (x p 1 x0 ) (x p 2 x p1 ) { f (x p 2 ) f (x p 1 )}

2
+ (x p 1 x0 ) { f (x p 2 ) f (x p 1 )}

2
(x p 2 x p 1 ) { f (x p1 ) f ( x0 )}

=
(x p1 x0 ) (x p 2 x p1 ) (x p 2 x0 )

Generally, the derivative at the left-hand side of x0 - with index m (minus) - and the
derivative at the right-hand side of x0 - with index p (plus) - will differ:
df
df



dx x = x 0 m (minus or left of zero dx x = x0 p (plusor right of zero
A mean derivative df dx at x = x0 can be obtained by:
df

dx x = x0

df

df

d m + d p
dx x = x0 m
dx x = x 0 p
=
dm + d p

with:
x xm 2

x0 xm1 m1
( x0 x m 2 )
2

dm =
3 ( x0 xm1 )
x x p1

x p1 x0 p 2
(x p 2 x0 )
2

dp =
3 (x p 1 x0 )

325

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

14.4 Curve Lengths


Discrete points, connected by a first degree or a second degree polynomial, are given in
Figure 14.41-a,b.

Figure 14.41: First and Second Order Curves


The curve length follows from:
xp

smp = ds
xm
xp

(dx ) + (dy )
2

xm

14.4.1First Degree Curve


The curve length of a first degree curve, see Figure 14.41-a, in the two intervals in the region
xm < x < x p is:
smp =

( x0 xm )2 + ( y0 ym )2 + (x p x0 )2 + ( y p y0 )2

14.4.2Second Degree Curve


The curve length of a second degree curve, see Figure 14.41-b, in the two intervals in the
region xm < x < x p is:
smp

+ p 1 + p 2 + ln p + 1 + p 2
0
0
0
0

= p2

p1 1 + p1 2 ln p1 + 1 + p12

with:

326

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

cos =

sin =

(x
(x

x p xm

xm )2 + ( y p ym )2
yp ym

xm )2 + ( y p ym )2

p0 = + 2

(x
(x

xm ) cos + ( y p y m ) sin
p x0 ) cos + ( y p y0 ) sin

( y0 ym ) cos (x0 xm ) sin


( x0 xm ) cos + ( y0 ym ) sin
( x xm ) cos + ( y0 ym ) sin
0

p1 =

(x

p=

(x

x0 ) cos + ( y p y0 ) sin

x0 ) cos + ( y p y0 ) sin
4

327

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

328

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

15 References
Abramowitz and Stegun [1964]
M. Abramowitz and I.A. Stegun,
Handbook of Mathematical Functions with Formulas and Mathematical Tables,
National Bureau of Standards, U.S. Department of Commerce, Applied Mathematics
Series 55, June 1964.
Adegeest [1994]
L.J.M. Adegeest,
Non-linear Hull Girder Loads in Ships,
PhD Thesis, 1994, Delft University of Technology, The Netherlands.
Athanassoulis and Loukakis [1985]
G.A. Athanassoulis and T.A. Loukakis,
An Extended-Lewis Form Family of Ship Sections and its Applications to Seakeeping
Calculations,
International Shipbuilding Progress, 1985, Vol. 32, No. 366.
Bales [1983]
S.L. Bales,
Wind and Wave Data for Seakeeping Performance Assessment,
Technical Report, 1983, Prepared for the 17th ITTC Seakeeping Committee, Athens,
Greece.
Boese [1970]
P. Boese,
Eine Einfache Methode zur Berechnung der Wiederstandserhhung eines Schiffes in
Seegang,
Technical Report 258, 1970, Institt fr Schiffbau der Universitt Hamburg, Germany.
van den Bosch and Vugts [1966]
J.J. van den Bosch and J.H. Vugts,
Roll Damping by Free Surface Tanks,
Technical Report 83-S, 1966, Netherlands Ship Research Centre TNO, Shipbuilding
Department, Delft, The Netherlands.
Conolly [1974]
J.E. Conolly,
Standards of Good Seakeeping for Destroyers and Frigates in Head Seas,
International Symposium on the Dynamics of Marine Vehicles and Structures in
Waves, 1974, No. 8, London, U.K.
Dimitrieva [1994]
I. Dimitrieva,
DELFRAC, 3-D Potential Theory Including Wave Diffraction and Drift Forces Acting
on the Structures,
(Description of the 3-D Computer Code DELFRAC, written by J.A. Pinkster),
Technical Report 1017, 1994, Delft University of Technology, Ship Hydromechanics
Laboratory, The Netherlands.
329

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Faltinsen and Svensen [1990]


O.M. Faltinsen and T. Svensen,
Incorporation of Seakeeping Theories in CAD,
International Symposium on CFD and CAD in Ship Design, 1990, MARIN,
Wageningen, The Netherlands.
Frank [1967]
W. Frank,
Oscillation of Cylinders in or below the Free Surface of Deep Fluids,
Technical Report 2375, 1967, Naval Ship Research and Development Centre,
Washington DC, U.S.A.
Fukuda [1962]
J. Fukuda,
Coupled Motions and Midship Bending Moments of a Ship in Regular Waves,
Journal of the Society of Naval Architects of Japan, 1962.
Gerritsma and Beukelman [1972]
J. Gerritsma and W. Beukelman,
Analysis of the Resistance Increase in Waves of a Fast Cargo-ship,
International Shipbuilding Progress, 1972, Vol. 18, No. 217.
Grim [1953]
O. Grim,
Berechnung der durch Schwingungen eines Schiffskrpers Erzeugten Hydrodynamischen Krfte,
Jahrbuch der Schiffsbautechnischen Gesellschaft, 1953, No. 47, pages 277-299.
Grim [1955]
O. Grim,
Die Hydrodynamischen Krfte beim Rollversuch,
Schiffstechnik, 1955, No. 3.
Grim [1956]
O. Grim,
Die Schwingungen von schwimmenden zweidimensionalen Krper,
Technical Report, 1956, HSVA-Bericht No. 1090, HSVA, Hamburg, Germany.
Grim [1957]
O. Grim,
Die Schwingungen von schwimmenden zweidimensionalen Krper,
Technical Report, 1957, HSVA-Bericht No. 1171, HSVA, Hamburg, Germany.
Haskind [1957]
M. Haskind,
The Exciting Forces and Wetting of Ships in Waves (in Russian),
Izvestia Akademii Nauk SSSR, Otdelenie Tskhnicheshikh Nauk, 1957, No. 7, pages
65-79.

330

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Huijsmans [1996]
R.H.M. Huijsmans,
Motions and Drift Forces on Moored Vessels in Current,
PhD Thesis, 1996, Delft University of Technology, The Netherlands.
Ikeda, Himeno and Tanaka [1978]
Y. Ikeda, Y. Himeno and N. Tanaka,
A Prediction Method for Ship Rolling,
Technical Report 00405, 1978, Department of Naval Architecture, University of Osaka
Prefecture, Japan.
John [1950]
F. John,
On the Motions of Floating Bodies, Part II,
Comm. on Pure and Applied Mathematics, 1950, Vol. 3, Interscience Publishers, Inc,
New York, pages 45-100.
de Jong [1973]
B. de Jong,
Computation of Hydrodynamic Coefficients of Oscillating Cylinders,
Technical Report 145-S, 1973, Netherlands Ship Research Centre TNO, Shipbuilding
Department, Delft, The Netherlands.
Journe [1991]
J.M.J. Journe,
Motions of Rectangular Barges,
Proceedings 10th International Conference on Offshore Mechanics and Arctic
Engineering}, 1991, Stavanger, Norway.
Journe [1992]
J.M.J. Journe,
Strip Theory Algorithms, Revised Report 1992,
Technical Report 912, 1992, Delft University of Technology, Ship Hydromechanics
Laboratory, The Netherlands.
Journe [1997]
J.M.J. Journe,
Liquid Cargo and Its Effect on Ship Motions,
STAB'97 Conference, 1997, Varna, Bulgaria, Internet: www.shipmotions.nl.
Journe [2001]
J.M.J. Journe,
Verification and Validation of Ship Motions Program SEAWAY,
Technical Report 1213a, 2001, Delft University of Technology, Ship Hydromechanics
Laboratory, The Netherlands, Internet: www.shipmotions.nl.
Journe and van t Veer [1995]
J.M.J. Journe and A.P. van t Veer,
First Order Wave Loads in Beam Waves,
331

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Proceedings 5th International Offshore and Polar Engineering Conference, 1995, The
Hague, the Netherlands, Internet: www.shipmotions.nl.
Journe and Massie [2001]
J.M.J. Journe and W.W. Massie,
Offshore Hydromechanics, Lecture Notes,
First Edition, January 2001, Delft University of Technology, Ship Hydromechanics
Laboratory, The Netherlands, Internet: www.shipmotions.nl.
Keil [1974]
H. Keil,
Die Hydrodynamische Krfte bei der periodischen Bewegung zweidimensionaler
Krper an der Oberflche flacher Gewasser,
Bericht Nr. 305, 1974, Institut fr Schiffbau der Universitt Hamburg, Deutschland.
von Kerczek and Tuck [1969]
C. von Kerczek and E.O. Tuck,
The Representation of Ship Hulls by Conformal Mapping Functions,
Journal of Ship Research, 1969, Vol. 13, No. 4.
Kirsch [1969]
M. Kirsch,
Zur Tauch- und Stampfbewegung eines Schiffes,
Schiffstechnik, Band 16, 1969.
Kirsch [1969]
M. Kirsch,
Die Berechnung der Bewegungsgren der gekoppelten Tauch- und Stampfschwingungen nach der erweiterten Streifenmethode von Grim und die Berechnung
der Wahrscheinlichkeit fr das berschreiten bestimmter Schranken durch diese
Gren,
Bericht Nr. 241, 1969, Institut fr Schiffbau der Universitt Hamburg, Deutschland.
Korkut and Hebert [1970]
M. Korkut and E. Hebert,
Some Notes on Static Anchor Chain Curve,
Offshore Technology Conference, 1970, No. OTC 1160, Dallas, Texas, U.S.A.
Korvin-Kroukovsky [1955]
B.V. Korvin-Kroukovsky,
Investigations of Ship Motions in Regular in Regular Waves,
Transactions SNAME, 1955, No. 63, pages 386-435.
Korvin-Kroukovsky and Jacobs [1957]
B.V. Korvin-Kroukovsky and W.R. Jacobs,
Pitching and Heaving Motions of a Ship in Regular Waves,
Transactions SNAME, 1957, No. 65, pages 590-632.
Kumai [1959]
T. Kumai,
332

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Added Mass Moment of Inertia Induced by Torsional Vibration of Ships,


Reports of the Research Institute for Applied Mechanics, 1959, Vol. VII, No. 28.
Landweber and de Macagno [1957]
L. Landweber and M.C. de Macagno,
Added Mass of Two-dimensional Forms Oscillating in a Free surface,
Journal of Ship Research, Vol. 1, 1957.
Landweber and de Macagno [1959]
L. Landweber and M.C. de Macagno,
Added Mass of Two-dimensional Forms Oscillating in a Free surface,
Journal of Ship Research, Vol. 1, 1957 and Vol. 2, 1959.
Lamb [1932]
H. Lamb,
Hydrodynamics,
Dover Publications, Inc., New York, 1932, 6th Edition.
Lewis [1929]
F.M. Lewis,
The Inertia of Water Surrounding a Vibrating Ship,
Transactions SNAME, Vol. 37, 1929.
Lloyd [1989]
A.R.J.M. Lloyd,
Seakeeping, Ship Behaviour in Rough Weather,
ISBN 0-7458-0230-3. 1989, Ellis Horwood Limited, Market Cross House, Cooper
Street, Chichester, West Sussex, P019 1EB England.
Miller [1974]
E.R. Miller,
Unknown Title of a Report on Roll Damping,
Technical Report 6136-74-280, 1974, NAVSPEC.
Newman [1962]
J.N. Newman,
The Exciting Forces on Fixed Bodies in Waves,
Journal of Ship Research, 1962, Vol. 6, No. 4, pages 10-17.
Ochi [1964]
M.K. Ochi,
Prediction of Occurrence and Severity of Ship Slamming at Sea,
Proceedings of 5th O.N.R. Symposium, 1964, Bergen, Norway.
Ogilvie [1963]
T.F. Ogilvie,
First and Second Order Forces on a Cylinder Submerged under a Free Surface,
Journal of Fluid Mechanics, 1963, pages 451-472.
Porter [1960]
333

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

W.R. Porter,
Pressure Distribution, Added Mass and Damping Coefficients for Cylinders
Oscillating in a Free Surface,
Technical Report 82, 1960, University of California, Institute of Engineering
Research, Berkeley, California, U.S.A.
Reed and Nowacki [1974]
M.A. Reed and H. Nowacki,
Interactive Creation of Fair Ship Lines,
Journal of Ship Research, 1974, Vol. 18, No. 2.
Salvesen, Tuck and Faltinsen [1970]
N. Salvesen, E.O. Tuck and O.M. Faltinsen,
Ship Motions and Sea Loads,
SNAME, 1970, Vol. 78, pp 250-287
Sargent and Kaplan [1974]
T.P. Sargent and P. Kaplan,
Modifications to Lloyds Register of Shipping Strip Theory Computer Program (LR
2570,
Technical Report 74-103, 1974, Oceanics Inc.
Schmitke [1978]
R.T. Schmitke,
ROLLRFT, a Fortran Program to Predict Ship Roll, Sway and Yaw Motions in Oblique
Waves, Including the Effect of Rudder, Fin and Tank Roll Stabilizers,
Technical Report 78/G, 1978, Defence Research Establishment, Atlantic, Dartmouth
N.S., Canada.
Stoker [1957]
J.J. Stoker,
Water Waves,
Interscience publishers, Inc, New York, 1957.
Tasai [1959]
F. Tasai,
On the Damping Force and Added Mass of Ships Heaving and Pitching,
Technical Report, Research Institute for Applied Mechanics, Kyushu University,
Japan, 1959, Vol. VII, No 26.
Tasai [1960]
F. Tasai,
Formula for Calculating Hydrodynamic Force on a Cylinder Heaving in the Free
Surface, (N-Parameter Family),
Technical Report, Research Institute for Applied Mechanics, Kyushu University,
Japan, 1960, Vol. VIII, No 31.
Tasai [1961]
F. Tasai,

334

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Hydrodynamic Force and Moment Produced by Swaying and Rolling Oscillation of


Cylinders on the Free Surface,
Technical Report, Research Institute for Applied Mechanics, Kyushu University,
Japan, 1961, Vol. IX, No 35.
Tasai [1965]
F. Tasai,
Ship Motions in Beam Waves,
Technical Report, Research Institute for Applied Mechanics, Kyushu University,
Japan, 1965, Vol. XIII, No 45.
Tasai [1969]
F. Tasai,
Improvements in the Theory of Ship Motions in Longitudinal Waves,
Proceedings 12th I.T.T.C., 1969.
Tasaki [1963]
R. Tasaki,
Researches on Seakeeping Qualities of Ships in Japan, Model Experiments in Waves,
On the Shipment of Water in Head Waves,
Journal of the Society of Naval Architects of Japan, 1963, Vol. 8.
Timman and Newman [1962]
R. Timman and J.N. Newman,
The Coupled Damping Coefficients of a Symmetric Ship,
Journal of Ship Research, 1962, Vol. 5, No. 4, pages 1-7.
Troost [1955]
L. Troost,
A Simplified Method for Preliminary Powering of Single Screw Merchant Ships,
New England Section of the Society of Naval Architects and Marine Engineers,
October Meeting, 1955.
Ursell [1949]
F. Ursell,
On the Heaving Motion of a Circular Cylinder on the Surface of a Fluid,
Quarterly Journal of Mechanics and Applied Mathematics}, Vol. II, 1949.
Vantorre and Journe [2003]
M. Vantorre and J.M.J. Journe
Validation of the Strip Theory Code SEAWAY by Model Tests in Very Shallow Water,
Colloquium on Numerical Modelling, 23-24 October 2003, Antwerp, Belgium,
Internet: www.shipmotions.nl.
.
Verhagen and van Wijngaarden [1965]
J. Verhagen and L. van Wijngaarden,
Non-linear Oscillations of Fluid in a Container,
Journal of Fluid Mechanics, 1965, Vol. 22, No. 4, pages 737-751.

335

Theoretical Manual of SEAWAY for Windows


J.M.J. Journe and L.J.M. Adegeest

TUD Report No. 1370


Revision: 14-12-2003

Wehausen and Laitone [1960]


J.V. Wehausen and E.V. Laitone,
Surface Waves,
Handbuch der Physik, edited by S. Fluegge, Vol. 9, Fluid Dynamics 3, Springer
Verlag, Berlin, Germany, pages 446778, 1960.
de Zwaan [1977]
A.P. de Zwaan,
A Method for Solving Equations with Constant or Variable Right Hand Terms (in
Dutch),
Technical Report, 1977, No. 5, Delft University of Technology, Department for
Shipbuilding and Shiphandling, Centrale Werkgroep Wiskunde, The Netherlands.

336

You might also like